Series 90 Micro PLC User`s Manual, GFK-1065F

Series 90 Micro PLC User`s Manual, GFK-1065F
GE Fanuc Automation
Programmable Control Products
Series 90™
Micro PLC
User's Manual
GFK-1065F
June 1998
GFL-002
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,
currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this
equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment,
a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which
are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Alarm Master
CIMPLICITY
CIMPLICITY Control
CIMPLICITY PowerTRAC
CIMPLICITY 90–ADS
CIMSTAR
Field Control
GEnet
Genius
Genius PowerTRAC
Helpmate
Logicmaster
Modelmaster
PowerMotion
ProLoop
PROMACRO
Series Five
Series 90
Series One
Series Six
Series Three
VuMaster
Workmaster
©Copyright 1994—1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
RFI Standards
The Series 90 Micro PLCs have been tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule, Part 15,
Subpart J. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires the following note to be published according to
FCC guidelines.
Note
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed in
It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
The following note is required to be published by the Canadian Department of Communications.
Note
apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.
GFK-1065F
iii
iv
Preface
The following markings are required to appear in the Series 90 Micro PLC User’s
for Class I Div 2
1.
IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A,B,C,D
OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
2.
3.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2:
and
ADVERTISSEMENT - RISQUE D’EXPLOSION - LA
SUBSTITUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT RENDRE
CE MATERIEL INACCEPTABLE POUR LES EMPLACEMENTS DE CLASSE I, DIVISION 2.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT
DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS
BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN
TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
ADVERTISSEMENT - RISQUE D’EXPLOSION AVANT DE DECONNECTER L‘EQUIPEMENT,
COUPER LE COURANT OU S‘ASSURER QUE
L‘EMPLACEMENT EST DESIGNE NON DANGEREUX.
v
vi
Preface
Content of This Manual
This manual provides information necessary to enable you to integrate a Series 90 Micro
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) into a wide variety of control applications. This manual
contains descriptions of hardware components, installation procedures, system operation
information, and maintenance information for the Series 90 Micro PLC.
Revisions to This Manual
This manual revision (GFK-1065E) incorporates the following changes:
•
A new 14-point Micro PLC, IC693UDD104, is now available. Technical information
pertaining to this unit has been added where appropriate.
•
Additional corrections have been made as needed.
Content of This Manual
Chapter 1. Quick Start. Brief procedures for getting the Micro PLC up and running. Includes
“Frequently Asked Questions” and “Programming Examples.”
Chapter 2. Introduction. An overview of the Micro PLC functional and physical characteristics.
Describes compatibility with other Series 90 PLCs and lists model specifications.
Chapter 3. Installation. Procedures for installing the Micro PLC and preparing the system for use.
Included in this chapter are instructions for unpacking, inspecting, and installing the Micro PLC.
Instructions are also provided for connecting cables to programming devices.
Chapter 4. Field Wiring. Power and I/O specifications, and wiring information for the Micro PLC.
Chapter 5. Configuration. Configuration and programming using the Logicmaster 90 Micro
software or the Hand-Held Programmer.
Chapter 6. High Speed Counters. Features, operation, and configuration of the High Speed
Counter function.
Chapter 7. Analog I/O. Features, operation, and configuration of the Analog I/O function, a
feature of the 23-point Micro PLC.
Chapter 8. System Operation. System operation of the Micro PLC. Includes a discussion of the
PLC system sweep sequences, the power-up and power-down sequences, clocks and timers, security
through password assignment, and the I/O system.
GFK-1065F
vii
Preface
Chapter 9. Diagnostics. A guide to troubleshooting the Micro PLC system. Section 1 describes
how to use the self-diagnostic LED blink codes. Section 2 describes how the Micro PLC handles
system faults.
Appendix A. Instruction Timing. Tables showing the memory size and execution time required
for each function.
Appendix B. Reference Types. Listing of user references and references for fault reporting. Also
contains tables listing memory locations that are reserved for I/O functions.
Appendix C. PLC/Software Cross Reference. A comparative listing of the instructions and
function blocks supported by the Series 90 Micro PLC and the Series 90-20 PLC.
Appendix D. Serial Port and Cables. Description of the serial port, converter, and cables used to
connect Series 90 PLCs for Series 90 Protocol (SNP).
Appendix E. Converters. Detailed description of the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter for the
Series 90 PLCs. Describes the Miniconverter Kit for and the Isolated Repeater/Converter with
Series 90 PLCs.
Appendix F. Cable Data Sheets. Data sheets describing each of the Series 90 PLC cable types that
are commonly used with the Micro PLC.
Appendix G. Sample Application for PWM and Pulse Outputs. An example of the use of analog
I/O through a signal conditioning unit.
Appendix H. Case Histories. Brief summaries of applications that use the Micro PLC.
viii
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
GFK-1065F
Preface
Related Publications
Logicmaster™ 90 Series 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual (GFK-0466)
Series 90™-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual (GFK-0467)
Workmaster® II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation (GFK-0401)
Workmaster Programmable Control Information Center Guide to Operation (GEK-25373)
Hand-Held Programmer, Series 90™-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers User’s Manual
(GFK-0402)
Series 90™-30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual (GFK-0356)
Series 90™-70 Programmable Controller Installation Manual (GFK-0262)
Series 90™ PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual (GFK-0582)
Series 90™ Micro Field Processor User’s Manual (GFK-0711)
Important Product Information, Micro PLC (GFK-1094)
Important Product Information, Micro Expansion Unit (GFK-1474)
Data Sheet, 14-Point Micro PLCs (GFK-1087)
Data Sheet, 28-Point Micro PLCs (GFK-1222)
Data Sheet, 23-Point Micro PLC (GFK-1459)
Data Sheet, Micro Expansion Unit (GFK-1460)
At GE Fanuc Automation, we strive to produce quality technical documentation. After you have
used this manual, please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader's Comment Card
located on the next page.
GFK-1065F
Preface
ix
Contents
Chapter 1
Quick Start........................................................................................................... 1-1
What You Will Need ........................................................................................................1-1
Getting Started ..................................................................................................................1-2
Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................................................1-4
Programming Examples ....................................................................................................1-6
Chapter 2
Introduction ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Compatibility ....................................................................................................................2-3
Functional Description......................................................................................................2-4
CPU Board..................................................................................................................2-4
High Speed Counters (IC693UDR011/002/005, IC693UAL006, IC693UDR010) ...2-6
Type A Counters .................................................................................................2-6
Type B Counter...................................................................................................2-6
DC Output (IC693UDR005/010, UAL006)...............................................................2-6
PWM Output.......................................................................................................2-6
Pulse Output........................................................................................................2-7
ASCII Output (IC693UDR005/010, UAL006) ..........................................................2-7
I/O Board ....................................................................................................................2-7
Input Circuits..............................................................................................................2-7
DC Input Circuits (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UAL006)...............................2-7
AC Input Circuits (IC693UAA003/007).............................................................2-7
Potentiometer Inputs (All Models)......................................................................2-7
Output Circuits ...........................................................................................................2-8
Relay Output Circuits (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UEX011, UAL006) ........2-8
AC Output Circuits (IC693UAA003/007) ..........................................................2-8
DC Output (IC693UDR005/010, IC693UAL006)..............................................2-8
Analog I/O (IC693UAL006)......................................................................................2-8
Input/Output Connectors ............................................................................................2-9
Serial Ports .................................................................................................................2-9
Serial Communications Protocols .......................................................................2-9
Port 1 (All Models) ...........................................................................................2-10
Port 2 (23 and 28-Point Models).......................................................................2-11
Expansion Port (23 and 28-Point Models) ...............................................................2-11
Terminal Strips.........................................................................................................2-12
Status Indicators .......................................................................................................2-13
Power Supply Board.................................................................................................2-13
Configuration and Programming.....................................................................................2-14
Fault Reporting ...............................................................................................................2-14
Specifications..................................................................................................................2-15
Chapter 3
Installation ........................................................................................................... 3-1
Minimum Hardware Requirements...................................................................................3-1
Unpacking .........................................................................................................................3-1
Installation Requirements .................................................................................................3-2
Installation.........................................................................................................................3-2
Mounting a Unit on a DIN Rail ..................................................................................3-4
GFK-1065F
xi
Contents
Removing a Unit From a DIN Rail.............................................................................3-4
Grounding Procedures ................................................................................................3-5
Logicmaster Programming Device Grounding...........................................................3-5
I/O Installation and Wiring.........................................................................................3-5
Powerup Self-test ..............................................................................................................3-6
Normal Powerup Sequence ........................................................................................3-6
Fast Powerup..............................................................................................................3-7
Error Detection And Correction.................................................................................3-7
Connecting a Programming Device ..................................................................................3-8
Connecting the Hand-Held Programmer ....................................................................3-8
Connections for Using Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Software ...............................3-10
Workmaster II Computer with WSI .........................................................................3-10
lBM-PC Compatible Computer................................................................................3-10
Multidrop Serial Data Configuration to Series 90 PLCs..........................................3-12
Replacing Fuses (AC In/AC Out Models Only) .............................................................3-13
Expansion Unit Installation.............................................................................................3-16
Micro Expansion Unit ..............................................................................................3-16
Micro Expansion Unit Orientation ...........................................................................3-17
Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................3-18
Physical Order of Different Types of Expansion Units ...........................................3-18
Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications for Series 90 Micro PLC..3-20
CE Mark Installation Requirements................................................................................3-22
Chapter 4
Field Wiring......................................................................................................... 4-1
Positive and Negative Logic Definitions ..........................................................................4-1
Interface Specifications.....................................................................................................4-3
Model Summaries.......................................................................................................4-3
14-Point DC In/Relay Out/AC Power (IC693UDR001/UEX011) .............................4-3
14-Point DC In/Relay Out/DC Power (IC693UDR002), 14 Point DC In/DC Out/DC
Power (IC693UDD104) ............................................................................................4-4
14-Point AC In/AC Out/AC Power (IC693UAA003)................................................4-4
28-Point DC In/DC & Relay Out/AC Power (IC693UDR005)..................................4-5
23-Point DC In/DC & Relay Out/Analog I/O/AC Power (IC693UAL006) ...............4-5
28-Point AC In/AC Out/AC Power (IC693UAA007)................................................4-6
28-Point DC/DC & Relay Out/DC Power (IC693UDR010) ......................................4-6
Positive/Negative Logic Inputs (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UDD00104, UAL006,
UEX011).....................................................................................................................4-7
Potentiometer Analog Inputs (All Models) ................................................................4-8
High Speed Counter Inputs (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UAL006) .......................4-9
Relay Outputs (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UAL006, UEX011) .........................4-10
Output Circuit Protection .........................................................................................4-11
High Speed Counter Outputs (IC693UDR001/002/005, IC693UAL006) ...............4-12
DC Outputs (IC693UDR005/010 and IC693UAL006)............................................4-12
Transistor Outputs 24VDC (IC693UDD104) ..........................................................4-12
xii
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
GFK-1065F
Contents
24 VDC Output Power Supply (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, IC693UDD104,
IC693UAL006, IC693UEX011)...............................................................................4-14
Analog Inputs (IC693UAL006)................................................................................4-15
Analog Output (IC693UAL006) ..............................................................................4-16
AC Inputs (IC693UAA003/007) ..............................................................................4-17
AC Outputs (IC693UAA003/007)............................................................................4-18
Field Wiring Installation .................................................................................................4-20
Wire Connection Information...................................................................................4-20
Power Supply and I/O Connections..........................................................................4-20
General Wiring Procedures ......................................................................................4-21
Chapter 5
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 5-1
Micro PLC Parameters......................................................................................................5-1
Configuration and Programming Using the HHP .............................................................5-4
HHP Configuration Screens .......................................................................................5-4
Storing the User Program Using the HHP..................................................................5-7
Storing Configuration and Register Data Using the HHP..........................................5-8
Other HHP Functions .................................................................................................5-8
Clearing User Memory Using the HHP......................................................................5-8
Booting up in Stop Mode Without Clearing Memory ................................................5-9
Setting the Time of Day Clock (23 and 28-Point PLCs) ............................................5-9
Configuration and Programming Using Logicmaster 90 Software.................................5-10
Configuring Serial Ports .................................................................................................5-12
Logicmaster 90 Configuration of Serial Port 2 ........................................................5-13
Configuring Serial Ports Using the COMM_REQ Function....................................5-15
Command Block.......................................................................................................5-15
Example ...................................................................................................................5-18
Programmer Attach Feature (14-Point Micro PLCs) ...............................................5-20
Configuring ASCII Output..............................................................................................5-21
Autodial Command Block ........................................................................................5-21
Put String Command Block ......................................................................................5-23
Status Word for Custom Protocol COMM_REQs ...................................................5-25
Configuring Expansion Units (23 and 28-Point Micro PLCs)........................................5-26
Logicmaster Screens for Configuring Expansion Units...........................................5-27
Series 90 Micro 14-Point Expansion Unit................................................................5-28
14-Point Generic Expansion Unit.............................................................................5-28
Generic Expansion Unit ...........................................................................................5-29
I/O Link Interface Expansion Unit ...........................................................................5-30
HHP Screens for Configuring Expansion Units.......................................................5-31
Configuring Generic Expansion Units .....................................................................5-31
Configuring Standard Expansion Units....................................................................5-32
Configuring I/O Link Interface Expansion Units .....................................................5-33
Reference Error Checking........................................................................................5-34
Configuring Q1 for PWM or Pulse Output (IC693UDR005/010 and IC693UAL006)..5-35
GFK-1065F
Contents
xiii
Contents
PWM Output ............................................................................................................5-36
Pulse Train Output....................................................................................................5-38
Configuring of Outputs Q1 to Q5 (IC693UDD104) ................................................5-39
PWM Output (IC693UDD104) ................................................................................5-40
Sample Calculation for PWM Output ...............................................................5-42
Pulse Output (IC693UDD104) .................................................................................5-43
Chapter 6
High Speed Counters .......................................................................................... 6-1
High Speed Counter/CPU Interface..................................................................................6-3
Registers .....................................................................................................................6-3
Counts per Timebase Register....................................................................................6-3
Preload Register .........................................................................................................6-3
Strobe Register...........................................................................................................6-4
Data Automatically Sent by the HSC .........................................................................6-4
Analog Input (%AI) Data...........................................................................................6-4
High Speed Counter Status Codes..............................................................................6-5
Status Bits (%I) ..........................................................................................................6-5
Data Automatically Sent to the HSC (%Q)................................................................6-6
Output Failure Mode.........................................................................................................6-7
Type A Counter Operation................................................................................................6-8
Type A Counter Overview .........................................................................................6-8
Type A Operating Parameters ....................................................................................6-9
Counter Enable/Disable .............................................................................................6-9
Counter Output Enable/Disable..................................................................................6-9
Preload/Strobe............................................................................................................6-9
Count Mode .............................................................................................................6-10
Count Direction........................................................................................................6-10
Strobe/Count Edge ...................................................................................................6-10
Counter Time Base...................................................................................................6-10
Count Limits.............................................................................................................6-11
Output Preset Points.................................................................................................6-11
Preload Value...........................................................................................................6-13
Type B Counter Operation..............................................................................................6-14
A-Quad-B Counting..................................................................................................6-14
Type B Counter Overview........................................................................................6-15
Type B Operating Parameters ..................................................................................6-16
Counter Enable/Disable ...........................................................................................6-16
Counter Output Enable/Disable................................................................................6-16
Preload/Strobe..........................................................................................................6-16
Count Mode .............................................................................................................6-16
Strobe Edge..............................................................................................................6-17
Counter Time Base...................................................................................................6-17
Count Limits.............................................................................................................6-17
Output Preset Points.................................................................................................6-18
Preload Value...........................................................................................................6-19
Configuration ..................................................................................................................6-20
Logicmaster 90 Software..........................................................................................6-24
xiv
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
GFK-1065F
Contents
I/O Scanner and Counter Type Configuration..........................................................6-24
Counter-specific Configuration ................................................................................6-25
Type A Counter.................................................................................................6-25
Type B Counter.................................................................................................6-26
Hand-Held Programmer............................................................................................6-27
Configuration Screens Common to A4 and B1-3A4 Configurations .......................6-27
A4 Counter Specific Screens....................................................................................6-28
Type B Counter Specific Screens.............................................................................6-31
COMM_REQ Function ............................................................................................6-34
Command Block.......................................................................................................6-34
Example ...................................................................................................................6-38
Application Examples–RPM Indicator ...........................................................................6-40
Example 1 .................................................................................................................6-40
Example 2 .................................................................................................................6-40
Application Example — Input Capture ..........................................................................6-41
Chapter 7
Analog I/O............................................................................................................ 7-1
Overview ...........................................................................................................................7-2
Configuration ....................................................................................................................7-5
Logicmaster 90 Screens..............................................................................................7-6
Analog Input ..............................................................................................................7-6
Analog Output............................................................................................................7-6
HHP Screens...............................................................................................................7-7
Calibration.........................................................................................................................7-9
Default Gains and Offsets ..........................................................................................7-9
Calibration Procedure...............................................................................................7-10
Calibration of Input Channels ..................................................................................7-10
Calibration of Output Channels................................................................................7-11
Storing Calibration Constants ..................................................................................7-12
Chapter 8
System Operation ................................................................................................ 8-1
PLC Sweep Summary .......................................................................................................8-1
Sweep Time Contribution...........................................................................................8-3
Housekeeping.............................................................................................................8-3
Input Scan ..................................................................................................................8-3
Program Execution.....................................................................................................8-4
Output Scan................................................................................................................8-4
Programmer Service...................................................................................................8-4
Deviations from the Standard Program Sweep...........................................................8-5
Constant Sweep Time Mode ......................................................................................8-5
PLC Sweep When in STOP Mode .............................................................................8-5
Software Structure ............................................................................................................8-6
Program Structure.......................................................................................................8-6
Data Structure.............................................................................................................8-6
Powerup and Power-Down Sequence ...............................................................................8-8
Powerup Sequence......................................................................................................8-8
GFK-1065F
Contents
xv
Contents
Power-Down Conditions ............................................................................................8-8
Power Cycle................................................................................................................8-9
Clocks and Timers ..........................................................................................................8-11
Elapsed Time Clock .................................................................................................8-11
Time of Day Clock (23 and 28-Point Micro PLCs) .................................................8-11
Watchdog Timer.......................................................................................................8-11
Constant Sweep Timer .............................................................................................8-11
Timer Function Blocks .............................................................................................8-12
Timed Contacts.........................................................................................................8-12
System Security...............................................................................................................8-13
Overview ..................................................................................................................8-13
Password Protection .................................................................................................8-13
Privilege Levels........................................................................................................8-13
Privilege Level Change Requests.............................................................................8-14
OEM Protection .......................................................................................................8-14
I/O System for the Series 90 Micro PLC ........................................................................8-15
I/O Scan Sequence....................................................................................................8-15
Default Conditions for Micro PLC Output Points ...................................................8-15
Software Filters ........................................................................................................8-16
Discrete Input Filtering ............................................................................................8-16
Discrete Input Filtering Control ........................................................................8-16
Limitations of Discrete Input Filtering..............................................................8-16
Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering.......................................................................8-17
Input Settings ....................................................................................................8-17
Limitations of Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering ........................................8-17
Diagnostic Data...............................................................................................................8-18
Flash Memory .................................................................................................................8-18
Chapter 9
Diagnostics ........................................................................................................... 9-1
Powerup Diagnostics.........................................................................................................9-2
Faults and Fault Handling.................................................................................................9-3
Fault Handling ............................................................................................................9-3
Classes of Faults.........................................................................................................9-3
System Response to Faults .........................................................................................9-4
Fault Summary References.........................................................................................9-6
Fault Reference Definitions........................................................................................9-6
Fault Results...............................................................................................................9-8
Accessing Additional Fault Information ....................................................................9-8
Special Operational Notes.................................................................................................9-9
Technical Help ..................................................................................................................9-9
xvi
Appendix A
Instruction Timing................................................................... A-1
Appendix B
Reference Types ........................................................................B-1
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
GFK-1065F
Contents
User References ............................................................................................................... B-1
References for Fault Reporting........................................................................................ B-2
Fixed I/O Map Locations ................................................................................................. B-3
Appendix C
PLC/Software Cross Reference .............................................. C-1
Appendix D
Serial Port and Cables............................................................. D-1
RS-422 Interface .............................................................................................................. D-1
Cable and Connector Specifications ................................................................................ D-2
Port Configurations.......................................................................................................... D-3
Series 90 PLC Serial Port.......................................................................................... D-3
Workmaster Serial Port ............................................................................................. D-5
IBM-AT Serial Port ................................................................................................... D-6
RS-232/RS-485 Converter......................................................................................... D-6
Serial Cable Diagrams ..................................................................................................... D-7
Point-to-Point Connections ....................................................................................... D-7
RS-232 Point-to-Point Connections ..........................................................................D-7
RS-422 Point-to-Point Connection..........................................................................D-11
Multidrop Connections............................................................................................ D-12
Programmer-to-Series 90 PLC Connections ...........................................................D-12
PLC-to-PLC Master/Slave Connections..................................................................D-18
Appendix E
Converters .................................................................................E-1
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter .............................................................................. E-2
Features...................................................................................................................... E-2
Functions ................................................................................................................... E-2
Location in System .................................................................................................... E-2
Installation ................................................................................................................. E-3
Cable Description ...................................................................................................... E-4
Pin Assignments ........................................................................................................ E-5
Logic Diagram........................................................................................................... E-6
Jumper Configuration................................................................................................ E-7
Specifications ............................................................................................................ E-8
Miniconverter Kit............................................................................................................. E-9
Description of Miniconverter .................................................................................... E-9
Pin Assignments...................................................................................................... E-10
System Configurations ............................................................................................ E-11
Cable Diagrams (Point-To-Point) ........................................................................... E-11
Isolated Repeater/Converter........................................................................................... E-13
Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater/Converter................................................. E-15
Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater/Converter............................................. E-16
System Configurations ............................................................................................ E-18
Simple Multidrop Configuration ............................................................................. E-18
GFK-1065F
Contents
xvii
Contents
Complex Multidrop Configuration.......................................................................... E-19
Rules for Using Repeater/Converters in Complex Networks .................................. E-19
Cable Diagrams ....................................................................................................... E-20
Appendix F
Cable Data Sheets .....................................................................F-1
IC693CBL303: Hand-Hand Programmer Cable ...............................................................F-2
IC690CBL701: Workmaster (PC-XT) to RS-485/RS-232 Converter Cable ....................F-4
IC690CBL702: PC-AT to RS-485/RS-232 Converter Cable............................................F-5
IC647CBL704: Workstation Interface to SNP Port Cable ...............................................F-6
IC690CBL705: Workmaster II (PS/2) to RS-485/RS-232 Converter Cable ....................F-7
2-Wire Cable Diagrams.....................................................................................................F-8
Appendix G
Sample Application or PWM and Pulse Outputs ................. G-1
Series 90 Micro PLC Analog I/O Through CALEX Signal Conditioners....................... G-1
Application....................................................................................................................... G-1
Solution ............................................................................................................................ G-3
Example 1 .................................................................................................................. G-3
Example 2 .................................................................................................................. G-4
Benefits ............................................................................................................................ G-4
Sample Ladder Logic Diagram ........................................................................................ G-5
Appendix H
Case Histories........................................................................... H-1
Automotive Industry ........................................................................................................ H-2
Fluid Pumping Control .............................................................................................. H-2
Bakery Industry................................................................................................................ H-3
Pastry Line Conveyor Control...................................................................................H-3
Chemical Industry ............................................................................................................ H-4
Chemical Pumping Station ........................................................................................H-4
Commercial Agriculture Industry .................................................................................... H-5
Grain Processing .......................................................................................................H-5
Commercial Laundry Industry ......................................................................................... H-6
Garment Storage Rail Control...................................................................................H-6
Construction Equipment Industry .................................................................................... H-7
Pipe Measuring System .............................................................................................H-7
Entertainment Industry..................................................................................................... H-8
Nightclub Entertainment ...........................................................................................H-8
General Purpose Machinery............................................................................................. H-9
Automated Picture Frame Stapler .............................................................................H-9
Lumber Industry............................................................................................................. H-10
Pallet Rebuilding.....................................................................................................H-10
Material Handling Industry............................................................................................ H-11
Automated Guided Vehicles ...................................................................................H-11
Paper Industry ................................................................................................................ H-12
Gear Pumping Machinery .......................................................................................H-12
xviii
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
GFK-1065F
Contents
Petroleum Industry ......................................................................................................... H-12
Lease Acquisition Control Transfer ........................................................................H-12
Packaging Industry......................................................................................................... H-13
Shrink Wrapping Machine ...................................................................................... H-13
Videocassette Packaging ......................................................................................... H-14
Plastics Industry ............................................................................................................. H-15
Injection Molding .................................................................................................... H-15
Plastic Parts Manufacturing..................................................................................... H-16
Public Emergency Services Industry ............................................................................. H-17
Storm Warning Systems ..........................................................................................H-17
Sports Equipment Industry............................................................................................. H-18
Boxing Partner ........................................................................................................H-18
Tubing Manufacturing Industry ..................................................................................... H-19
Tube Bending..........................................................................................................H-19
Water and Wastewater Industry..................................................................................... H-20
Flood Control Monitoring ....................................................................................... H-20
Sewage/Wastewater Lift Stations............................................................................ H-21
Wastewater Treatment............................................................................................. H-22
Water Flow Control................................................................................................. H-23
Wire Manufacturing Industry......................................................................................... H-24
Quality Control........................................................................................................H-24
Woodworking Industry .................................................................................................. H-25
Conveyor Chain Lubricator.....................................................................................H-25
GFK-1065F
Contents
xix
Chapter
Quick Start
1
This chapter provides an overview of the steps required to get your Micro PLC set up and running.
The Series 90 Micro PLC product line offers models with different capabilities and special features
to meet the needs of a wide range of applications. For this reason, you will need to refer to other
chapters in this manual for details pertaining to the specific Micro PLC that you have. For
summaries of Micro PLC features and specifications for each model, refer to Chapter 2.
No. of I/O Points
I/O Configuration
Power Supply
Catalog Numbers
14
8 DC inputs, 6 relay outputs
100 to 240 VAC
IC693UDR001
14
8 DC inputs, 6 relay outputs
12 to 24 VDC
IC693UDR002
14
8 AC inputs, 6 AC outputs
100 to 240 VAC
IC693UAA003
14
8 DC inputs, 6 DC outputs
12 to 24 VDC
IC693UDD104
14
8 DC inputs, 6 relay outputs (expansion unit)
100 to 240 VAC
IC693UEX011
23
13 DC inputs, 1 DC output, 9 relay outputs,
2 analog in, 1 analog out
100 to 240 VAC
IC693UAL006
28
16 DC inputs, 1 DC output, 11 relay outputs
100 to 240 VAC
IC693UDR005
28
16 AC inputs, 12 AC outputs
100 to 240 VAC
IC693UAA007
28
16 DC inputs, 1 DC output, 11 relay outputs
24 VDC
IC693UDR010
What You Will Need
•
One of the Micro PLCs listed above.
•
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software (or Logicmaster 90 Micro software).
•
Programming device and appropriate cables: Workmaster® II or CIMSTAR I industrial
computer, an IBM® AT, PS/2® or other MS-DOS compatible Personal Computer (with 386 or
higher microprocessor and 2 MB memory), or a Hand-Held Programmer and cable.
•
RS-422 to RS-232 Interface. Logicmaster 90 software can use a Work Station Interface (WSI)
board, an RS-422 port, or a standard RS-232 interface with an RS-422 to RS-232 converter.
The WSI board is installed in the Workmaster II computer at the factory.
•
Tools for mounting the Micro PLC and connecting field wiring cables.
To run Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software, the programmer (computer) will need:
GFK-1065F
•
At least 4MB of free disk space.
•
At least 520KB (532,480 bytes) of available DOS application memory for the WSI version; at
least 564KB (577,536 bytes) of available DOS application memory, or 520 KB and 42 KB of
available High Memory Area, Upper Memory Block, or Expanded Memory. For details, see
the Logicmaster™ 90-30/30/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466.
1-1
1
Getting Started
The following procedure outlines the steps required to put your Micro PLC into operation.
Step 1. Unpack the Micro PLC
First, carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage. Unpack the shipping container and
verify the contents. Record all serial numbers. For details, see “Unpacking” in Chapter 3.
Step 2. Install the Micro PLC
Mount the Micro PLC on a vertical surface: a wall or panel using screws or on a 35mm DIN rail.
The Micro PLC requires a minimum clearance of 1.99 inches (50mm) on each side for cooling.
For details, see “Installation Requirements” and “Installation” in Chapter 3.
Step 3. Connect Ground and Power Wiring
•
For safe operation of your Micro PLC, the installation must meet the requirements of
“Grounding Procedures” in Chapter 3.
•
For power connections, refer to the wiring diagram for the Micro PLC model that you have.
(See “Field Wiring Installation” in Chapter 4.)
Step 4. Power-up Test
Warning
Ensure that the protective cover is installed over terminals on the terminal
board when power is applied to the unit. The cover protects against
accidental shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to
personnel.
Apply the required power to the system. The Micro PLC should perform a self-diagnostic test. The
OK indicator will blink during power-up diagnostics. When self-diagnostics have been successfully
completed, the OK indicator will remain lighted. For details, refer to “Powerup Self-test” in
Chapter 3.
Step 5. Connect a Programmer to the PLC
Connect a programming device to the RS-422 serial port (Port 1) on the Micro PLC. (Port 2 on 28
and 23-point Micro PLCs does not support configuration and programming.) For cabling diagrams,
refer to “Connecting a Programming Device” in Chapter 3.
If Logicmaster 90 software is not installed on your programmer, install it according to the
procedures in the Logicmaster™ 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual,
GFK-0466.
1-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
1
Step 6. Configure the Micro PLC
The Logicmaster 90 configuration function is used to select Micro PLC operating parameters to
meet the requirements of your system.
A. Start up your computer in DOS mode.
B. At the DOS prompt, type CD LM90 and press the ENTER key.
C. Type LM90 and press ENTER.
D. When the main menu for the Logicmaster 90 software appears, press SHIFT + F1. A list of
PLCs will appear.
E. From the list, select the type of Micro PLC that you have and press ENTER.
F. Press F2. The Software Configuration menu will appear.
For details on configuration, refer to Chapters 5, 6, and 7. When you have finished configuring the
Micro PLC, press ESC to return to the main menu.
Step 7. Enter a Ladder Program
A. In the Logicmaster 90 main menu, press F2. The Programming Software menu will appear.
B. Press F1, Program Display Edit. An empty program folder will appear. For details on using the
programming software, refer to the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software
User’s Manual, GFK-0466. A sample program for the Micro PLC is provided in the
Series 90™ Micro Programmable Logic Controller Self-Teach Manual, GFK-1104.
Warning
Turn off power to the Micro PLC before connecting field wiring.
Step 8. Connect Field Wiring
Refer to “Field Wiring Installation” in Chapter 4 for general wiring information and wiring
diagrams for each Micro PLC model.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-3
1
Frequently Asked Questions
1.
What causes a “No Communications” message when I toggle to MONITOR or ONLINE?
Following are a few possible causes:
•
Insufficient conventional memory (at least 545Kbytes) in your personal computer to load the
Logicmaster 90 communications driver.
Make sure the config.sys file in your computer is properly configured. For details on configuring
your config.sys file, refer to “Software Installation” in the Logicmaster™ 90 Series 90™30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466. For additional assistance, call
your personal computer help line or GE Fanuc PLC Technical Support at 1-800-GEFANUC.
•
Configuration mismatch between Logicmaster 90 in your computer and the PLC configuration.
Make sure that the computer and the PLC are using the same baud rate and parity. From the main
menu in Logicmaster 90, press F2 to enter the configuration software. To check the computer
settings, press F7, Programmer Mode and Setup, and then F4, PLC Communications Serial Port
Setup. To check the PLC settings, press F1, I/O Configuration. The PLC baud rate and parity will
be displayed in the Software Configuration Screen.
•
Broken cable between your computer and PLC or broken or missing RS-232/RS-422
converter.
For information on installing the converter, refer to Appendix E in this manual.
2.
How do you set up the High Speed Counters (HSCs)?
Using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or a Hand-Held Programmer (HHP), enable each
HSC that you want to use. If you want the HSC to drive an output, you must enable its output in the
software configuration and set its Enable Output bit in your program or in the data tables. For
example, if HSC 1 is configured with its output enabled and its Output Enable bit, %Q505 is set, it
will control Q1. (HSC 1 will continually report to the CPU memory location %AI06.) A sample
rung that sets the Output Enable bit for HSC 1 is shown below.
|
|FST SCN
|%S0001
+—————+
+——] [———————+MOVE_|
|
| BIT |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+IN Q+——————————————————————%Q0505
|
| LEN |
|
|00003|
|
+—————+
For more information, refer to “High Speed Counter/CPU Interface” in Chapter 6 of this manual.
Simple (A-type) counters and A-Quad-B (B-type) HSCs count continuously by default, resetting
themselves automatically when a high or low limit is reached. A-type HSCs can also be configured
for one-shot counting, in which the HSC counts to one past the limit and then stops.
In one-shot mode, the HSC can be reset by the program using a Communications Request
(COMM_REQ) function to write a zero to the Accumulator. The HSC can also be reset by the
Preload input. If the counter’s Preload/Strobe parameter is set to PRELOAD (default), the
configured preload value will be loaded to the Accumulator when the Preload/Strobe signal goes
1-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
1
active. For example, if PRELOAD is configured and the default Preload Value of 0 is used, an
input on I2 will reset the Accumulator for HSC 1.
For wiring information, refer to the diagrams in “High Speed Counter Inputs” and the wiring
diagrams provided in “General Wiring Procedures” in Chapter 4.
Warning
When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode, the HSCs will
continue to operate. Also, the HSCs will remain in run mode through a
power cycle. Therefore, if an HSC is running when power is lost, it will run
when power is restored.
3.
How do I program the Micro PLC?
You can use a Hand Held Programmer (IC693PRG300) or Logicmaster 90 software
(IC640HWP300, includes a 2-meter programming cable) loaded into a DOS-based personal
computer. The personal computer must have at least a 386 processor and at least 2 megabytes of
RAM.
For a new-user programming lesson, refer to Appendix A of the Software User’s Manual,
GFK-0466. Chapter 4 of the Series 90™-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference
Manual, GFK-0467 provides descriptions and examples of programming commands for the Micro
PLC.
4.
What should I do when I get a “Password disabled” or “insufficient privilege” message?
There are two possible causes for these messages:
•
Password is set to DISABLE in the Software Configuration screen for the Micro PLC.
The default configuration for password is ENABLE. When changed to DISABLE and stored to the
Micro PLC, the setting is permanent. If the configuration is changed back to ENABLE and stored,
the “password disabled” error message will be generated and the store will not be allowed. You can
either change the configuration back to DISABLE, or use an HHP to erase the program and
configuration, thereby restoring the default configuration.
•
Insufficient privilege has been set in the Software Configuration and stored to the PLC.
The OEM password cannot be overwritten. To remove the OEM password, you must use the HHP
to clear the PLC memory.
If a password has been set from the level 4 menu and then forgotten, you can override it. This
procedure is documented in Chapter 5 in the Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466. (The original
program disks are required.)
5.
What does it mean when OK LED is blinking or the Run LED is not lighted?
Each time power is applied, the CPU performs a self check for several seconds. The OK LED
blinks during the self-test and then changes to a steady on state.
If the Run LED does not light when you go to run mode, the cause could be invalid configuration
or a fatal error in the CPU fault table.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-5
1
Programming Examples
Test Rung
In the following test rung, an input on I1 will turn on output Q1.
%I1
%Q1
|—————————| |—————————————————(
)—|
On-Delay Timer
In the following LD, the set coil, M0001, turns on the timer, which counts to 5 seconds (00050 x
0.10s) and then activates %M0002. %M0002 turns on the output, %Q0001, activates %M0003 to
reset the timer, and resets M0001.
|[ START OF LD PROGRAM EXAMPLE
]
|
|[
VARIABLE DECLARATIONS
]
|
|[
BLOCK DECLARATIONS
]
|
|[
START OF PROGRAM LOGIC
]
|
|FST_SCN
%M0001
+——] [——————————————————————————————————-(S)——|
|
| M0001
+—————-+
%M0002
+——] [———————+ONDTR_+————————————————————( )——|
|
|0.10s |
|
|
|
|%M0003
|
|
+——] [———————+R
|
|
|
|
|
CONST —+PV
|
|
00050 +——————+
|
%R0001
|
|%M0002
%Q0001
+——] [——————————————————————————————————( )———|
|
|%M0002
%M0003
+——] [——————————————————————————————————( )———|
+%M0002
%M0001
+——] [——————————————————————————————————(R)——|
|
[
END OF PROGRAM LOGIC
]
1-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
Chapter
Introduction
2
Series 90 Micro PLCs offer an array of useful features, including:
GFK-1065F
•
Compatibility with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software
•
Support for the 90-30 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP)
•
An alarm processor function
•
Password protection to limit access to PLC contents
•
A built-in High Speed Counter (HSC) function that can be configured as four type A counters
or as one type B counter and one type A counter (DC in/relay out Micro PLCs only)
•
Two potentiometers that provide selectable analog inputs to %AI16 and %AI17 (with
configurable filtering)
•
Configurable software filtering of discrete inputs
•
Series 90 (SNP) and SNP Extended (SNPX), and RTU slave communication protocols
•
A pulse catch input function, selectable on up to four inputs, that detects pulses at least 100
microseconds in width
•
Pulse train and Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) outputs (Micro PLCs with DC output only)
•
Compatibility with 14-point expansion unit (23 and 28-point Micro PLCs)
•
Pager Enunciation function that can be configured to send a specified byte string from Serial
Port 2 (23 and 28-point Micro PLCs)
•
Two analog inputs and one analog output (23-point Micro PLC)
2-1
2
The Micro PLC hardware consists of a single module that includes CPU, I/O, and power supply
functions (Figure 2-1). The compact, lightweight unit is designed for 35mm DIN rail or panel
mounting.
a 45 4 52
I1
I2
I3
I4
COM1
2 4 VDC OUT
I5
I6
I7
I8
COM2
INPUT
PW R
OK
S e rie s 9 0 M i cr o
RUN
INP UT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OUTPUT
PROGRAM MAB LE CONTROLLER
~
OUTP UT
100-2 40VAC
L
Q1
H
COM1
Q2
COM2
Q3
Q4
Q6 COM3
Q5
Typical 14-Point Micro PLC
a4 5 4 99
I1
I2
I3
I4
COM1
I5
I6
I7
I8
COM2
I9
I1 0
I11
I12
COM3
COM3
I1 3
I1 4
I15
I1 6
COM4
COM4
INPUT
24 VD C OUT
PW R
OK
S e r ie s 9 0 M i cr o
RUN
INPUT
INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
7
8
11
12
9
10
13
14
15
16
8
OUT P UT
11
12
OUT PUT
PROGR AM MAB LE C ON TROLLER
~
1 00-240VAC
L
H
OUTP UT
Q1
C OM1
VC
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
COM2
Q6
COM3
Q7
COM4
Q8
COM5
Q9
COM6
Q10
Q11
Q12
COM7 C OM7
Typical 28-Point Micro PLC
Figure 2-1. Series 90 Micro Programmable Logic Controllers
2-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
Compatibility
•
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software(IC641SWP301, 304, 306, 307), release 8.01 or later
•
Series 90-30 firmware release 5.0 and later
•
Series 90-30 Hand-Held Programmer (IC693PRG300)
•
Series 90 Protocol (SNP and SNPX) and RTU Slave protocol
•
Series 90-20 PLCs (Micro PLCs with relay output – IC693UDR005/010 and UAL006 – only)
Table 2-1. Configuration/Programming Software Versions for Partial Compatibility
Logicmaster 90
Software Version
Store to
Micro Rel. 2
or Earlier
Store to
Micro Rel. 3
or Later
Load from
Micro Rel. 2
or Earlier
Load from
Micro Rel. 3
or Later
8.00 or later
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
5.01 or later
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
6.01 or later
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 2-2. Micro to Micro Compatibility
Component
Rel. 3 reads from Memcard
Written by a Rel. 2 Micro
Rel. 2 reads from Memcard
Written by a Rel. 3 Micro
Program
Yes
Yes
Registers
Yes
No
Configuration
Yes
No
Instructions and Function Blocks
The Series 90 Micro PLC supports most 90-30 instruction functions and function blocks.
Detailed descriptions and examples of the use of these instructions can be found in the
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual (GFK-0466), Series 9030/20 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual (GFK-0467), and Hand-Held
Programmer, Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers User’s Manual (GFK-0402).
See Appendix A for a list of instructions supported by the Series 90 Micro PLC.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-3
2
Functional Description
The Micro PLC contains a CPU circuit board, an I/O board, and a Power Supply board. Figure 2-2
provides an overview of Micro PLC inputs and outputs and of the functions performed by each
circuit board.
CPU Board
The CPU contains and executes the user program and communicates with the programmer (HHP
or computer running Logicmaster 90-30/90-20/Micro software). The primary capabilities of the
Micro PLC CPU hardware are listed in Table 2-3
Table 2-3. CPU Capabilities
14-Point Micro PLCs
23 and 28-Point Micro PLCs
H8/3003 microprocessor running at 9.84Mhz
Powerup reset circuit
Interrupt for power fail warning (2.0 ms)
Internal Coils - 1024
Four configurable 5Khz HSCs
512K x 8 sectored flash memory for operating
system and nonvolatile user program storage (3K
words of user flash memory)
256K x 16 sectored flash memory for operating
system and nonvolatile user program storage (6K
words of user flash memory)
32 Kbyte RAM backed by super cap (provides data
retention for 3–4 days with the power off at 25°C)
64 Kbyte RAM backed by lithium battery
Real time clock backed up by lithium battery
Maximum User Program - 3K words
Maximum User Program – 6K words
Registers - 256 words
Registers – 2K words
Typical Scan Rate: 1.8 ms/K of logic (Boolean
contacts)
Typical Scan Rate: 1.0 ms/K of logic (Boolean
contacts)
An RS-422 serial port that supports SNP, SNPX and
RTU Slave protocols
Two RS-422 serial ports: Port 1 supports SNP/SNPX
slave protocols; Port 2 supports SNP/SNPX Slave
and Master protocols and RTU Slave protocol. (Port
2 does not support the HHP.)
Ability to support up to four expansion units
2-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
a 4 5 6 83
C lo c k
Reset
SNP
P ort
F la s h
M em ory
M ic r o p r o c e s s o r
H a n d - h e ld
P rog ram m er
RAM
P a r a lle l
E xp a n s io n
P ort
c ontrol
P o ts.
2
CPU Board
PSOK
IN P U T
In p u t s
OK
LEDs
O UTP U T
RUN
O utp uts
PW R
RUN
LEDs
OK
PSOK
IN P U T
24 V DC
5 VDC
I/O C ir c u it s
OU TP UT
In p u t P o w e r
I/O Board
2 4 V D C f o r O u tp u ts
2 4 V D C fo r In p u t s
In p u t P o w e r
5.14 V D C
Pow er Supply Board
Figure 2-2. Micro PLC Functional Block Diagram
GFK-1065F
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-5
2
High Speed Counters (IC693UDR011/002/005,
IC693UAL006, IC693UDR010)
The high speed counter (HSC) function consists of four built-in counters. Each counter provides
direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 5Khz for industrial control applications such as:
meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity measurement, material handling, motion control, and
process control. Because it uses direct processing, the HSC can sense inputs, count, and respond
with outputs without needing to communicate with the CPU.
The HSC function can be configured to operate in one of two modes:
A4 – four identical, independent, simple (type A) counters that can count up or down
B1–3, A4 – counters 1–3 configured as one type B counter; counter 4 as one type A counter.
In either mode, each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for
up or down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive).
The HSC function is configured using the Series 90-30 and 90-20 Hand-Held Programmer or the
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software configurator function. Many features can also be configured
from an application program using the COMM_REQ function block.
Type A Counters
A type A counter accepts a count input that increments a 16 bit accumulator. It also accepts a
preload/strobe input that can either preload the counter accumulator with a user-defined value
(PRELOAD mode) or strobe the accumulator (STROBE mode) into a 16-bit register.
The four type A counters provide 15 words of %AI data or 16 bits of %I data to the PLC. They
receive 16 bits of %Q data from the PLC. Each counter has two discrete inputs and one discrete
output.
Type B Counter
The type B counter provides an AQUADB counting function. An AQUADB input consists of two
signals (designated A and B). A count occurs for each transition of either A or B. The counter uses
the phase relationship between A and B to determine count direction.
DC Output (IC693UDR005/010, UAL006)
The high-speed DC output (%Q1) can be configured for PWM, pulse train, or HSC output.
Counter channel 1 can be configured for only one of these outputs at a time. Because AQUADB
counting uses channels 1–3, the PWM and pulse train outputs are not available when a type B
counter is configured.
PWM Output
The frequency of the PWM output (19hz to 2Khz) is selected by writing a value to memory
location %AQ2. A PWM duty ratio (the amount of time that the signal is active compared to the
signal period) within the range of 0 to 100% can be selected by writing a value to memory
location %AQ3.
2-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
Pulse Output
The frequency (10hz to 2Khz) of the pulse train is selected by writing a value to memory location
%AQ123. The number of pulses to be output (0 to 32767) is selected by writing a value to memory
location %AQ124.
ASCII Output (IC693UDR005/010, UAL006)
This feature allows you to send a specified byte string out the serial port by including a
COMM_REQ (Communications Request) instruction in a ladder diagram. The Micro PLC can
automatically send a message to a remote location that has the ability to display an ASCII string,
such as a pager. As an example of how pager enunciation could be used, when a specific alarm
condition is detected by the PLC, the PLC would execute a COMM_REQ instruction to autodial
the modem attached to the serial port. If the autodial COMM_REQ is successful, a second
COMM_REQ would be executed to send an informative ASCII string to the pager where it can be
viewed by the user. Finally, a third COMM_REQ would be sent to hang up the pager.
I/O Board
The I/O board provides the interface to the front panel input, output, and power supply
connections for the Micro PLC.
Input Circuits
DC Input Circuits (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UAL006)
The DC input circuits condition and filter 24 VDC input voltages so that they can be properly
detected by the CPU module. The input points can be used in either positive or negative logic
mode.
The DC inputs can be used as regular inputs or to supply count and preload/strobe inputs for
HSCs. For more details on the operation of HSCs see Chapter 6.
AC Input Circuits (IC693UAA003/007)
The AC input circuits accept 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz signals. Input characteristics are compatible
with a wide range of user-supplied input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.
Potentiometer Inputs (All Models)
Two potentiometers are provided to allow adjustment of the values in analog registers %AI16 and
%AI17. The potentiometers can be turned by inserting a small screwdriver through an access hole
in the Micro PLC front panel (see Figure 2-3.)
A potential use for the potentiometers would be to set threshold values for use in logical
relationships with other inputs/outputs.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-7
2
Output Circuits
Relay Output Circuits (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UEX011, UAL006)
The 2-amp, isolated, normally open output circuits allow the low-level signals from the CPU
module to control relay devices. There is no fusing on relay outputs. The user should provide
external fusing to protect the outputs. The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as
outputs controlled by the HSCs.
AC Output Circuits (IC693UAA003/007)
The AC output points provide 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 A signals.
DC Output (IC693UDR005/010, IC693UAL006)
The DC output circuit provides a 24 VDC output voltage. This output can be used as a normal DC
output, HSC-controlled output, pulse train output, or pulse width modulation (PWM) output.
Analog I/O (IC693UAL006)
The 23-point Micro PLC features two analog input channels that map to %AI0018 and %AI0019
in the PLC. In voltage mode, the analog-to-digital (A/D) range of 0—32,000 counts corresponds
to a 0—10 V input signal. In 0—20mA current mode, the A/D range of 0—32,000 counts
corresponds to a 0—20mA input signal. In 4—20mA current mode, the A/D range of 0—32,000
counts corresponds to a 4—20mA input signal.
The analog output channel maps to %AQ0012. In voltage mode, the output channel digital-toanalog (D/A) range of 0 to 32,000 counts corresponds to a 0—10V output. In 0—20mA current
mode, a range of 0 to 32,000 counts corresponds to a 0—20mA output signal. In 4—20mA
current mode, the A/D range of 0—32,000 counts corresponds to a 4—20mA output signal.
2-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
Input/Output Connectors
Serial Ports
Port 1 on the Micro PLC is intended to be used as the programmer serial port. A second RS-422
compatible serial port, to be used by monitoring devices, is provided on 23 and 28-point Micro
PLCs.
Serial Communications Protocols
Table 2-4. Communication Protocols Supported
Micro
PLCs
SNP/SNPX Slave
SNP/SNPX Master*
4-Wire RTU
Slave*
2-Wire RTU
Slave*
14-point
Port 1
All releases
not supported
Port 1
Rel. 3.00 and later
Port 1
Rel. 3.10 and later
23-point
Ports 1 and 2,
Rel. 3.00 and later
Port 2
Rel. 3.00 and later
Port 2
Rel. 3.00 and later
Port 2
Rel. 3.10 and later
28-point
Ports 1 and 2,
Rel. 2.01 and later
Port 2
Rel. 3.00 and later
Port 2
Rel. 3.00 and later
Port 2
Rel. 3.10 and later
*Also requires the following versions or later hardware: IC693UDR001LP1, IC693UDR002LP1, IC693UAA003JP1,
IC693UDR005JP1, IC693UAL006BP1, IC693UAA007HP1, and IC693UDR010BP1.
SNP/SNPX
The full set of SNP(X) Master commands, as described in “SNP-X Commands” in the Series 90
PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual, GFK-0582, is supported on Port 2 of the 23- and 28point Micro PLCs.
RTU Slave
This feature is implemented as specified in the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s
Manual, GFK-0582. RTU as implemented in the Micro PLC is a subset of the Modbus™ Remote
Terminal Unit serial communications protocol. Prior to Release 3.10, RTU protocol is only
supported in the 4-wire implementation. Support for 2-Wire RTU was added in Release 3.10.
Table 2-5 lists the function codes supported by the Micro PLC.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-9
2
Table 2-5. RTU Function Codes
Function Code
1
Description
Read Output Table
2
Read Input Table
3
Read Registers
4
Read Analog Input
5
Force (Write) Single Output
6
Preset Single Register
7
Read Exception Status
8
Loopback Maintenance
15
Force (Write) Multiple Outputs
16
Preset Multiple Registers
17
Report Device Type
67
Read Scratch Pad Memory
For the 14 point unit, an additional feature is implemented that automatically detects whether the
configuration/programming software is attached to the Micro PLC. The firmware will auto-detect
the presence of the programmer when RTU is the active protocol, so that you only need to begin
using the configuration/programming software for a 14 point Micro to be able to communicate
with it.
Port 1 (All Models)
A 15-pin D-type, female connector on the front of the Micro PLC provides the connection to an
RS-422 compatible serial port which is used to communicate with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro
software, the HHP, or for general purpose communications. This port supports SNP and SNPX
protocols. On 14-point Micro PLCs, this port also supports RTU Slave protocols. The RS-422
connector is protected by an access door. This port can be configured using the Logicmaster 90
configuration program or the HHP, except for RTU communications, which must be configured by
a COMM_REQ function in ladder logic.
a45 451
I1
I2
R S - 4 2 2 C o m p a tib le
S e r ia l P o r t
24 V D C OUT
P o t e nt io m e t e r s
~
100-2 40V AC
L
H
Q1
Figure 2-3. Micro PLC RS-422 Serial Port
2-10
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
Port 2 (23 and 28-Point Models)
A second RS-422 compatible serial port, also protected by an access door, is provided on 23 and
28-point Micro PLCs. This port can be used for general purpose communications using SNP,
SNPX, and RTU Slave protocol. Serial Port 2 can also be configured as an SNP/SNPX Master
port. The following programming/configuration software features are supported through Port 2
when there is no programmer connected to Port 1:
1.
The status line correctly displays current information about the PLC. If the proper folder is
selected and verified, the status line will show LOGIC EQUAL.
2.
You can view any of the reference memories on the TABLES page in Logicmaster 90 and can
change individual values.
3.
When ONLINE and LOGIC EQUAL are displayed in the status line, the references will be
displayed correctly when you view the program logic.
4.
You can set the privilege level to 1 or 2. (Privilege levels 3 and 4 can not be accessed.)
5.
The PLC and IO fault tables are displayed.
6.
The Time-Of-Day clock can be set and its current value displayed.
7.
The RUN/STOP state of the PLC can be changed, either by pressing ALT+R or using the
PLCRUN screen.
It is not possible to load and store programs and configuration through Port 2, because the
privilege level is restricted to level 2 by the PLC firmware. Autobaud is not supported on Port 2.
Port 2 can be configured using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or by a COMM_REQ
function block within a ladder logic program (see “Configuring Serial Ports” in Chapter 5).
On release 3.0 and later 28-point Micro PLCs, a separate SNP ID for Port 2 can be configured
using Logicmaster 90 software release 8.00 or later. On earlier releases, Port 2 shares the SNP ID
with Port 1 and the SNP ID can only be changed through Port 1. (For more information about the
SNP ID, refer to “Selecting SNP Connections” and “CPU Configuration” in the
LogicmasterSeries 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software Users Manual, GFK-0466.)
Communication through Port 2 may be lost (host may time out) while operations that involve
writing to flash memory, including storing the program, are being performed through Port 1.
Expansion Port (23 and 28-Point Models)
A 40-pin connector is provided on the right side of the Micro PLC for connection to an expansion
unit using a short (3 CM) ribbon cable (provided with the Micro Expansion Unit—this ribbon
must be used/substitutes are not compatible). The Micro PLC can support up to four expansion
units connected in series.
Table 2-6. Expansion Unit Compatibility
Micro PLCs
GFK-1065F
Release
14-point
not supported
23-point
Rel. 3.00 and later
28-point
Rel. 3.00 and later
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-11
2
Terminal Strips
The Micro PLC module has two non-removable terminal strips. The input connections are on the
top terminal strip and the power supply and output connections are on the bottom terminal strip.
Refer to Chapter 4 for field wiring information and diagrams.
An optional removable terminal strip (IC693ACC002) , shown in Figure 2-4, is available for
Micro PLCs. (They can be placed side-by-side on 28-point Micro PLCs.) The removable terminal
strips can be used on the top or bottom of the Micro PLC and are inserted under the existing screw
terminals.
a45652
2 4 VD C OU T
INP U T
PW R
OK
S e r i e s 9 0 M ic r o
RUN
INP U T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
O U T PU T
PR OG R A M M AB LE C O N TR OLL ER
O UT P UT
100-2 40VAC
L
H
Q1
C OM1
Q2
C O M2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
C O M3
a 45 65 3
24 VDC O UT
INPUT
PW R
OK
Series 90 Micro
RU N
INPU T
INPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
7
8
11
12
13
14
9
10
11
12
15
16
8
OU TPUT
OUTP UT
P R O G R A M M AB L E C O NT R O L L E R
~
100-240VAC
L
H
OUTP UT
Q1
C OM1
VC
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
C OM2
Q6
C OM3
Q7
CO M4
Q8
C O M5
Q9
CO M6
Q 10
Q11
Q 12
CO M7 C OM7
Figure 2-4. Removable Terminal Strips
2-12
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
Status Indicators
The module contains LEDs that provide the user with a visual indication of the CPU and I/O
status.
Table 2-7. Indicators
LED Name
Function
PWR
Lighted if power is supplied to the unit and the power supply is operating correctly. Not
lighted if a power supply fault occurs or if power is not applied.
OK
Blinks during self-diagnostics. Blinks (with RUN indicator) if a fault is detected during selfdiagnostics.
When lighted steadily, indicates that self diagnostics have all passed.
RUN
Lighted when the PLC is executing the logic program entered by the user (RUN mode).
Blinks if a fault is detected during self-diagnostics.
INPUT
These LEDs indicate the status of individual input points. If the associated LED is lighted,
the voltage at the input point is high enough to energize the input circuit. If the LED is not
lighted, the voltage is too low to energize the input circuit (see “I/O Specifications” in
Chapter 4 for thresholds). The input LEDs indicate the input status in all CPU modes:
STOP with I/O Disabled, STOP with I/O Enabled and RUN (standard sweep or constant
sweep).
OUTPUT
These LEDs indicate the status of individual output points. An LED is lighted when its
corresponding output is commanded to turn ON (for example if %Q1 = 1, OUTPUT 1 LED
will be lighted).
All outputs turn OFF in the STOP with I/O Disabled mode. Outputs will hold last state or
the present user-commanded state in the STOP with I/O Enabled mode. In the RUN mode,
the outputs are controlled by the ladder logic program.
Power Supply Board
The power supply converts the AC or DC input source power to voltages required for internal
circuitry. Power requirements are listed in Tables 2-12 and 2-13.
On DC-input Micro PLCs, the power supply board also provides an isolated 24VDC supply to
power input circuits and user devices. (Refer to page 2-16 for maximum current loads for each
model.) These outputs do not have fuse protection. The user should provide external fuses to
protect the outputs.
On 23-point Micro PLCs (IC693UAL006), the power supply board provides internal 15VDC
power for the analog output current loop and a ±15VDC supply for the analog input and output
voltage circuits.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-13
2
Configuration and Programming
The Micro PLC can be configured and programmed using any of the following methods.
•
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software on one of the following types of computers:
†
†
†
Workmaster™ II or a CIMSTAR™ I industrial computer
IBM® PC-AT, PS/2® (Personal System 2®) with 2 Mbyte RAM and an Intel 386 or
higher processor
MS-DOS compatible Personal Computer with 2 Mbyte RAM and an Intel 386 or higher
processor
•
Logicmaster 90 Micro software with any of the above computers.
•
Series 90-30/90-20 Hand-Held Programmer (IC693PRG300).
Configuration and programming can be accomplished off-line from the PLC using the
Logicmaster 90 programmer. If you are using an HHP, configuration and programming can be
done on-line with the HHP attached to and interfacing with the PLC. Programming and
configuration communications must use Port 1.
The Micro PLC provides flash memory for non-volatile user program storage and for system
firmware. The user program is always executed from flash memory. However, the Micro PLC can
be configured to read its configuration at powerup from either RAM or flash memory (ROM).
Use of the programming and configuration software is described in the Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466. The Workmaster II computer is
described in the Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation Manual, GFK-0401.
Use of the HHP is described in the Hand-Held Programmer, Series 90-30/20/Micro
Programmable Controllers User’s Manual, GFK-0402.
Fault Reporting
The Micro PLC monitors internal operations for system and user problems. These faults are
reported through the %S references and through an internal fault table. Access to %S information
is available through the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP. The fault table can only be accessed
by Logicmaster 90 software. For more details on faults and fault reporting, see Chapter 9.
2-14
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
Specifications
The following tables list ordering information, physical and functional characteristics, and input
power requirements for the Micro PLCs. Specifications for input and output signals are provided
in Chapter 4.
Table 2-8. I/O Point Configurations
Input Points
(points/common)*
Output Points
(points/common)*
14 point DC in/relay out, AC power
8 DC
(4 and 4)
6 relay
(1, 1, and 4)
IC693UDR001
14 point DC in/relay out, DC power
8 DC
(4 and 4)
6 relay
(1, 1, and 4)
IC693UDR002
14 point DC in/DC out, DC power
8 DC
(4 and 4)
6 DC
(6)
IC693UDD004
14 point AC in/ AC out, AC power
8 AC
(4 and 4)
6 AC
(2 and 4)
IC693UAA003
Description
Catalog Numbers
28 point DC in/relay and DC out, AC power
16 DC
(4, 4, 4, and 4)
28 point AC in/AC out, AC power
16 AC
(4, 4, 4, and 4)
28 point DC in/relay out, DC power
16 DC
(4, 4, 4, and 4)
23 point analog DC in/relay and DC out, AC power
13 DC, 2 analog
(4, 4, 4, and 2)
1 DC, 9 relay
1 analog
(1, 4, 1, 1, 1, and 1)
IC693UAL006
8 DC
6 relay
IC6963UEX011
(4 and 4)
(1, 1, and 4)
14-point Expansion Unit
DC in/relay out, AC power
1 DC, 11 relay
IC693UDR005
(1, 4, 1, 1, 1, 1, and 3)
12 AC
(2, 4, 2, and 4)
IC693UAA007
1 DC, 11 relay
IC693UDR010
(1, 4, 1, 1, 1, 1, and 3)
*See Chapter 4 for fusing information.
Accessories
Description
Catalog Numbers
Series 90 Micro PLC Programming Software, Cable Kit, and manuals
IC640HWP300
Hand-Held Programmer with Cables and Manual (includes IC693CBL303)
IC693PRG300
Hand-Held Programmer Memory Card
IC693ACC303
Logicmaster 90 Software (software only)
IC641SWP300
Removable Terminal Strip
IC693ACC002
Expansion Unit Cable
IC693ACC003
GFK-1065F
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-15
2
Table 2-9. Physical and Functional Characteristics (14-Point PLCs)
Weight:
IC693UDR001/002/UAA003/UEX011
0.86 lbs (390 g)
Module Dimensions
Height: 3.2” (82mm)
Depth: 3.0” (76mm)
Width: 4.5” (115mm)
Typical Scan Rate
1.8 ms/K of logic (Boolean contacts)
Maximum number of Discrete Physical I/O Points
14 (8 inputs/6 outputs)
Maximum number of slave devices per network
Output Power Supplies
IC693UDR001/002/UEX011
Super cap backup for RAM
8 (can be increased with a repeater)
24VDC for input circuits & user devices, 100mA max.
+5VDC on pin 5 of Serial Port, 155mA max (for UDR001/002
only)
Provides data retention for 3–4 days with the power off at 25°C.
Table 2-10. Physical and Functional Characteristics (28-Point PLCs)
1.5 lbs (680 g.)
1.54 lbs (700 g.)
1.54 lbs (700 g.)
Weight IC693UDR005
IC693UAA007
IC693UDR010
Module Dimensions
Height: 3.2” (82mm)
Width: 8.6” (218mm)
Depth: 3.0” (76mm)
Typical Scan Rate
1.0 ms/K of logic (Boolean contacts)
Real Time Clock accuracy
10°C
25°C
55°C
4.54 sec./day
5.22 sec./day
10.66 sec/day
Maximum number of Discrete Physical I/O Points
28 (16 inputs/12 outputs)
Maximum number of slave devices per network
8 (can be increased with a repeater)
+24 VDC Output Power Supply (IC693UDR005/010)
(for input circuits and user devices)
200 mA maximum
+5 VDC on pin 5 of Serial Ports
Serial Port 1
Serial Port 2
Serial Ports 1 & 2 combined
Lithium battery lifetime
155mA maximum
100mA maximum
255mA maximum (The load on either port can exceed the
individual ratings listed above, if the combined load does not
exceed 255mA.) See “Caution” below.
Shelf life (powered down)
Up to 7 years typical at 30 °C
Up to 5 years typical at 55 °C
Caution
If you are using loads greater than the individual current ratings for the
+5VDC supply on pin 5 of Port 1 or Port 2, operator interface devices must
be connected and disconnected with the power to the Micro PLC off. (This
precaution is not necessary if the loads on both ports are less than their
individual current ratings.)
2-16
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
Table 2-11. Physical and Functional Characteristics (23-Point Micro PLC, IC693UAL006)
Weight
1.52 lbs (690g)
Module Dimensions
Height: 3.2” (82mm) Width: 8.6” (218mm) Depth: 3.0”
(76mm)
Typical Scan Rate
1.0 ms/K of logic (Boolean contacts)
Real Time Clock accuracy
10°C (with internal 15 °C rise)
25°C (with internal 15 °C rise)
55°C (with internal 15 °C rise)
4.54 sec./day
5.22 sec./day
10.66 sec/day
Maximum number of Discrete Physical I/O Points
23 (13 inputs/10 outputs)
Maximum number of slave devices per network
8 (can be increased with a repeater)
+24 VDC Output Power Supply
(for input circuits and user devices)
200 mA maximum
+5 VDC on pin 5 of Serial Ports
Serial Port 1
Serial Port 2
Serial Ports 1 & 2 combined
155mA maximum
100mA maximum
255mA maximum (The load on either port can exceed the
individual ratings listed above, if the combined load does not
exceed 255mA.) See “Caution” below.
Lithium battery lifetime
Shelf life (powered down)
Up to 7 years typical at 30 °C
Up to 5 years typical at 55 °C
Analog inputs
Two, differential
Input ranges
0 to 10 V (10.24V maximum)
0 to 20 mA (20.5mA maximum)
4 to 20 mA (20.5mA maximum)
Resolution:
0 to 10 V range
0 to 20 mA range
4 to 20 mA range
10 bits (1 LSB = 10mV)
9 bits (1 LSB = 40µA)
8+ bits (1 LSB = 40µA)
Accuracy
1% of full scale over full operating temperature range
Linearity
±3 LSB maximum
Common mode voltage
200 V maximum
Filter response time
20.2ms to reach 1% error for step response
Analog outputs
Output ranges
1, single-ended, non-isolated
0 to 10V (10.24V maximum)
0 to 20mA (20.5mA maximum)
4 to 20mA (20.5mA maximum)
Resolution
12 bits over 0 to 10V range (1 LSB = 2.5mV)
12 bits over 0 to 20mA range (1 LSB = 5µA)
11+ bits over 4 to 20mA range (1 LSB = 5µA)
Accuracy
±1% of full scale over full operating temperature range
(0°C to 55°C)
Caution
If you are using loads greater than the individual current ratings for the
+5VDC supply on pin 5 of Port 1 or Port 2, operator interface devices must
be connected and disconnected with the power to the Micro PLC off. (This
precaution is not necessary if the loads on both ports are less than their
individual current ratings.)
GFK-1065F
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-17
2
Table 2-12. AC Power Requirements
AC Power Requirements – (IC693UDR001, IC693UAA003/007, IC693UDR005, IC693UEX011)
Range
100 -15% to 240 +10% VAC
Frequency
50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up
10 ms at 85 VAC
Inrush Time
2 ms for 40 A
Inrush Current
Input Current
14-point Micro PLCs and
14-point Micro Expansion Unit
18 A maximum at 120 VAC
30 A maximum at 200 VAC
40 A maximum at 265 VAC
28-point Micro PLCs
30 A maximum at 200 VAC
40 A maximum at 265 VAC
14-point Micro PLCs
0.12 A typical at 200 VAC
0.25 A typical at 100 VAC
28-point, DC In/Relay Out
Micro PLCs
0.26 A typical at 100 VAC
0.12 A typical at 200 VAC
28-point, AC In/AC Out
Micro PLCs
0.16 A typical at 100 VAC
0.09 A typical at 200 VAC
Input Power Supply Rating UDR001
35 VA
UAA003
20 VA
UAA007
25 VA
UDR005
40 VA
UEX011
35 VA
AC Power Requirements – (IC693UAL006)
Range
100 -15% to 240 +10% VAC
Frequency
50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up
10 ms at 85 VAC
Inrush Time
2-18
2 ms for 40 A
Inrush Currents
35 A maximum at 200 VAC
46 A maximum at 265 VAC
Input Current
0.35 A typical at 100 VAC
0.22 A typical at 200 VAC
Isolation
1500VAC rms field side to logic (both power supply input and 24
VDC power supply output)
Input Power Supply Rating
50 VA
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
2
Table 2-13. DC Power Requirements
DC Power Requirements – (IC693UDR002/010)
Range
14-point Micro PLC
12 -15% to 24 +25% VDC
12 -15% to 24 +10% VAC
28-point Micro PLCs
24 -20%, +25% VDC
24 -15%, +10% VAC
Hold-up 14-point Micro PLCs
4 ms at 10 VDC
10 ms at 12 VDC
28-point Micro PLCs
2ms at 9.5 VDC
Inrush Current
Inrush Time
Input Current
14-point Micro PLC
65 A maximum at 24 VDC
81 A maximum at 30 VDC
28-point Micro PLC1
65 A maximum at 24 VDC
81 A maximum at 30 VDC
14-point Micro PLC
10 ms for 81 A
28-point Micro PLC
10 ms for 81 A
2
14-point Micro PLC
0.4 A typical at 24 VDC
0.8 A typical at 12 VDC
28-point Micro PLC
1.4 A typical at 24 VDC
Input Power Supply Rating UDR002
15 W
UDR010
20 W
Notes
1.
If configured to disable powerup diagnostics, the 28-point DC In/ Relay Out/DC Power unit (IC693UDR010)
will begin logic solution 100ms after the voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24VDC.
The 24VDC power source for the UDR010 unit must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and maintain a 24VDC voltage level (see power supply specifications for
inrush requirements above).
2.
The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4 VDC) than at rated input
voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is necessary to start up the DC power supply.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 2 Introduction
2-19
2
Table 2-14. Environmental Requirements
Operating temperature
0 to 55 °C
Storage temperature
-40 °C to 85 °C
Relative humidity
5% to 95%
Table 2-15. Memory Allocation
Type
Application Program
14-Point Micro PLCs
3K words
23 and 28-Point Micro PLCs
6K words
%R
256 words
2K words
%AI
128 words
128 words
%AQ
128 words
128 words
%I
512 bits
512 bits
%Q
512 bits
512 bits
%G
1280 bits
1280 bits
%M
1024 bits
1024 bits
%T
256 bits
256 bits
%S
128 bits
128 bits
For a list of reserved memory locations, refer to Appendix B.
2-20
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
Chapter
Installation
3
This chapter describes the procedures for installing the Micro PLC and preparing the system for
use. Included in this chapter are instructions for unpacking, inspecting, and installing the Micro
PLC. Instructions are also provided for connecting cables to programming devices.
Minimum Hardware Requirements
To install and set up the Micro PLC, you will need:
•
Micro PLC Module.
•
Programming device (this can be one of the following items):
A. Hand-Held Programmer and cable.
B. Logicmaster 90-30/20 Micro software (or Logicmaster 90 Micro software), a Workmaster
II or CIMSTAR I industrial computer, or an IBM AT, PS/2 or other MS-DOS compatible
Personal Computer (with 386 or higher microprocessor and 2 Mbyte memory) and
appropriate cables.
•
Tools for mounting the Micro PLC and connecting field wiring.
If the PLC is to be programmed using Logicmaster 90 software, a Workmaster II, CIMSTAR I, or
an IBM or IBM-compatible computer is required. Logicmaster 90 software can use a Work Station
Interface (WSI) board, an RS-422 port, or a standard RS-232 interface with an RS-422 to RS-232
converter. The WSI board is installed in the Workmaster II computer at the factory.
Unpacking
1.
Visual inspection. Upon receiving your Micro PLC system, carefully inspect all shipping
containers for damage that may have occurred during shipping. If any part of the system is
damaged, notify the carrier immediately. The damaged shipping container should be saved as
evidence for inspection by the carrier.
It is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage incurred during
shipment. However, GE Fanuc will fully cooperate with you, if such action is necessary.
GFK-1065F
2.
Unpacking. Unpack all shipping cartons and verify the contents. All shipping containers and
packing material should be saved in case it is necessary to transport or ship any part of the
system.
3.
Pre-installation Check. After unpacking the Micro PLC, record all serial numbers. These
serial numbers will be required if you need to request product service during the warranty
period of the equipment.
3-1
3
Installation Requirements
The Micro PLC should be installed in a location that meets the environmental requirements listed
on page 3-20. For best performance of your Micro PLC, the installation location should also
adhere to the following guidelines:
•
The temperature must not change so rapidly that condensation could form on or inside the
unit.
•
No combustible gases.
•
No dust, salty air, or conductive materials (iron powder, etc.) that could cause internal shorts.
•
If possible, do not install the Micro PLC where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
•
Provide adequate ventilation space. Recommended minimum space allowances are
approximately: 50mm (2 inches) top, sides and bottom. See Figures 3-1 through 3-3.
•
Do not install the Micro PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of heat.
•
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, provide a ventilation fan or air conditioner.
•
Do not install the Micro PLC within 200mm (8 inches) of any high voltage (more than
1000V) or high current (more than 1A) line (except for outputs controlled by the Micro PLC).
•
For ease of maintenance and safety, locate the Micro PLC as far away from high voltage
equipment and power generation equipment as possible.
•
For recommended field wiring practices, refer to “General Wiring Procedures” in Chapter 4.
Installation
The Micro PLC can be mounted on a wall or panel using screws, or on a 35 mm DIN rail. The
Micro PLC must be mounted on a vertical surface. Do not mount it on a horizontal surface. (See
Figures 3-1 through 3-3 for recommended mounting orientation and spacing requirements.)
a45442
Prop e r M ou nting
Im prope r M ou ntin g
Figure 3-1. Recommended Mounting Orientations for the Micro PLC
3-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
a45436
D e ta il O f D is e n g a g e d C lip
* M in im u m A llo w a n c e F o r C o o lin g
.5 9
.3 5 (1 5 )
(9 )
* 1(5. 909)
.14
(3 . 5)
1 .0 0
(2 5 )
* 1(5. 909)
4 .5 3
(1 1 5 )
.1 6
(4 )
4 .2 1
(1 0 7 )
.1 8 D ia . . 1 6
(4. 5 )
(4 )
(T ypica l)
3 .2 4
(8 2 .3 )
.16
(4 )
.55
(1 4 )
2 .9 9
(7 6 )
2 .9 3
(7 4. 3 )
.1 4
(3. 5)
.16
(4 )
SIDE VIEW
*1(5.909)
.5 9
(1 5 )
FR ONT VIEW
*1(5.909)
D im e ns io ns in in c he s . M illim e te rs a re in p are n th es is.
Figure 3-2. Micro PLC Mounting Dimensions and Spacing Requirements, 14-Point
a454 18
D eta il O f D isen ga ge d C lip
* M inim um A llo w ance F or C oo lin g
.5 9
.3 5 (1 5 )
(9 )
.1 4
(3 .5 )
1 .0 0
(2 5 )
* 1(5.909)
8 .5 8
(2 1 8 )
* 1(5.909)
8 .2 6
(2 1 0 )
.1 6
(4 )
2 .9 9
(7 6 )
SIDE VIEW
.5 5
(1 4 )
.1 6
(4 )
.1 8 D ia . .1 6
(4 .5 )
(4 )
(T yp ica l)
3 .2 4
(8 2 .3 )
* 1(5.909)
2 .9 3
(7 4 .3 )
.1 4
(3 .5 )
.1 6
(4 )
.5 9
(1 5 )
.5 9
(1 5 )
FRONT VIEW
* 1(5.909)
D im e n s io n s in in ch e s . M illim e te rs a re in p a r e n th e sis .
Figure 3-3. Micro PLC Mounting Dimensions and Spacing Requirements, 23 and 28-Point
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
3-3
3
Mounting a Unit on a DIN Rail
The method of mounting a Micro PLC unit on a 35 mm DIN rail is shown below. A small clip on
the back of the unit holds it in place on the rail.
a45440
D IN
R a il
D IN
R a il
Tab
(R etrac te d )
C lip
Position the upper edge of the unit over
the DIN rail, so that the rail is behind the
tab as shown above. Pull the clip down.
Tab
(E n g a g e d )
C lip
Pivot the unit downward (for a unit being mounted
right side up) until the unit is over the DIN rail.
Press the clip firmly into place.
Removing a Unit From a DIN Rail
To remove a unit from a DIN rail, follow the procedure shown below.
a45441
D IN
R a il
Tab
(E n g a g e d )
D IN
R a il
C lip
Pull clip at the bottom of the unit down until it is
disengaged from the DIN rail.
3-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
Tab
(R e tra c te d )
C lip
Pivot the unit away from the
rail.
GFK-1065F
3
Grounding Procedures
Equipment grounding recommendations and procedures are listed below. These grounding
procedures must be properly followed for safe operation of your Micro PLC system.
•
The maximum recommended resistance to ground is 200mΩ (equivalent to 100 feet of AWG
#12 – 3.29mm2 – copper cable).
•
Grounding installation must conform to National Electrical Code (NEC) standards.
•
Ground conductors should be connected with separate branches routed to a central earth
ground point. This method is shown in the figure below.
•
Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible. Braided straps or
ground cables – AWG #12 (3.29mm2) or larger – can be used to minimize resistance.
Conductors must always be large enough to carry the maximum short circuit current of the
path being considered.
a45684
P ro g r a m m in g
D e v ic e
Series 90 M icro
P LC
Motor D rives
an d
other
Electric al
Control
Equipm ent
Mac hinery
NO TE
Earth
G round
Central
G round P oint
Signal and pow er
connec tions
not s how n
Figure 3-4. Recommended System Grounding
Logicmaster Programming Device Grounding
For proper operation, the programmer for Logicmaster 90 Micro software (Workmaster II or
CIMSTAR I, or IBM-PC or compatible computer) must have a ground connection in common
with the Micro PLC. Normally, this common ground connection is provided by ensuring that the
programmer’s power cord is connected to the same power source (with the same ground reference
point) as the Micro PLC, but this will need to be verified for each installation.
I/O Installation and Wiring
Wiring connections to and from user-supplied input and output field devices are terminated at two
terminal strips on the Micro PLC front panel. I/O connections are defined on the Micro PLC front
panel. Wiring diagrams are provided in the “Field Wiring” section of Chapter 4.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
3-5
3
Powerup Self-test
Warning
Ensure that the protective cover is installed over terminals on the terminal
board when power is applied to the unit. The cover protects against
accidental shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to the
operator or maintenance personnel.
After the proper power connections have been made, the Micro PLC can be powered up to verify
that the unit is installed correctly.
Normal Powerup Sequence
Apply the required power to the power inputs.
•
The Power indicator, labeled PWR, should light.
•
The CPU status indicator, labeled OK, blinks during the power-up self diagnostics. When
self-diagnostics have been successfully completed, the OK indicator will remain lighted. (The
Micro PLC can be configured to power up without running diagnostics. Unless your
application requires fast power up, it is recommended that you leave powerup diagnostics
enabled. For configuration information, refer to Chapter 5.)
•
The CPU status indicator, labeled RUN, should light if the unit is configured to run on powerup.
•
If any of the input points have been wired to field devices that energize those circuits and the
RUN indicator is lighted, the corresponding input LEDs should light.
•
If the RUN indicator is not lighted, all output indicators should be dark (in the STOP with I/O
Disabled mode).
After verifying that a valid power-up sequence has occurred, attach a programming device (HandHeld Programmer or computer with Logicmaster 90 software) to configure the Micro PLC and
develop programs for the unit.
Caution
During a gradual power down, when the input power supply voltage is
below the minimum operating voltage, the Micro PLC may power off and
then power on again until the input voltage drops low enough to prevent
power on again. You should take precautions if this type of behavior cannot
be tolerated in your application.
3-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
Fast Powerup
Powerup diagnostics can be disabled using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software. Unless
your application requires unusually fast powerup, it is recommended that you leave this feature
enabled. Disabling powerup diagnostics has the following effects:
The I/O Link Interface Expansion Unit will not work.
No expansion units can be used. (If expansion units are connected while powerup diagnostics
are disabled, faults will be logged in the I/O tables.)
All HHP key sequences will be ignored when the Micro PLC is powering up.
Table 3-1. Powerup Times with Powerup Diagnostics Disabled
Model
Time
28-point units
IC693UDR010
IC693UDR005/UAA007
100ms
300ms (typical)
All 14-point units
350ms (typical)
Error Detection And Correction
If the Micro PLC fails the power-up self-test, one of the conditions listed in Table 3-2 will be
observed after applying power.
Table 3-2. Powerup Sequence Troubleshooting
Symptom
PWR indicator does not light.
Action
1. Check that the proper power source is provided and is
on.
2. With power supply off, check wiring to the module unit
to be sure it is connected correctly.
PWR indicator lighted but OK indicator is (This indicates that the power source is good and that the
not lighted.
CPU has detected an internal fault.)
Refer to “Powerup Diagnostics” in Chapter 9.
PWR indicator on, but OK and RUN
indicators are blinking.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
The Micro PLC features built-in blink codes to assist in
troubleshooting. For definitions, refer to “Powerup
Diagnostics” in Chapter 9.
3-7
3
Connecting a Programming Device
The Micro PLC can be programmed and configured using either the HHP or the Logicmaster 90
software (included in IC640HWP300). Both of these methods are described in Chapter 5.
An RS-422 compatible serial port is provided on the front of the Micro PLC for communication
with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software or the HHP. This port can also be used for general
purpose communications using the Series 90 Protocols (SNP and SNPX). On 14-point Micro
PLCs, this port can also be used for RTU Slave communications.
A second RS-422 compatible port (Serial Port 2) is provided on 28-point Micro PLCs. This port
can be used for general purpose communications using SNP, SNPX and RTU Slave. It is not
possible to load and store programs and configuration through Port 2, because the privilege level
is restricted to level 2 by the PLC firmware. Communications through Port 2 may be lost (host
may time out) while operations that involve writing to flash memory, including storing the
program, are being performed through Port 1.
For additional information on the functions of the serial ports, refer to “Serial Ports” in Chapter 2.
For serial port orientation and pinouts, see Appendix D.
Connecting the Hand-Held Programmer
The Hand-Held Programmer (IC693PRG300) is a compact programming device that connects to
the Micro PLC 15-pin serial port through a 6 foot (1.83 meter) cable that conforms to the RS-485
specification.
a 430 52
GE F an uc
S ER IE S 90-30
PROGRAM MABLE
CONTROLLER
HAND HELD PROGRAMMER
LD
D
O UT
O U TM
S E TM
SET
E
F
AND
A
I
AI
OR
B
Q
AQ
C
R S TM
RST
TM R
O N D TR
M ODE
NOT
B LK
UPCT R
D N C TR
R UN
M
T
G
S
FUNC
D EL
#
SRCH
7
8
9
R
4
5
6
W R ITE
1
2
3
0
HEX
DEC
IN S
S LO T F O R
ME MO R Y
C AR D
REA D
V R FY
CLR
ENT
SE R IAL PO R T C O N N EC TO R
TO C P U S E RIA L P O R T
Figure 3-5. Hand-Held Programmer
3-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
Warning
Always connect the cable to the Hand-Held Programmer first, then connect
the cable to the Micro PLC. This avoids any chance of shorting the +5 volt
supply on the PLC which could cause incorrect operation of the Micro PLC.
Incorrect operation of the PLC could damage the equipment or cause
personal injury to an operator.
To connect the Hand-Held Programmer cable:
•
Attach the 15-pin male D connector on one end to the mating 15-pin female D connector on
the Hand-Held Programmer.
•
Attach the connector on the other end of the cable to the RS-422 connector on the Micro PLC
(Port 1 on the 28-point Micro PLC). These connections are shown in Figure 3-6.
Note
Port 2 on the 28-point Micro PLC does not support the HHP. You must connect
the HHP to Port 1.
a45438
H a n d - H e ld
P ro g ra m m e r
(IC 6 9 3 P R G 3 0 0 )
S e rie s 9 0
M ic r o P L C
C a b le (IC 6 9 3 C B L 3 0 3 )
Figure 3-6. Hand-Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Micro PLC
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
3-9
3
Connections for Using Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Software
You need a Software and Cable Kit package (IC640HWP300) to use Logicmaster 90 Micro
software with the Micro PLC.
Workmaster II Computer with WSI
The cable connection for this configuration is from the connector on the WSI board
(IC647WMI920) to the Micro PLC serial port as shown below.
a45445
W SI
S e ria l
S e ria l C a b le
(IC 6 4 7 C B L 7 0 4 )
S e rie s 90
M ic ro P L C
W o rk m a s te r II
Figure 3-7. Logicmaster 90 Micro Programmer Connection through a WSI
lBM-PC Compatible Computer
This configuration uses a standard RS-422 or RS-232 serial communications port on the IBM-PC
compatible computer. An RS-422/RS-232 miniconverter (IC690ACC901) is required. Examples
of cable connections for this type of interface are shown in Figure 3-8. Refer to Appendix E,
“Converters” for a complete description of the miniconverter.
3-10
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
a45 446
IB M P C (X T) ,
W o rk m a s te r
S e rie s 9 0
M ic r o P L C
R S -2 3 2
IC 6 9 0 C B L 7 0 1
10 Fe et
(3 M e te rs )
RS -42 2
R S 4 85 /R S 232
C o n ve rt e r
IC 6 9 0 A C C 9 0 1
a45 447
IB M P C (A T )
S e rie s 9 0
M ic r o P L C
R S -2 3 2
IC 6 9 0 C B L 7 0 2
10 Feet
(3 M e te rs)
RS -42 2
R S 4 85/R S 232
C o n ve rt e r
IC 6 9 0 A C C 9 0 1
a45 448
IB M P S /2 ,
W o rk m a ste r II
S e rie s 9 0
M icr o P L C
RS-232
IC 6 9 0 C B L 7 0 5
10 Feet
(3 M e te rs)
R S -4 2 2
R S 485/R S 232
C o n ve rt e r
IC 6 9 0 A C C 9 0 1
a45 449
IB M C o m p a t ib le
W ith R S - 4 2 2 Inte rfa c e
S e rie s 9 0
M icr o P L C
RS-422
(S e e 1 5 p in c o n ne ct o r a s s ig n m e nt)
Figure 3-8. Examples of Serial Connection from Series 90 Micro PLC to Computer
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
3-11
3
Multidrop Serial Data Configuration to Series 90 PLCs
Note
Any installation that includes PLCs over 50 feet (15.2 meters) apart must
include optical isolation.
The Series 90 Micro PLC supports a maximum of eight devices on a single serial link per
network. This number can be increased with the use of a repeater. For additional information on
serial communications, refer to the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual, GFK0582.
Termination resistance for the Receive Data (RD) signal needs to be connected only on units at
the end of the line. This termination is made on the Series 90 Micro PLC products by connecting
a jumper between pins 9 and 10 inside the 15-pin D-shell. Sample cabling for multidrop
installations is provided in Appendix D, “Serial Ports and Cables” and Appendix E, “Converters.”
3-12
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
Replacing Fuses (AC In/AC Out Models Only)
Caution
There are no user-replaceable parts in the DC In/Relay Out Micro PLCs
(UDR001/002/005/010, UAL006, UEX011).
The AC In/AC Out model Micro PLCs (IC693UAA003/007) provide user-replaceable fuses for
their AC output points. Because each output fuse is on the common of several circuits, a blown
fuse will prevent the entire group associated with it from working. (Refer to Table 3-3 and to the
field wiring diagrams in Chapter 4.)
Warning
Remove power from the unit before removing field wiring or removing the
front cover. Failure to remove power from the unit before disassembling it
could cause severe or fatal injury to personnel.
Caution
Do not attempt to remove the circuit boards from the Micro PLC assembly,
or to replace fuses on the power supply board. Any disassembly beyond
removing the front cover and replacing AC output fuses could damage the
unit and will invalidate the warranty.
The plug-in fuses are located on the I/O circuit board (Figure 3-9), which is located immediately
behind the Micro PLC front cover. To replace these fuses:
1. Remove power from the unit and I/O devices.
2.
Remove field wiring from the unit.
3.
Remove front cover from the unit. (Gently press inward one of the tabs located on the sides of
the unit and pull the cover off.)
I1
I2
I3
I4
C O M1
2 4 VD C O UT
I5
I6
I7
I8
C O M2
IN P U T
PW R
OK
S e rie s 90 M icr o
R UN
IN P UT
P re ss ta b in
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
O UT P U T
PROGRAM MABLE CONTROLLER
~
O UT P U T
100- 2 40 VAC
L
4.
GFK-1065F
H
Q1
C O M1
Q2
C O M2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
C O M3
Replace each blown fuse with the appropriate fuse type, listed in Table 3-3.
Chapter 3 Installation
3-13
3
a45443
CNA
ROT1
ROT2
CNB
FU S E 1
3.2A
3.2A
36
FU S E 2
37
CNP 1
14-Point Micro PLC (IC693UAA003)
a45415
CND
CNA
ROT1
ROT2
CNB
CNP
FUSE1
3.2A
36
FUSE2
3.2A
CNC
FUSE3
3.2A
36
36
FUSE4
3.2A
36
28-Point Micro PLC (IC693UAA007)
Figure 3-9. Locations of Fuses on AC In/AC Out I/O Board
3-14
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
Caution
The fuse on the power supply board, which is located at the bottom of the
unit, is not replaceable and cannot be easily accessed. This fuse is provided
as a safety precaution. If it blows, a fault in the power supply is indicated
and the Micro PLC should be replaced.
Note
The fuses listed below are only for the output points on the AC In/AC Out Micro
PLCs (IC693UAA003/UAA007). You can easily access these fuses by removing
the PLC front cover. There are no user-replaceable parts in the DC In/Relay
Out Micro PLCs.
Table 3-3. List of Fuses for AC In/AC Out I/O Boards
Micro PLC
Location
IC693UAA003, IC693UAA007
IC693UAA007
Output Points Controlled
FUSE 1
Q1–Q2
FUSE 2
Q3–Q6
FUSE 3
Q7–Q8
FUSE 4
Q9–Q12
Table 3-4. Fuse Specifications
Current Rating
3.2 A
Catalog Number
Available From
GE Fanuc: IC693ACC001
(5/package)
GE Fanuc Automation N.A., Inc. – Asia Pacific Operations
No. 1 Teban Gardens Crescent
Jurong – Singapore 608919
Phone: (65) 566-9902 or (65) 566-4918
Fax: 011 (65) 567-1856 or 011 (65) 566-7703
Third Party: Daito HM32
See “Distributors,” below*
*Distributors
GFK-1065F
U.S.A.
MHOTRONICS, Inc.
960 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061
Phone: 847-9139566
Fax: 847-913-9587
Europe
OESS Gmbll Frankfurt Office
Senefelder Street 1
63110 Rodgau, Germany
Phone: 6106750313
Fax: 6106-72719
Singapore
B.B.S. Electronics PTE. LTD
1 Genting Link, #05-03
Perfecindustrial Building
Singapore 1334
Phone: 748-8400
Fax: 748-8466
Chapter 3 Installation
3-15
3
Expansion Unit Installation
The 23-point Micro PLCs support the Series 90 Micro Expansion Units (IC693UEX011), Generic
(third party) expansion units, and the I/O Link Interface unit (IC693UEX013). Up to four
expansion units can be connected in series to a base Micro PLC.
Caution
Power down the Micro PLC before connecting an Expansion Unit.
Connecting an Expansion Unit with the Micro PLC powered up will damage
the unit.
Note
If you are connecting a third-party expansion unit, you will need to provide a
ribbon cable. Software filtering of generic (third-party) expansion I/O is not
supported. Hardware filtering should be supplied to meet the required noise
immunity on these units.
Micro Expansion Unit
The Micro Expansion Unit (IC693UEX011) connects to a 23-point Micro PLC to provide
additional I/O points (8 inputs and 6 outputs per each unit). This expansion unit has the following
features:
•
Ribbon cable for connection to 28-point Micro PLC is provided with expansion unit. This
ribbon cable is 3 CM in length and cannot be substituted. That is, you must use the
ribbon supplied with the unit.
•
The Micro PLC firmware supports input filtering of the 14-point expansion units.
The expansion unit has a 40-pin female connector at each end. The left connector can be
connected to either a base Micro PLC or to another expansion unit’s right-side 40-pin female
connector via a short ribbon cable. Table 3-5 lists pin assignments for the expansion ports.
Caution
The 40-pin ribbon cable provided with the Micro Expansion Unit has keyed
connectors to prevent incorrect connection. Powering up the system with the
cable improperly installed can damage the Expansion Unit. Do not
substitute the ribbon cable provided with this Micro PLC with a generic
ribbon cable. If you need to order replacements, the part number is
IC693ACC003.
3-16
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
a45692
28 P oint
Base Unit
14 P oint
Expans ion Unit
40 pin ribbon connec tor
40 pin c onnector for next Expans ion Unit (4m ax)
Figure 3-10. Expansion Unit Installation
Note
Cable length is fixed at minimum length to eliminate noise.
Micro Expansion Unit Orientation
Caution
The Micro Expansion Unit’s input expansion port must be connected to the
output expansion port of the base Micro PLC (or another expansion unit).
Connecting the unit in the reverse position will damage the DC input circuit
when the system is powered up.
4 0 p in r ib b o n c a b le
4 0 p in r ib b o n c a b le
2 8 P o in t
B a s e U n it
Bo tto m
1 4 P o in t
E x p a n s io n U n it
1 4 P o in t
E x p a n s io n U n it
Bo tto m
Top
Correct
Wrong
Figure 3-11. Micro Expansion Unit Orientation
Note
The part number for the Micro expansion ribbon is IC693ACC003. These
ribbons come in a 12-pack.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
3-17
3
Electromagnetic Compatibility
To meet the electromagnetic compatibility requirements of FCC Rule part 15, subpart J, the Micro
Expansion Unit must be installed as described in the Important Product Information (IPI)
document, GFK-1474. This IPI is provided with the Micro Expansion Unit and covers installation
and shielding requirements.
Physical Order of Different Types of Expansion Units
Different types of expansion units can be connected to a base unit. The installation must meet the
following requirements:
1.
Generic expansion units must be located immediately after the Micro PLC base unit and
before any other types of expansion units.
2.
Standard Micro (IC693UEX011) expansion units must be located after any generic expansion
units and before the I/O Link Interface expansion unit.
3.
The I/O Link Interface expansion unit (I/O Link IEU) must be located after all other types of
expansion units. Because the I/O Link IEU has only one expansion connector, it must be the
last unit if other units are connected to the same base Micro PLC. This also means that there
can be only one I/O Link IEU per Micro PLC base unit.
Note
The I/O Link IEU (IC693UEX013) is not sold in the United States. For details
on installation and operation, refer to the documentation provided with the I/O
Link IEU.
Additionally, if two or more generic expansion units are used in a system, they should be
configured and physically located with their address offsets in ascending order.
3-18
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
Table 3-5. Micro Expansion Port Pin Assignments
IN
(Left Connector on Expansion Unit)
Pin
Signal Name
Function
OUT
(Right Connector on Micro PLC and Expansion Unit)
Pin
Signal Name
Function
A01
Reserved*
NA
A01
GND
Ground
A02
Reserved*
NA
A02
/WR
Write
A03
Reserved*
NA
A03
A7
Address 07
A04
Reserved*
NA
A04
A8
Address 08
A05
Reserved*
NA
A05
A9
Address 9
A06
/WAIT
Wait state control
A06
A11
Address 11
A07
GND
Ground
A07
/RD
Read
A08
D3
Data 3
A08
A10
Address 10
A09
D2
Data 2
A09
A0
Address 00
A10
D6
Data 6
A10
D0
Data 0
A11
D0
Data 0
A11
D6
Data 6
A12
A0
Address 0
A12
D2
Data 2
A13
A10
Address 10
A13
D3
Data 3
A14
/RD
Read
A14
GND
Ground
A15
A11
Address 11
A15
/WAIT
Wait state control
A16
A9
Address 9
A16
Reserved*
NA
A17
A8
Address 8
A17
Reserved*
NA
A18
A7
Address 7
A18
Reserved*
NA
A19
/WR
Write
A19
Reserved*
NA
A20
GND
Ground
A20
Reserved*
NA
B01
Reserved*
NA
B01
GND
Ground
B02
Reserved*
NA
B02
GND
Ground
B03
ERRI
IO link status
B03
GND
Ground
B04
Reserved*
NA
B04
A6
Address 06
B05
/CS2
Expansion select
B05
A5
Address 05
B06
/IORST
Expansion reset
B06
A4
Address 04
B07
Reserved*
NA
B07
A3
Address 03
B08
D4
Data 4
B08
A2
Address 02
B09
D5
Data 5
B09
A1
Address 01
B10
D1
Data 1
B10
D7
Data 7
B11
D7
Data 7
B11
D1
Data 1
B12
A1
Address 1
B12
D5
Data 5
B13
A2
Address 2
B13
D4
Data 4
B14
A3
Address 3
B14
Reserved*
NA
B15
A4
Address 4
B15
/IORST
Expansion reset
B16
A5
Address 5
B16
/CS2
Expansion select
B17
A6
Address 6
B17
Reserved*
NA
B18
GND
Ground
B18
Reserved*
NA
B19
GND
Ground
B19
ERRI
IO link status
B20
GND
Ground
B20
Reserved*
NA
* All reserved pins should remain unconnected by expansion units.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
3-19
3
Agency Approvals, Standards, and
General Specifications for Series 90 Micro PLC
The Series 90 Micro PLC products supplied by GE Fanuc are global products which are designed and manufactured for
application in industrial environments throughout the world. They should be installed and used in conformance with
product specific guidelines as well as the following agency approvals, standards and general specifications:
AGENCY APPROVALS
OVERVIEW1
3-20
Comments
Industrial Control Equipment
[Safety]
UL508, CUL
Certification by Underwriters Laboratories for selected modules
Hazardous Locations [Safety]
Class I, Div II, A, B, C, D
UL1604
with C-UL
Certification by Underwriters Laboratories for selected modules
European EMC Directive
CE Mark
Selected modules
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
Conditions
STANDARDS OVERVIEW2
ENVIRONMENTAL
Vibration
IEC68-2-6,
JISC0911
1G @40-150Hz, 0.012in p-p @10-40Hz
Shock
IEC68-2-27,
JISC0912
15G, 11ms
Operating Temperature3
0°C to 55°C [ambient]
Storage Temperature
–40°C to +85°C
Humidity
5% to 95%, non-condensing
Enclosure Protection
IEC529
Enclosure per IP54; protection from dust & splashing water
EMC EMISSIONS
CISPR11,
EN55011
Radiated, Conducted
FCC
EMC IMMUNITY
Group 1, Class A [applies to CE Marked modules]
part 15, subpart J
[applies to CE Marked modules]
Electrostatic Discharge
EN 61000-4-2
IEC801-2
8KV Air Discharge, 4KV Contact Discharge
Radiated RF
ENV 50140, ENV50204
IEC801-3
10Vrms /m, 80Mhz to 1000Mhz, modulated
Fast Transient Burst, EN61000-4-4
IEC801-4
2KV: power supplies, 1KV: I/O, communications
Surge Withstand, EN61000-4-5
IEC 1000-4-5
IEC 1000-4-12
Conducted RF, EN50141
IEC801-6
Power >50V, 2KV (line-to-ground), 1KV (line-to-line)
supply: <50V, 0.5KV (line-to-ground), 0.5KV (line-to-line)
Communications port and I/O: 1KV
10V, 150kHz to 80Mhz injection for comm cables >30m
ISOLATION
UL508, UL840,
IEC664
Dielectric Withstand
1.5KV for modules rated from 51V to 250V
POWER SUPPLY
Input Dips, Variations
IEC1000-4-11
During Operation: Dips to 30% and 100%, Variation for AC
±10%, Variation for DC ±20%
Note 1: Module-specific approvals are listed on the GE Fanuc Electronic Bulletin Board Service [BBS]. The BBS can be
reached at 804-975-1300 with the following modem settings: up to 33,600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, no stop
bits. After accessing the BBS, select the BBS File area (PLC:AGENCY STATUS) and the file (AGENSTDS.XLS).
This information is also available on the Internet at our technical support World Wide Web site at the address:
http://www.gefanucsupport.com
Note 2: Refer to module-specific data sheets and installation guidelines in the following publications:
Important Product Information, Micro PLC (GFK-1094)
Important Product Information, Micro Expansion Units (GFK-1474)
Data Sheet, 14-Point Micro PLC, GFK-1087
Data Sheet, 28-Point Micro PLC, GFK-1222
Data Sheet, Micro Expansion Unit, GFK-1460
Data Sheet, 23-Point Micro PLC, GFK-1459
Data Sheet, 14-Point Micro PLC (DC In/Out), GFK-1553
Note 3: Selected modules may be derated.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
3-21
3
CE Mark Installation Requirements
The following requirements for surge, electrostatic discharge (ESD), and fast transient burst
(FTB) protection must be met for applications that require CE Mark listing:
3-22
•
The series 90 Micro PLC is considered to be open equipment and should therefore be
installed in an enclosure (IP54) .
•
This equipment is intended for use in typical industrial environments that utilize anti-static
materials such as concrete or wood flooring. If the equipment is used in an environment that
contains static material, such as carpets, personnel should discharge themselves by touching a
safely grounded surface before accessing the equipment.
•
If the AC mains are used to provide power for I/O, these lines should be suppressed prior to
distribution to the I/O so that immunity levels for the I/O are not exceeded. Suppression for
the AC I/O power can be made using line-rated MOVs that are connected line-to-line, as well
as line-to-ground. A good high-frequency ground connection must be made to the line-toground MOVs.
•
AC or DC power sources less than 50V are assumed to be derived locally from the AC mains.
The length of the wires between these power sources and the Series 90 Micro PLC should be
less than a maximum of approximately 10 meters.
•
Installation must be indoors with primary facility surge protection on the incoming AC power
lines.
•
On Micro PLCs that have DC inputs (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, /UAL006, UEX011): The
wires between the 24 VDC output and COM1 (on the 23-point Micros only) must be as short
as possible.
•
On 23 and 28-point DC In/Relay Out Micro PLCs (IC693UDR005/010, UAL006): The cable
connection to Serial Port 2 should be configured as shown in Figure 3-12 to minimize noise.
(The wire between the cable shield and the FRAME GND pin of the D-SUB connector on the
cable should be cut. The cable shield should then be connected to the GND terminal screw on
the Micro PLC unit.)
•
On 28-point DC In/Relay Out Micro PLCs (IC693UDR005/010): Inputs used as high speed
counter inputs must be powered separately. An external power supply should be provided for
the high speed counter inputs as shown in Figure 3-13. For wiring of discrete inputs and
outputs, refer to the field wiring diagrams in Chapter 4.
•
On 28-point DC In/Relay Out Micro PLCs (IC693UDR005/010): Under the conditions of the
Surge Withstand test (EN61000-4-5), HSC miscounts could occur. These additional counts
can be minimized by using shielded cable and by keeping the cabling length less than 30
meters.
•
In the presence of noise, serial communications could be interrupted.
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
3
S erial P o rt 2
Series 90 M icro PLC
S ig n a l
GND
C a b le
S h ie ld
F ra m e
GND
H
N
GND
C u t h e re
28-Point DC In/Relay Out/AC Power Micro PLC (IC693UDR005)
Figure 3-12. CE Mark Requirements for Cable Connection to Serial Port 2
E xte rn a l p o we r s up p ly
24 V D C
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
I1
I2
I3
I4
COM1
I5
I6
I7
I8
CO M 2
N
GND
Q1
C OM 1
VC
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
CO M 2
Q6
N
V
G ND
24 VD C
L
L
~
C OM 3
Q7
COM4
1 00 /24 0
VAC
ts s ho uld be pow erd s ep are tly fro m d is c re te in puts .
* TH heigh sswpitceedhingc oudevnteicr esinpus hou
ld be s olid s tate to a v oid boun c e , w hic h c ou ld c aus e
un inte nde d c oun ts or s tr obe s .
T his e xa m p le is c on n ec ted fo r po s itiv e lo g ic . T he in puts c a n be w ired for
neg ativ e lo gic b e re v ers in g th e 24 V D C ex terna l po w er s u pply c o nne c tion s .
28-Point DC In/Relay Out/AC Power Micro PLC (IC693UDR005)
Figure 3-13. CE Mark Requirements for Power Supply to High Speed Counter Inputs
GFK-1065F
Chapter 3 Installation
3-23
Chapter
Field Wiring
4
This chapter contains power and I/O specifications and wiring information for the Series 90 Micro
PLC.
Positive and Negative Logic Definitions
The IEC definitions for positive logic and negative logic, as applied to the Series 90 Micro PLC
I/O circuits, are defined as follows.
Input Points – Positive Logic
a45705
Characteristics:
•
Equivalent to IEC sink input points.
•
Sink current from the input device to the user common
or negative power bus.
•
The input device is connected between the positive
power bus and the input terminal. The negative bus is
connected to the input circuit common.
IEC
sink
in
Input
+24V
0V
Com
Input Points – Negative Logic
Characteristics:
•
Equivalent to IEC source inputs.
•
Source current through the input device to the user
common or positive power bus.
•
The input device is connected between the negative
power bus and the input terminal. The positive bus is
connected to the input circuit common.
a45706
IE C
source
in
Co m
+24V
0V
Input
GFK-1065F
4-1
4
Output Points – Positive Logic
a45707
Characteristics:
•
Equivalent to IEC source output points.
•
Source current to the loads from the user common or
positive power bus. The load is connected between the
negative power bus and the module output.
+2 4 V
O utput
IE C
sou rc e
out
Us er
Lo a d
0V
Output Points – Negative Logic
Characteristics:
4-2
•
Equivalent to IEC sink outputs.
•
Sink current from the loads to the user common or
negative power bus.
•
The load is connected between the positive power bus and
the output terminal.
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
a45706
IE C
sourc e
in
Com
+24 V
0V
Input
GFK-1065F
4
Interface Specifications
Input/output and power supply characteristics are listed below for each Series 90 Micro PLC
model. Refer to the pages listed for detailed specifications for the type of input or output and to the
field wiring diagrams for each model.
Model Summaries
14-Point DC In/Relay Out/AC Power (IC693UDR001/UEX011)
Inputs
Eight 24 VDC positive/negative logic input circuits
See page 4-7.
Outputs
Six normally open 2 amp relay circuits
See page 4-10.
24 VDC
Isolated 24 VDC output power supply
See page 4-12.
Field wiring diagram
See page 4-22.
AC Power Requirements – User/Internal (IC693UDR001/UEX011)
GFK-1065F
Range
Frequency
Hold-up
100 -15% to 240 +10% VAC
50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
10 ms at 85 VAC
Inrush Current
18 A maximum at 120 VAC
30 A maximum at 200 VAC
40 A maximum at 265 VAC
Inrush Time
2 ms for 40A
Input Current
0.12 A typical at 200 VAC
0.25 A typical at 100 VAC
Input Power Supply Rating
35 VA
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-3
4
14-Point DC In/Relay Out/DC Power (IC693UDR002), 14 Point DC In/DC
Out/DC Power (IC693UDD104)
Inputs
Eight 24 VDC positive/negative logic input circuits
See page 4-7.
Outputs
Six normally open 2 amp relay circuits
See page 4-10.
24 VDC
Isolated 24 VDC output power supply
See page 4-12.
Field wiring diagram
See page 4-22.
DC Power Requirements – User/Internal (IC693UDR002/UDD104)
Range
12 -15% to 24 +25% VDC
12 -15% to 24 +10% VAC
Hold-up
4 ms at 10 VDC
10 ms at 12 VDC
Inrush Current
65 A maximum at 24 VDC
81 A maximum at 30 VDC
Inrush Time
10 ms for 81 A
Input Current
0.8 A typical at 12 VDC
0.4 A typical at 24 VDC
Input Power Supply Rating
15W/20VA
Note: The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4 VDC) than at rated
input voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is required to start up the DC power supply.
14-Point AC In/AC Out/AC Power (IC693UAA003)
Inputs
Eight AC inputs
See page 4-15.
Outputs
Six AC outputs
See page 4-18.
Field wiring diagram
See page 4-22.
AC Power Requirements – User/Internal (IC693UAA003)
Range
100 -15% to 240 +10% VAC
Frequency
Hold-up
50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
10 ms at 85 VAC
Inrush Current
18 A maximum at 120 VAC
30 A maximum at 200 VAC
40 A maximum at 265 VAC
Inrush Time
2 ms for 40 A
Input Current
0.25 A typical at 100 VAC
0.12 A typical at 200 VAC
Input Power Supply Rating
4-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
20 VA
GFK-1065F
4
28-Point DC In/DC & Relay Out/AC Power (IC693UDR005)
Sixteen 24 volt DC positive/negative logic input circuits
See page 4-7.
Potentiometers
See page 4-8.
Outputs
One DC output (Q1)
Eleven normally open 2 amp relay circuits
See page 4-12.
24 VDC
Isolated 24 VDC output power supply
See page 4-12.
Inputs
Field wiring diagram
See page 4-10.
See page 4-23.
AC Power Requirements – User/Internal (IC693UDR005)
Range
Frequency
100 -15% to 240 +10% VAC
50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up
10 ms at 85 VAC
Inrush Current
30 A maximum at 200 VAC
40 A maximum at 265 VAC
Inrush Time
2 ms for 40 A
Input Current
0.26 A typical at 100 VAC
0.12 A typical at 200 VAC
Input Power Supply Rating
40 VA
23-Point DC In/DC & Relay Out/Analog I/O/AC Power (IC693UAL006)
Inputs
Outputs
24 VDC
Thirteen 24VDC positive/negative logic input circuits
See page 4-7.
Two analog inputs
See page 4-15
Potentiometers
See page 4-8
Nine normally open 2 amp relay circuits
See page 4-12
One DC output (Q1)
One analog output
See page 4-12.
Isolated 24 VDC output power supply
See page 4-12.
See page 4-16
Field wiring diagram
See page 4-23.
AC Power Requirements – User/Internal (IC693UAL006)
Range
100 -15% to 240 +10% VAC
Frequency
50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up
10 ms at 85 VAC
Inrush Current
35 A maximum at 200 VAC
46 A maximum at 265 VAC
Inrush Time
GFK-1065F
2 ms for 40 A
Input Current
0.35 A typical at 100 VAC
0.22 A typical at 200 VAC
Isolation
1500VAC rms field side to logic (both power
supply input and 24 VDC power supply output)
Input Power Supply Rating
50 VA
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-5
4
28-Point AC In/AC Out/AC Power (IC693UAA007)
Inputs
16 AC inputs
See page 4-17.
Outputs
12 AC outputs
See page 4-18.
Field wiring diagram
See page 4-24.
AC Power Requirements – User/Internal (IC693UAA007)
Range
Frequency
100 -15% to 240 +10% VAC
50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up
10 ms at 85 VAC
Inrush Current
30 A maximum at 200 VAC
40 A maximum at 265 VAC
Inrush Time
2 ms for 40 A
Input Current
0.16 A typical at 100 VAC
0.09 A typical at 200 VAC
Input Power Supply Rating
25 VA
28-Point DC/DC & Relay Out/DC Power (IC693UDR010)
Inputs
Sixteen 24 VDC positive/negative logic input circuits
See page 4-7.
Outputs
Eleven normally open 2 amp relay circuits
One DC output (Q1)
See page 4-10.
See page 4-12
24 VDC
Isolated 24 VDC output power supply
See page 4-12.
Field wiring diagram
See page 4-23.
DC Power Requirements – User/Internal (IC693UDR010)
Range
24 -20%, +25% VDC
24 -15%, +10% VAC
Hold-up
2 ms at 9.5 VDC
Inrush Current
65 A maximum at 24 VDC
81 A maximum at 30 VDC
Inrush Time
10 ms for 81 A
Input Current
1.4 A typical at 24 VDC
Input Power Supply Rating
20 W/40 VA
Note
The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4 VDC)
than at rated input voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is required to start up the DC power
supply.
Note
If configured to disable powerup diagnostics, the 28-point DC In/ Relay Out/DC
Power unit (IC693UDR010) will begin logic solution 100ms after the voltage
level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24VDC. The 24VDC
power source for the UDR010 unit must have enough transient current
capability to support the inrush current of the power supply and maintain a
24VDC voltage level (see power supply specifications for inrush requirements
above).
4-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
4
Positive/Negative Logic Inputs (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UDD00104, UAL006, UEX011)
The 24 volt DC positive/negative logic input circuits are designed to have positive or negative
logic characteristics. Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table (%I).
For an overview of positive and negative logic, see page 4-1.
Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as: pushbuttons,
limit switches, and electronic proximity switches. Power to operate field devices and the input
circuits is supplied by an isolated +24 VDC supply.
Table 4-1. Specifications for 24 VDC Input Circuits
Rated Input Voltage
24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range
0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current
7.5mA typical
Input Resistance
2.8 Kohms
Input Threshold Voltage
ON
OFF
15V minimum
5V maximum
Input Threshold Current
ON
OFF
4.5mA maximum
1.5mA minimum
0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Response Time
See “Software Filters” in Chapter 8 for details.
500VAC RMS field side to logic side
Isolation Voltage
500V RMS between groups, if one group is powered by an external
24V power supply.
c o nne c tio n s how n: re ve rs e p o larity o f 2 4V D C p ow e r s up p ly
* Pc oonns itive
e c tio ns fo r ne g a tive c on ne c tio n.
Te rm in a l
S tr ip
24VD C
COM
To o the r c irc uits
a45686
LED
2 .8 k
I
*
5V
H ig h
F re q ue nc y
F ilte r
CPU
I/O
CPU
Figure 4-1. Typical 24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic Input Circuit
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-7
4
Potentiometer Analog Inputs (All Models)
Two potentiometers, located on the front panel of the Micro PLC, allow you to manually set input
values that are stored in %AI16 and %AI17. The top potentiometer controls %AI16, and the
bottom one controls %AI17 (see Figure 2-3).
Due to the nature of analog input, the values seen in %AI16 and %AI17 will have some
fluctuation. The Micro PLC uses an averaging filter to stabilize these inputs. The number of
samples to be averaged is controlled by the value in %AQ1 as described in “Analog Input
Filtering” in Chapter 8.
Table 4-2. Potentiometer Analog Specifications
For details, see “Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering” in Chapter 8.
4-8
Reference locations
AI16, AI17
Resolution
10 bits
Range
0–1023 per ¾ turn
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
4
High Speed Counter Inputs (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UAL006)
The 24 VDC input positive/negative logic circuits can be used as inputs for the High Speed
Counter (HSC) function provided by the Series 90 Micro PLC. These inputs can be connected
either as positive or negative inputs as described in the DC input circuit section. The maximum
frequency for the HSC inputs is 5Khz.
The HSCs can be configured as four type A counters, or as one type B counter and one type A
counter. Unused HSC inputs can be used as standard DC inputs. (Refer to Chapter 6 for input
assignments.)
T e r m in a l
S tr ip
24VD C
5V
2 .8 k
COM
a45687
LED
Count
or
S tr o b e
CPU
I/O
CPU
Figure 4-2. High Speed Counter Circuit - Negative Logic Connection
T e r m in a l
S tr ip
24VD C
COM
5V
2 .8 k
a4 5688
LED
Count
or
S tr o b e
CPU
I/O
CPU
Figure 4-3. High Speed Counter Circuit - Positive Logic Connection
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-9
4
Relay Outputs (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, UAL006, UEX011)
These normally open relay outputs can control a wide range of user-supplied load devices, such as
motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2
amps. Power for the internal relay coils is provided by the +26 volt DC internal supply. The user
must supply the AC or DC power to operate field devices.
Table 4-3. Specifications for Relay Output, 2 Amp Circuits
Operating Voltage
5 to 30 VDC
5 to 250 VAC
Isolation
1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current
1 mA at 240 VAC maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating
2 amps at 24 VDC and 240 VAC
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24 VDC and 240 VAC
Minimum Load
10 mA
Maximum Inrush
5 amps per half cycle
On Response Time
15 ms maximum
Off Response Time
15 ms maximum
Contact Life
(also refer to Table 4-4.)
Mechanical
20 x 106 mechanical operations
Electrical
200,000 electrical operations resistive load (2A)
0V
5V
a 4 5 6 89
Te rm in a l
Strip
Q1
LED
L
O
A
D
CPU
Po w er
T o o the r c ir c uits
CPU
Com m on
I/O
Figure 4-4. Typical Relay Output Circuit
4-10
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
4
Output Circuit Protection
Caution
These relay outputs do not have fuse protection. It is recommended that
each output point be externally fused (maximum 2 amp) to protect the
output point contacts from damage.
When controlling inductive loads, it is recommended that the user provide suppression circuits as
shown in Figure 4-5. In addition, relay contact life, when switching inductive loads, will approach
resistive load contact life if suppression circuits are used. The 1A, 100V diode shown in the
typical DC load suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4934.
Table 4-4. Typical Contact Life
Voltage
Resistive
240VAC, 120VAC, 24VDC
Current
Lamp and Solenoid
Typical Operations
2A
0.6A
200,000
240VAC, 120VAC, 24VDC
1A
0.3A
400,000
240VAC, 120VAC, 24VDC
0.5A
0.1A
800,000
a 45 6 64
S e rie s 9 0
M ic ro P L C
DC Loads
a 4 56 65
Series 90
Micro PLC
1A, 100V
.022
Relay
O u tp u t
Relay
Output
C om
Com
D C S u pp ly
AC Loads
f 100
~
AC Source
Figure 4-5. Suppression Circuits
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-11
4
High Speed Counter Outputs (IC693UDR001/002/005, IC693UAL006)
Micro PLC outputs %Q1 through %Q8 can be configured to be controlled by the HSC function.
HSC output for Q1 can not be enabled if it is being used as a PWM or pulse train output. (Unused
HSC outputs can be used as standard relay outputs.)
Connections and specifications for HSC outputs are the same as for standard relay outputs.
DC Outputs (IC693UDR005/010 and IC693UAL006)
The DC output circuit (Q1) can be configured to provide High Speed Counter, pulse train or PWM
output.
Table 4-5. Specifications for DC Output Circuit
Operating Voltage
24VDC / 12VDC / 5VDC
Voltage Range
24 VDC, +20%, –79%
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating
0.75A at 24 VDC
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 0.75A at 24 VDC
0.5A at 12 VDC
0.25A at 5 VDC
Output Voltage Drop
0.3 VDC maximum
Response
ON
0.1ms maximum (24 VDC, 0.2A)
OFF
0.1ms maximum (24 VDC, 0.2A)
OFF state leakage
Isolation
0.1mA maximum
1500 VAC between field side and logic side
500 VAC between groups
Note
A pulldown resistor, connected between Q1 and COM1, is required for high
frequency Pulse and PWM (up to 2 Khz—refer to Chapter 5 for low
value)outputs and for duty cycles in the lower ranges (5% and lower). A 1.5
Kohm, 0.5 watt resistor is recommended for this purpose.
Transistor Outputs 24VDC (IC693UDD104)
The transistor output circuits allow to switch devices like valves, lamps or contactors. These
transistor outputs are not protected. The user should provide external fusing to protect the outputs.
The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the High Speed
Counters. Some outputs can be used as pulse train or pulse width modulation (PWM) outputs
(refer to the “PMW Output” section of Chapter 5).
All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage. Outputs of
IC693UDD104 have one common incoming supply (VC) and one common ground (COM).
4-12
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
4
The outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.
The outputs are not short circuit proof and require external fuses for each output to be effectively
protected. For this purpose fast fuses are recommended.
Table 4-6. Specifications for Transistor Outputs 24 VDC
24VDC +20% -15% (at VC)
1A per point (Q1 - Q2) at 100 % ON duration
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
0.5A per point (Q2 - Q6) at 100 % ON duration
plus additional for UDD110 :
0.5A per point (Q7 - Q10) at 100 % ON duration
1A per point (Q11 - Q12) at 100 % ON duration
8A for 20ms, 1 pulse (1A outputs)
Maximum Inrush Current
4A for 20ms, 1 pulse (0.5A outputs)
0,5V maximum
Output Voltage Drop
OFF state leakage
100µA maximum
Response
OFF → ON:
6µs typical
ON → OFF:
100µs typical
Isolation Voltage
500VAC between field side and logic side
5V
5V
To other circuits
VC
24VDC
Fuse
external
L
o
a
d
CPU
+
-
COM
To other circuits
CPU Board
I/O Board
Terminal Strip
Figure 4-6. Typical Transistor Output Circuit 24 VDC
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-13
4
24 VDC Output Power Supply (IC693UDR001/002/005/010, IC693UDD104,
IC693UAL006, IC693UEX011)
An isolated 24 VDC output power supply is available for user devices and can be used to power
the DC input circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and
external device current must not exceed 100 mA for 14-point units and 200 mA for 23 and 28point units.
Table 4-7. Specifications for 24 VDC Power Supply, Micro PLCs
Voltage
24 VDC, ±10%
Current
14-point Micro
23-point Micro
28-point Micro
100 mA maximum
200 mA maximum
200 mA maximum
14-point Expansion Unit
4-14
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
100 mA maximum
GFK-1065F
4
Analog Inputs (IC693UAL006)
a45699
1 0 0K
+15V
I-
5V
5V
220PF
23K
250
.0 2 2 f
AM P
REF
H8
A n a lo g
In p u t
IJ P
220PF
100K
23K
0V
-1 5 V
.15
f
I+
0V
0V
0V
Figure 4-7. Analog Input Circuit
Table 4-8. Analog Input Specifications
Analog Input Channels
2, differential
Input ranges
0 to 10V (10.24V max.)
0 to 20mA (20.5mA max.)
4 to 20 mA (20.5mA max.)
Resolution:
0 to 10 V range
0 to 20 mA range
4 to 20 mA range
10 bits (1 LSB = 10mV)
9 bits (1 LSB = 40µA)
8+ bits (1 LSB = 40µA)
Accuracy
1% of full scale over full operating temperature range
Linearity
±3 LSB maximum
Common mode voltage
±200 V maximum
Current input impedance
250 ohms
Voltage input impedance
800 Kohms
Input filter time
20.2ms to reach 1% error for step input
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-15
4
Analog Output (IC693UAL006)
a45698
+15V
+15V
Vout
AM P
DAC
Vcom
+15V
-1 5 V
V o lta g e to
C u rr e nt C o n ve rt e r
Io u t
Ic o m
0V
Figure 4-8. Analog Output Circuit
Table 4-9. Analog Output Specifications
Analog Output Channel
1, single-ended, non isolated
Output ranges
0 to 10V (10.24V maximum)
0 to 20mA (20.5mA maximum)
4 to 20mA (20.5mA maximum)
Resolution
4-16
0 to 10 V range
0 to 20 mA range
4 to 20 mA range
12 bits (1 LSB = 2.5mV)
12 bits (1 LSB = 5µA)
11+ bits (1 LSB = 5µA)
Accuracy
±1% of full scale over full operating temperature range
(0°C to 55°C)
Current: maximum compliance voltage, at 20mA
user load range
output load capacitance
output load inductance
10V
0 to 500 ohms
2000 pF maximum
1 henry maximum
Voltage: output loading
output load capacitance
2 Kohm minimum at 10 volts
1 µF maximum
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
4
AC Inputs (IC693UAA003/007)
The 120 VAC input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. Current into an input point
results in a logic 1 in the input status table (%I). Input characteristics are compatible with a wide
range of user-supplied input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity
switches. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user. The input circuits
require an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source.
a45690
5V 5V
Te r m in a l
S tr ip
LED
1
H
20
N
H ig h
F re q u e n cy
F ilte r
To o the r c irc uits
CPU
I/O
CPU
Figure 4-9. Typical 120 VAC Input Circuit
Table 4-10. AC Input Circuit Specifications
Points/Common
4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)
Rated Load Voltage
85–132 VAC, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Input Voltage
132V rms, 50/60 Hz
Input Current
8 mA rms (100 VAC, 60 Hz)
Voltage
Response Time
ON
minimum 80V rms, 4.5 mA rms
OFF
maximum 30V rms, 2 mA rms
OFF→ON
ON→OFF
maximum 25 ms
maximum 30 ms
1500V rms field side to logic side
500V rms between groups
Isolation
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-17
4
AC Outputs (IC693UAA003/007)
The 120 VAC, 0.5 A output points are provided in isolated groups. A circuit diagram is shown in
Figure 4-9. The commons are not tied together inside the module. This allows each group to be
used on different phases of the AC supply, or to be powered from the same supply. Each group is
protected with a 3.2 amp fuse for its common. Also, an RC snubber is provided for each output to
protect against transient electrical noise on the power line. This module provides a high degree of
inrush current (10x the rated current) which makes the outputs suitable for controlling a wide
range of inductive and incandescent loads. An inrush derating curve is provided in Figure 4-10.
AC power to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied by the user. This module
requires an AC power source, it cannot be used with a DC power source.
User-replaceable fuses are supplied internally on the common of each output group. This fuse does
not guarantee that the output point will be protected from a direct short. It is recommended that
each output point be externally fused (minimum 1 amp) to protect the output point. For lighter
loads, the internal common fuse (3.2 amp) can be replaced with a 1 amp fuse to protect the output
point without adding the external fusing.
5V
5V
a45 691
L
O
A
D
LED
H
CPU
N
CPU
I/O
To othe r
3.2A F use
output
c irc u its
o n sa m e g r o u p
Figure 4-10. Typical 120 VAC Triac Output Circuit
4-18
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
4
Table 4-11. AC Output Circuit Specifications
Points/Common
two (Q1–Q2, Q7–Q8) and four (Q3–Q6, Q9–Q12)
Rated Load Voltage
100 -15% to 240 +10% VAC, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Resistive Load Current
14-point: 0.5 A/point (0.6 A max. on COM 1; 1.2 A max. on COM 2)
28 point: 0.5 A/point (0.6 A max. on COM1 and COM3;
1.2 A max. on COM 2 and COM 4)
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating (all
models)
0.5 A/point at 240 VAC
Maximum Inrush Current
5A (1 period)/point
10A (1 period)/common
Maximum voltage drop when ON
1.5 V rms
Maximum leak current when OFF
1.8 mA rms (115 VAC)
3.5 mA rms (230 VAC)
Response Time
maximum 1 ms
half of the load frequency + 1 ms or less
OFF→ON
ON→OFF
Isolation
1500V rms field side to logic side
500V rms between groups
a45682
100
50
10
5
Am ps
P e r C om m o n
1
P e r P oin t
0.5
0.1
1
5
10
50
100
500
1000
ms
Figure 4-11. Inrush Derating Curve for AC Output
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-19
4
Field Wiring Installation
Wire Connection Information
Wire connection information for power supply and I/O connections for Series 90 Micro PLCs is
detailed below.
Warning
The Series 90 Micro PLC must be grounded to minimize electrical shock
hazard. Failure to do so could result in injury to personnel.
Warning
You should calculate the maximum current for each wire and observe
proper wiring practices. Failure to do so could cause injury to personnel or
damage to equipment.
Caution
When connecting stranded conductors, insure that there are no projecting
strands of wire. These could cause a short circuit, thereby damaging
equipment or causing it to malfunction.
Power Supply and I/O Connections
4-20
•
Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but the wires into any given terminal should
be of the same type and size.
•
Use copper conductors rated for 75 °C (167 °F) for all wiring. You can use one AWG #14
(2.1 mm2) conductor or two smaller conductors – AWG #16 (1.3 mm2) through AWG #20
(0.36mm2) – per terminal.
•
The suggested torque for the terminal connections is 5 in-lbs (5.76 kg-cm).
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
4
General Wiring Procedures
The following procedures should be followed when routing and connecting field wiring from user
devices to the Series 90 Micro PLC inputs and outputs. Figures 4-11 through 4-15 provide wiring
information for connecting user-supplied input and output devices and power sources for the
Series 90 Micro PLCs.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Turn off power to the Series 90 Micro PLC before connecting field wiring.
All low level signal wires should be run separately from other field wiring.
AC power wiring should be run separately from DC field wiring.
Field wiring should not be routed close to any device that could be a potential source of
electrical interference.
If severe noise problems are present, additional power supply filtering or an isolation
transformer may be required.
Ensure that proper grounding procedures are followed to minimize potential safety hazards to
personnel.
Label all wires to and from I/O devices.
Note
All DC inputs can be connected as either positive or negative logic. In the
following field wiring diagrams, DC inputs I1 through I4 are connected as
positive and the remaining inputs are connected as negative.
Note
If you are controlling inductive loads, you should provide suppression across
each inductive load. For illustrations of typical suppression circuits for AC and
DC loads, see Figure 4-5.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
4-21
4
Note
All DC inputs can be connected as either positive or negative logic. In the
following figure, I1 through I4 are connected as positive and I5 through I8 are
connected as negative.
a45435
*
I1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
I2
I3
I4
COM1
I5
I6
I7
I8
COM2
Q1
COM1
Q2
COM2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
COM3
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
2 4 V D C O u tp u t
Power
S u p p ly
L
N
10 0/240
VAC
L
N
V
GND
or
1 2 /2 4
VA C /V D C
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
A C or D C
Po wer S ource
A C or D C
Po wer S ource
A C or D C
Po wer S ource
* W(Hp r ehigvehennSI1t pbe-oeI8udn acCreino guuntews ehicrsd haa,srechoigpurohld vidscpaeeuedsdeocnuonthuinnetete1nr4din-eppdouinhtsigt, Mhthicsepr oeinepPduLtcCsowbu anitcsteeher ucsnoitssuhon,tsuICldo6r9bs3etUrsoDoblidRe 0s0sig1tan/0tea0ls2to..)
Figure 4-12. Field Wiring, 14-Point DC In/Relay Out Modules (IC693UDR001/002, IC693UEX011)
*
NC
NC
L
N
L
~
N
120/2 40
VAC
I1
V
GND
a45444
~
~
A C P o w er S o urc e
A C P o w er S o urc e
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
I2
I3
I4
COM1
I5
I6
I7
I8
COM2
NC
Q1
Q2
COM1
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
COM2
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
~
~
AC
P ow e r So urce
AC
P ow e r So urce
Figure 4-13. Field Wiring, 14-Point AC In/AC Out Modules (IC693UAA003)
4-22
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
10 0/2 4 0
V AC
N
L
N
or
1 2 /24
VA C /V D C
L
24 VDC
Power
Supply
L
O
A
D
Q1
VC
DC
Power Source
COM1
I4
*
L
O
A
D
Q2
COM1
L
O
A
D
Q3
I5
*
L
O
A
D
Q4
I6
*
COM2
I8
*
AC or DC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q5
I7
*
COM3
I9
AC or DC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q6
COM2
COM4
I11
AC or DC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q7
I10
I1 - I8 are used as high speed counter inputs, the input switches should be solid state to
* When
prevent bouncing, which could cause unintended high speed counter counts or strobe signals.
V
GND
GND
I3
*
COM5
COM3
AC or DC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q8
I12
COM6
I13
AC or DC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q9
COM3
L
O
A
D
Q10
I14
L
O
A
D
Q11
I15
COM7
COM4
AC or DC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q12
I16
All DC inputs can be connected as
either positive or negative logic. In the
following figure, I1 through I8 are
connected as positive and I9 through I16
are connected as negative.
I2
*
Note
I1
*
COM7
COM4
a45414
4
Figure 4-14. 28-Point DC In/Relay Out Modules (IC693UDR005/010)
4-23
4-24
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
~
100/240
VAC
N
N
L
L
NC
NC
V
GND
GND
I1
NC
I2
I5
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
Q6
COM2
COM2
~
L
O
A
D
Q5
Q4
I8
AC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q3
I7
I6
~
L
O
A
D
L
O
A
D
COM1
COM1
AC
Power Source
Q2
I4
~
~
Q1
I3
AC
Power Source
AC
Power Source
NC
COM3
NC
COM3
~
COM3
I9
AC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q7
I11
AC
Power Source
~
COM3
I10
L
O
A
D
Q8
I12
COM4
COM4
L
O
A
D
Q9
I13
AC
Power Source
~
COM4
COM4
~
AC
Power Source
L
O
A
D
Q10
I14
L
O
A
D
Q11
I15
L
O
A
D
Q12
I16
a4 5 413
4
Figure 4-15. 28-Point AC In/AC Out Modules (IC693UAA007)
GFK-1065F
GFK-1065F
Chapter 4 Field Wiring
N
100/240
VAC
L
N
V
GND
GND
L
O
A
D
Q1
VC
I4
*
DC
Power
Source
COM1
I3
*
L
O
A
D
Q2
COM1
L
O
A
D
Q3
I5
*
L
O
A
D
Q4
I6
*
COM2
I8
*
AC or DC
Power
Source
L
O
A
D
Q5
I7
*
COM3
COM3
AC or DC
Power
Source
L
O
A
D
Q6
COM2
* * Connect jumper in current mode.
state to prevent bouncing, which could cause unintended counts or strobe signals.
* When I1-I8 are used as high speed counter inputs, the input switches should be solid
L
24 VDC
Power
Supply
I2
*
COM4
I10
AC or DC
Power
Source
L
O
A
D
Q7
I9
COM5
I12
AC or DC
Power
Source
L
O
A
D
Q8
I11
L
O
A
D
Q9
I13
The 250-ohm resistors on the analog
input circuits are internal.
I1
*
COM6
250
IN1
AC or DC
Power
Source
L
O
A
D
Q10
IN1
ICOM
IN1JP
**
All DC inputs can be connected as
either positive or negative logic. In the
following figure, I1 through I8 are
connected as positive and I9 through I13
are connected as negative.
L
O
A
D
IOUT
IN2
L
O
A
D
VOUT
IN2JP
**
VCOM
250
IN2
IN2
Notes
IN1
a45685
4
Figure 4-16. 23-Point DC In/Relay and DC Out (IC693UAL006)
4-25
Chapter
Configuration
5
The Series 90 Micro PLC can be configured and programmed using any of the following methods.
•
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software on a Workmaster II or CIMSTAR I industrial
computer, or an IBM® PC-AT, PS/2® (Personal System 2®) or compatible Personal
Computer.
•
Logicmaster 90 Micro software (part of IC640HWP300) on any of the above computers.
•
Series 90-30/90-20 Hand-Held Programmer (IC693PRG300).
Both configuration and programming can be done off-line from the PLC, using the Logicmaster
90 Micro software. Configuration and programming using the Hand-Held Programmer (HHP)
must be done with the HHP attached to and interfacing with the PLC.
For more information about the use of these programmers, refer to the following:
•
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466
•
Series 90-30/90-20 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467
•
Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation Manual, GFK-0401
•
Hand-Held Programmer, Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers User’s
Manual, GFK-0402.
Micro PLC Parameters
Table 5-1 lists general parameters for the Micro PLC. Configuration parameters for features that
apply only to specific models are discussed later in this chapter. See page 5-12 for configuration of
Serial Port 2 and page 5-26 for configuration of expansion units. Configuration of the High Speed
Counters is discussed in Chapter 6. Configuration of Analog I/O is discussed in Chapter 7.
GFK-1065F
5-1
5
Table 5-1. Micro PLC Parameters
Parameter
Description
Possible Values
Default Value
I/O Scan-Stop
Determines whether I/O is to be scanned while the
PLC is in STOP mode.
YES
NO
Pwr Up Mode
Selects powerup mode.
LAST
Cfg From
Source of configuration when the PLC is powered up.
(Logic source is always flash memory.)
RAM
PROM (flash memory)
RAM
Registers
Selects source of register data when PLC is powered
up.
RAM
PROM (flash memory)
RAM
Passwords
Determines whether the password feature is enabled or ENABLED
DISABLED
disabled. (If passwords are disabled, the only way to
enable them is to clear the Micro PLC memory by
power cycling the unit and pressing the appropriate
HHP keys.) See page 5-8.
ENABLED
Pwr Up Diag*
The DISABLED setting causes the Micro PLC to
power up without running diagnostics. Unless your
application requires fast power up, it is recommended
that you leave this setting ENABLED.
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
Baud Rate
Data transmission rate (in bits per second).
300
2400
19200
Data Bits
Determines whether the CPU recognizes 7-bit or 8-bit
words (SNP/SNPX requires 8 bits).
7
8
Parity
Determines whether parity is added to words
ODD
NONE
Stop Bits
Number of stop bits used in transmission. (Most serial
devices use one stop bit; slower devices use two.)
1
2
1
Modem TT
Modem turnaround time (10ms/unit) This is the time
required for the modem to start data transmission after
receiving the transmit request.
0–255
0
Idle Time
Time (in seconds) the CPU waits to receive the next
message from the programming device before it
assumes that the programming device has failed and
proceeds to its base state. Communication with the
programmer is terminated and will have to be
reestablished.
1–60
10
Sweep Mode
Normal: sweep runs until it is complete.
NORMAL
Constant: sweep runs for time specified in Sweep Tmr. CNST SWP
Sweep Tmr
Constant sweep time (in milliseconds). Editable when
sweep mode is CNST SWP; non-editable otherwise.
*
NO
STOP
600
4800
RUN
1200
9600
LAST
19200
8
EVEN
ODD
NORMAL
NORMAL mode: N/A
N/A
CNST SWP mode: 5–200 100
If configured to disable powerup diagnostics, the 28-point DC In/ Relay Out/DC Power unit
(IC693UDR010) will begin logic solution 100ms after the voltage level of the power supply input
reaches and maintains 24VDC. The 24VDC power source for the UDR010 unit must have enough
transient current capability to support the inrush current of the power supply and maintain a 24VDC
voltage level (see power supply specifications for inrush requirements in Chapter 2).
Disabling powerup diagnostics has the following effects: The I/O Link Interface Expansion Unit will not
work. No expansion units can be used. (If expansion units are connected while powerup diagnostics are
disabled, faults will be logged in the I/O tables.) All HHP key sequences will be ignored when the
Micro PLC is powering up.
5-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Table 5-1. Micro PLC Parameters – Continued
Parameter
Description
Possible Values
Default Value
In RefAddr
Discrete input reference
not editable
%I00001
%I00001
Input Size
Discrete input size
not editable
8 (14-point)
16 (28-point)
13 (23-point)
8
16
13
Out RefAddr
Discrete output reference not editable
%Q00001
%Q00001
Output Size
Discrete output size
6 (14-point)
12 (28-point)
10 (23-point)
6
12
10
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
not editable
5-3
5
Configuration and Programming Using the HHP
You can use the HHP to perform the following tasks:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Statement List logic program development, including insert, edit, and delete functions. The
Statement List programming instructions provide basic (Boolean) instructions to execute
logical operations such as AND and OR, and many functions that execute advanced
operations including arithmetic operations, data conversion, and data transfer.
On-line program changes
Search logic programs for instructions and/or specific references
Monitor reference data while viewing logic program
Monitor reference data in table form in binary, hexadecimal, or decimal formats
Monitor timer and counter values
View PLC scan time, firmware revision code and current logic memory use
Load, store, and verify program logic and configuration between the HHP and a removable
Memory Card (IC693ACC303). This allows programs to be moved between PLCs or loaded
into multiple PLCs.
Start or stop the PLC from any mode of operation
HHP Configuration Screens
1.
The following screen (Main Menu) will be displayed on the HHP after the Series 90 Micro
PLC has successfully completed its power-up sequence.
__1. PROGRAM
2. DATA
<S
This screen allows you to select the mode of operation of the program. The choices are:
PROGRAM, DATA, PROTECTION, and CONFIGURATION. (Use the ↑ and ↓ cursor keys to
scroll the menu selection display.) For information on using these modes refer to the Hand-Held
Programmer User’s Manual, GFK-0402.
2.
Enter the configuration mode by pressing the 4 key then the ENT key from the Main Menu
screen. The first configuration screen will appear.
The ↑ and ↓ cursor keys allow you to move between power supply configuration, CPU
configuration, Input configuration, Output configuration, and HSC configuration. The ← and
→ keys allow selection of parameters within each of the configurations.
R0:01 PLC
KEY CLK: OFF
<S
This screen indicates that the CPU function is located in rack 0 and slot 01 (R01:01). For
compatibility with Series 90-30 PLCs, the different Micro PLC functions map to rack and slot
locations in the software. The Series 90 Micro PLC system is always in rack 0. The following
table shows the fixed slot assignments for the different functions of the Micro PLC.
5-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Table 5-2. Slot Assignments for Micro PLC Functions
Slot
(as seen on HHP)
Function
Fixed/Configurable
0
Power Supply
Fixed
1
CPU Parameters
Configurable
2
Input Locations
Fixed: %I1 to %I8
3
Output Locations
Fixed: %Q1 to %Q6
4
High Speed Counter
Fixed: I00497–I00512
Q00497–Q00512
AI00001–AI00015
5
%AI18—19 (IC693UAL006 only)
Fixed for IC693UAL006; configurable
for other units
6
%AQ12 (IC693UAL006 only)
Fixed for IC693UAL006; configurable
for other units
7
Expansion Unit 1 (23 and 28-point units) Configurable
8
Expansion Unit 2 (23 and 28-point units) Configurable
9
Expansion Unit 3 (23 and 28-point units) Configurable
10
Expansion Unit 4 (23 and 28-point units) Configurable
11
Unused
Unused
If you want to transfer a program developed for a Series 90 Micro PLC to a Series 90-30 PLC,
the I/O modules in the Series 90-30 PLC must be in the above listed rack and slot locations
for the program and configuration to work properly.
The screen shown above also shows the first configuration item, which allows you to change
the Hand-Held Programmer Key Click feature. The default is KEY CLK: OFF.
3.
Pressing the ↑ key causes the next screen to be displayed:
R0:00 PWR SUP <S
IO BASE: I8/Q6
This screen indicates that the baseplate located at rack 0 and slot 00 is a generic 8 Input/6
Output module.
4.
Pressing the ↓ key causes the previous screen to be displayed:
R0:01 PLC
KEY CLK: OFF
<S
Use the ← and → keys to view the other Micro PLC parameters for configuration and the -/+
key to select the items within each parameter. Refer to Table 5-1 for acceptable values and
default values for Micro PLC parameters.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-5
5
5.
When all Micro PLC parameters have been configured, press the ↓ key again to cause the
input screen to be displayed (this is not configurable):
R0:02 I
<S
I16:I0001-I0008
If the program is transferred to a Series 90-30 Model 311, 313, 331, 340, 341 or 351, the
input module should be located in the first I/O slot (slot 02 on the Model 331, 340, 341, or
351, and slot 01 on the Model 311 and Model 313).
6.
Pressing the ↓ key again causes the output screen to be displayed (this is not configurable):
R0:03 Q
<S
Q16:Q0001-Q0006
If the program is transferred to a Series 90-30 Model 311, 313, 331, 340 341, or 351, the
output module should be located in the second I/O slot (slot 03 on the Model 331, 340, 341,
or 351, and slot 02 on the Model 311 and Model 313).
7.
Pressing the ↓ key again causes the first HSC screen to be displayed (DC In/Relay Out and
DC In/DC Out/Relay Out models only):
R0:04 HSC
<S
CTR TYPE: ALL A
If the program is transferred to a Series 90-30 Model 311, 313, 331, 340 341, or 351, the
HSC module should be located in the third I/O slot (slot 04 on the Model 331, 340, 341, or
351 and slot 03 on the Model 311 and Model 313).
The remaining HSC configuration screens are discussed in Chapter 6.
The following two screens are displayed only for Micro PLCs that have DC output
(IC693UDR005/010 and UAL006).
Note
The PWM Out and PULSE OUT options are available only on counter channel
1. These outputs are also controlled by values in memory locations AQ2 and
AQ3 (PWM), and AQ123, AQ124, Q494 and I494 (Pulse Train). See page 5-35
for additional configuration details.
PWM Output
This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option and the PULSE OUTx option for channel 1
are disabled. This screen selects PWM as the counter output.
R0:04 HSC
<S
PWMOUTX: DISABLE
5-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Pulse Output
This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option and the PWM OUTx option for channel 1 are
disabled. This screen selects a pulse train as the counter output.
R0:04 HSC
<S
PULSEOUTX: DISABLE
Storing the User Program Using the HHP
Note
If the Micro PLC loses power during a program store operation, configuration
and reference tables will be deleted from flash memory. You will need to restore
not only your program, but the configuration and reference tables.
After editing a program, you must save it in nonvolatile flash memory. To do this, perform the
following steps:
1.
With the HHP showing a screen that resembles the following, press the WRITE key.
#XXXX
<S
<END OF PROGRAM>
The following screen will result:
WRITE MEM CARD<S
PRG CFG REG
2.
Next, press the ± key twice. The following screen will appear:
WRITE USR PRG <S
ONLY
3.
Finally, press the ENT key. This will store the edited user program to non-volatile flash
memory. Note that this may take 5 to 10 seconds. When the program has been stored, the
following screen will be displayed:
WRITE OK
<S
At this point the program can be put into RUN mode.
4.
GFK-1065F
To return to the program edit mode, press the ENT key.
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-7
5
Storing Configuration and Register Data Using the HHP
Because the user program is stored in non-volatile flash memory, only one copy is maintained,
even after you invoke the Write to EEPROM/FLASH function in Logicmaster 90, or using the
HHP. However, separate copies of the user configuration and reference tables are maintained in
the EEPROM/FLASH areas of the flash memory.
The configuration entry, Cfg From (see table on page 5-2), determines only whether the user
configuration is obtained from RAM or PROM. The user program is always read from flash
(PROM) memory.
To store the configuration and register data:
1.
From the END OF PROGRAM screen, press the WRITE key (see steps 1 and 2 above).
2.
Press the ± key until the following screen appears:
WRITE PROM
CFG REG ONLY
<S
3.
Press the ENT key. This will store the configuration and register data only. (Program data will
not be stored.) When the store operation is complete, the WRITE OK screen will be
displayed.
4.
To return to the edit mode, press the ENT key.
Other HHP Functions
Note
If the Micro PLC is configured with powerup diagnostics disabled, it will ignore
all HHP key sequences when powering up. Disabling powerup diagnostics for
the Micro PLC is not recommended.
Clearing User Memory Using the HHP
To clear user RAM (configuration, registers, user program and passwords), power cycle or reset
the Micro PLC with the following HHP keys pressed:
CLR and M/T
To boot up without loading memory from the EEPROM, power cycle or reset the Micro PLC with
the following HHP keys pressed:
LD and NOT
To clear memory when powerup diagnostics are disabled, go to Program mode and press the
following key sequence: #, ±, 999, DEL. For detailed information about using the HHP, see the
Hand-Held Programmer, Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers User’s Manual,
GFK-0402.
5-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Booting up in Stop Mode Without Clearing Memory
Power cycle or reset the Micro PLC with the following HHP keys pressed:
RUN and NOT
Setting the Time of Day Clock (23 and 28-Point PLCs)
To set the month, day, year, hour, minutes, and seconds for the time of day clock function:
1.
From the initial power-up screen, shown on page 5-4, press the 4 key to enter the
configuration mode.
2.
Select CPU Configuration.
3.
Use the → key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the clock parameter is displayed.
4.
Continue to press the → key to select each of the clock parameters in turn. To change a
parameter, enter the new value and press the ENT key.
Note
You can also use the SVCREQ function number 7 to read and set the time-of-day clock within a
Logicmaster 90 program. Refer to the Series 90™-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers
Reference Manual, GFK-4067, for information on using the SVCREQ function.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-9
5
Configuration and Programming Using Logicmaster 90 Software
Using the configuration software, which is part of the Logicmaster 90 software package, you can:
•
Specify a name for the system
•
Configure CPU parameters
•
Configure/enable the HSCs (see Chapter 6)
•
Archive or save the configuration in a file
•
Transfer configurations between the PLC and the programmer
The programming software portion of the Logicmaster 90 Micro software package provides the
following capabilities:
5-10
•
Develop ladder diagram programs off-line
•
Monitor and change reference values on-line
•
Edit a program on-line
•
Transfer programs and configurations between the PLC and programmer
•
Store programs automatically on disk
•
Annotate programs
•
Print programs with annotation and/or cross references
•
Display help information
•
Use symbolic references
•
Cut and paste program fragments
•
Print programs and configurations to a printer or a file
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
The general Micro PLC parameters are shown in the following configuration screen. Acceptable
values, including default values, for these parameters are listed on page 5-2. To see additional
configuration screens, press PAGE DOWN. The Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Programming
Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466, provides details on the use of the configuration software.
Note
If the Micro PLC loses power during a program store operation, configuration
and reference tables will be deleted from flash memory. You will need to restore
not only your program, but the configuration and reference tables.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-11
5
Configuring Serial Ports
Port 1, an RS-422 compatible serial port, is used to communicate with Logicmaster 9030/20/Micro software, the HHP, or for general purpose communications. This port supports SNP
and SNPX protocols. On 14-point Micro PLCs, it also supports RTU slave protocol. Port 1 is
configured as part of the general parameters for the Micro PLC using the Logicmaster 90
configuration program or the HHP, except for RTU communications, which must be configured by
a COMM_REQ function in ladder logic. (For definitions of general parameters, see page 5-2.)
Note
To support RTU Slave protocol on Port 1 of the 14-point Micro PLC, a
programmer attach feature is supported. This feature allows connection of the
programmer while the port is configured as RTU. For a description of this
feature, see “Programmer Attach Feature,” on page 5-20.
COMM_REQs directed to Port 1 of the 14-point Micro PLC will not be
processed while the HHP is attached. Any COMM_REQ sent to Port 1 of the 14point Micro PLC when the HHP is attached will be queued and processed when
the HHP is removed.
On 23 and 28-point Micro PLCs, Port 2 is provided for general purpose communications using
SNP, SNPX and RTU slave protocols. Port 2 can also be configured as an SNP/SNPX master.
This port can be used to monitor the Micro PLC’s status while programmer functions are being
performed on the primary serial port (Port 1). Also, when no programmer is connected through
Port 1, Logicmaster 90 can monitor program execution and read and write data through Port 2.
Port 2 does not have autobaud capability (Port 1 does). On release 3.0 and later 28-point Micro
PLCs, a separate SNP ID for Port 2 can be configured using Logicmaster 90 software release 8.01
or later. On earlier releases, Port 2 shares the SNP ID with Port 1 and the SNP ID can only be
changed through Port 1.
Port 2 configuration can be changed through the Logicmaster 90 hardware configuration utility,
or by using the COMM_REQ (communications request) function block within a ladder logic
program.
Communication Protocols
For detailed descriptions of the protocols used with Series 90 PLCs, refer to the Series 90 PLC
Serial Communications User’s Manual, GFK-0582.
5-12
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Logicmaster 90 Configuration of Serial Port 2
The Port 2 configuration screen immediately follows the general parameter screen for the Micro
PLC. The set of parameters listed depends on the Port 2 Mode selection. Parameter definitions are
provided in Table 5-3. The screen shown below shows the parameters for the default mode, SNP.
Table 5-3. Configuration Parameters for Serial Port 2
Parameter
Port 2 Mode
Description
(23 and 28-point units only)
Possible Values
SNP
RTU
CUSTOM
DISABLED
Default Value
SNP
Port 2 Mode is SNP
SNP Mode
Configures the serial port as a slave (the responding
device) or a master (the initiating device) in a
master/slave system.
SLAVE MASTER
SLAVE
Baud Rate
Data transmission rate (in bits per second)
300
2400
19200
19200
Flow Control
not applicable
NONE
Parity
Determines whether parity is added to words
ODD
EVEN
Stop Bits
Number of stop bits used in transmission. (Most serial
devices use one stop bit; slower devices use two.)
1
2
1
Timeout
Specifies the set of timeout values to be used by
protocol.
LONG MEDIUM
SHORT NONE
LONG
TurnA Delay
Turnaround delay time
0–255
0
SNP ID
Identifier that distinguishes this device from others on
the same network
user-provided
none
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
600
4800
1200
9600
NONE
NONE
ODD
5-13
5
Table 5-3. Configuration Parameters for Serial Port 2 - Continued
Parameter
Description
Possible Values
Default Value
Port 2 Mode is RTU
Baud Rate
Data transmission rate (in bits per second)
300
2400
19200
600
4800
1200
9600
19200
Flow Control
Specifies the method of flow control to use.
NONE
HARDWARE
NONE
Parity
Determines whether parity is added to words
ODD
EVEN
NONE
ODD
Station Address
Identifier that distinguishes this device from others on
the same network.
1-247
1
8
Port 2 Mode is CUSTOM
Data Bits
Determines whether the CPU recognizes 7-bit or 8-bit
words (SNP/SNPX requires 8 bits.)
8
7
Baud Rate
Data transmission rate (in bits per second)
300
2400
600
1200
2400
Flow Control
Specifies the method of flow control to use.
NONE
HARDWARE
SOFTWARE
NONE
Parity
Determines whether parity is added to words
ODD
EVEN
ODD
Stop Bits
Number of stop bits used in transmission. (Most serial
devices use one stop bit; slower devices use two.)
1
2
TurnA Delay
Turnaround delay time
0-255
Timeout
Specifies the set of timeout values to be used by
protocol.
LONG MEDIUM
SHORT NONE
600
4800
9600
19200
1200
NONE
19200
1
LONG
Port 2 Mode is DISABLED
There are no parameters for this mode.
5-14
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Configuring Serial Ports Using the COMM_REQ Function
The PLC ladder program sends Data Commands using the COMM_REQ function. The
COMM_REQ requires that all its command data be placed in the correct order (in a command
block) in the CPU memory before it is executed. The COMM_REQ should then be executed by a
contact of a one-shot coil to prevent sending the data multiple times.
Command Block
A series of Block Move (BLKMV) commands should be used to move the words to create a
command block in the Register tables (refer to the Series 90™-30/20/Micro Programmable
Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467, for information on using the Block Move function).
For details on command blocks for configuring communications, refer to the Series 90™ PLC
Serial Communications User’s Manual, GFK-0582.
The following tables list the command block values required for setting up a Serial Port for SNP,
RTU, and Custom protocols. (All values are in hexadecimal unless otherwise indicated.) The
BLKMV commands that are used to create the command block are described in the example on
page 5-16 and shown in Figure 5-1.
Note
The Micro PLC ignores the WAIT flag for all COMM_REQs.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-15
5
Table 5-4. COMM_REQ Command Block for SNP Protocol
Example Register
Definition
Values
%R0101
Start address
Data Block Length
10H
%R0102
Start address + 1
WAIT/NOWAIT Flag
reserved (ignored by Micro PLC)
%R0103
Start address + 2
Status Word Pointer Memory Type 0008 = %R, register memory
%R0104
Start address + 3
Status Word Pointer Offset
Zero-based number that gives the address of
the SNP status word (for example, a value of
99 gives an address of 100 for the status
word)
%R0105
Start address + 4
Idle Timeout Value
reserved (ignored by Micro PLC)
%R0106
Start address + 5
Maximum Communication Time
reserved (ignored by Micro PLC)
%R0107
Start address + 6
Command Word (serial port setup) FFF0H (programmed as 0FFF0H)
%R0108
Start address + 7
Protocol: 1=SNP
0001
%R0109
Start address + 8
Port Mode
0000=Slave, 0001=Master (master available
only on 23 and 24 point Micros)
%R0110
Start address + 9
Data Rate
6=19200, 5=9600, 4=4800, 3=2400,
2=1200, 1=600, 0=300
%R0111
Start address + 10
Parity
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
%R0112
Start address + 11
Flow Control
0 = Hardware (SNP Master only), 1 = None
%R0113
Start address + 12
Turnaround Delay
0 = None, 1 = 10ms, 2 = 100ms, 3 = 500ms
%R0114
Start address + 13
Timeout
0 = Long, 1 = Medium, 2 = Short, 3 = None
%R0115
Start address + 14
Bits Per Character
1=8 bits
%R0116
Start address + 15
Stop Bits
0 = 1 Stop bit, 1 = 2 Stop bits
%R0117
Start address + 16
Interface
reserved
%R0118
Start address + 17
Duplex Mode
reserved
%R0119
Start address + 18
Device identifier (0 for SNP)
0000
%R0120
Start address + 19
Device identifier bytes 1 and 2
user-provided*
%R0121
Start address + 20
Device identifier bytes 3 and 4
user-provided*
%R0122
Start address + 21
Device identifier bytes 5 and 6
user-provided*
%R0123
Start address + 22
Device identifier bytes 7 and 8
user-provided*
*
5-16
Address
The device identifier for SNP Slave ports is packed into words with the least significant character in the least
significant byte of the word. For example, if the first two characters are “A” and “B,” the start address + 18
will contain the hex value 4241.
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Table 5-5. COMM_REQ Data Block for RTU Protocol
Example Register
Word
Definition
Values
%R0101—%R0106
First 6 words
Reserved for COMM_REQ use.
See Table 5-4 for details.
%R0107
Start address + 6
Command
FFF0H
%R0108
Start address + 7
Protocol: 0003=RTU
0003
%R0109
Start address + 8
Port Mode: 0000=Slave
0000
%R0110
Start address + 9
Data Rate
6=19200, 5=9600, 4=4800, 3=2400,
2=1200, 1=600, 0=300
%R0111
Start address + 10
Parity
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
%R0112
Start address + 11
Flow Control
0 = Hardware, 1 = None
%R0113
Start address + 12
Turnaround delay
reserved
%R0114
Start address + 13
Timeout
reserved
%R0115
Start address + 14
Bits per Character
1=8 bits
%R0116
Start address + 15
Stop Bits
reserved
%R0117
Start address + 16
Interface
reserved
%R0118
Start address + 17
Duplex Mode
reserved
%R0119
Start address + 18
Device Identifier
Station Address (1-247)
%R0120—22
Start address +
19—21
Device Identifier
reserved
Table 5-6. COMM_REQ Data Block for Custom Protocol
Example Register
Word
Definition
Values
%R0101—%R0106
First 6 words
Reserved for COMM_REQ use.
See Table 5-4 for details.
%R0107
Start address + 6
Command
FFF0H
%R0108
Start address + 7
Protocol: 0005=Custom
0005
%R0109
Start address + 8
Port Mode
1=Master
%R0110
Start address + 9
Data Rate
6=19200, 5=9600, 4=4800, 3=2400,
2=1200, 1=600, 0=300
%R0111
Start address + 10
Parity
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
%R0112
Start address + 11
Flow Control
0 = Hardware, 1 = None, 2 =
Software
%R0113
Start address + 12
Turnaround Delay
0 = None, 1 = 10ms, 2 = 100ms, 3 =
500ms
%R0114
Start address + 13
Timeout
0 = Long, 1 = Medium, 2 = Short, 3
= None
%R0115
Start address + 14
Bits per Character
1=8 bits
%R0116
Start address + 15
Stop Bits
0 = 1 stop bit, 1 = 2 stop bits
%R0117
Start address + 16
Interface
reserved
%R0118
Start address + 17
Duplex Mode
reserved
%R0119—%R0122
Start address +
18—21
Device Identifier
reserved
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-17
5
Example
A sample ladder diagram for changing the default settings for Port 2 of the 28-point Micro PLC is
provided in Figure 5-1.
Rung 4 uses a one-shot coil (%T0002) to execute the COMM_REQ once. This prevents multiple
messages from being sent.
Rung 5 contains the Block Move Word function and is used to load the commands, which are
listed in Tables 5-4 through 5-6. In this example, %R0101 through %R0115 are used for the
COMM_REQ command block. (Any registers can be used except for %R1617 through %R1814,
which are reserved on the 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs.) The example command block contains
the following settings:
*
%R0107
Start address + 6
Command
FFF0
%R0108
Start address + 7
Protocol
SNP (0001)
%R0109
Start address + 8
Port Mode
Slave (0000)
%R0110
Start address + 9
Data Rate
19200 (0006)
%R0111
Start address + 10
Parity
Odd (0001)
%R0112
Start address + 11
Flow Control
None (0001
%R0113
Start address + 12
Turnaround Delay
None (0000)
%R0114
Start address + 13
Timeout
Long (0000)
%R0115
Start address + 14
Bits per Character
1
%R0116
Start address + 15
Stop Bits 1
(0000)
%R0117
Start address + 16
Interface
reserved (0000)
%R0118
Start address + 17
Duplex mode
reserved (0000)
%R0119
Start address + 18
Device identifier (0 for SNP)
0000
%R0120
Start address + 19
Device identifier bytes 1 and 2
B, A (4241)
%R0121
Start address + 20
Device identifier bytes 3 and 4
0000
%R0122
Start address + 21
Device identifier bytes 5 and 6
0000
%R0123
Start address + 22
Device identifier bytes 7 and 8
0000
The device identifier for SNP Slave ports is packed into words with the least significant character in the least
significant byte of the word. For example, if the first two characters are “A” and “B,” the start address + 18
would contain the hex value 4241.
The COMM_REQ function, executed in Rung 6, has four inputs. %T0002 is used to enable the
COMM_REQ function. The IN input points to the starting address of the command block, which
is %R0101. The SYS_ID will always be 1. The last input, TASK, points to Port 2 (hexadecimal
0002 or integer 2).
Note
The TASK input on the COMM_REQ function determines which serial port is
addressed:
2 (0002H)
5-18
Port 2 (All 28-point Micro PLC releases including
release 3.0)
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
| << RUNG 4 >>
|%T0001
%T0002
+——] [—————————————————————————————————————————————————————(↑)——|
|
|
| << RUNG 5 >>
|
|%T0002 +—————+
+—————+
+—————+
+—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+————————————————+BLKMV+———————————————————+BLKMV+———————————————————+BLKMV+
|
| WORD|
| WORD|
| WORD|
| WORD|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0101 CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0108
CONST —+IN Q+—%R0115
CONST —+IN Q+—%R0122
|
0010 |
|
0001 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST +IN2 |
CONST +IN2 |
CONST +IN2 |
CONST +IN2 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN3 |
CONST —+IN3 |
CONST —+IN3 |
CONST —+IN3 |
|
0008 |
|
0006 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN4 |
CONST —+IN4 |
CONST —+IN4 |
CONST —+IN4 |
|
0077 |
|
0001 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN5 |
CONST —+IN5 |
CONST —+IN5 |
CONST —+IN5 |
|
0000 |
|
0001 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN6 |
CONST —+IN6 |
CONST —+IN6 |
CONST —+IN6 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN7 |
CONST —+IN7 |
CONST —+IN7 |
CONST —+IN7 |
|
FFF0 +—————+
0001 +—————+
4241 +—————+
0000 +—————+
|
|
| << RUNG 6 >>
|
|%T0002
+—————+
%M0001
+——] [————————————+COMM_|+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )——|
|
| REQ ||
|
|
||
|
%R0101 –+IN FT++
|
|
|
|
CONST –+SYSID|
|
0001 |
|
|
|
|
|
CONST –+TASK +
|
00000002 +—————+
|
Figure 5-1. Ladder Logic Example for Serial Port Configuration
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-19
5
Programmer Attach Feature (14-Point Micro PLCs)
This feature of the RTU Slave protocol allows you to connect a PLC programmer to the port while
RTU Slave is active. When the Micro PLC detects a programmer attachment (requires
appropriately configured PLC ID for multidrop connections), the RTU Slave protocol is removed
from the port and SNP Slave is installed as the currently active protocol on the port. The
programmer connection must have the same serial configuration (i.e., baud rate, parity, stop bits,
etc.) as the currently active RTU Slave protocol for it to be recognized. This also means that
autobaud will not be supported for initiating a programmer connection. Once the programmer
connection has been enabled, normal programmer communications can take place through the
port.
Upon a loss of the programmer connection, the most recently established port protocol will be
installed as the active protocol on the port. This could be either the RTU Slave protocol (the
protocol running before the programmer was attached), a new protocol received through a
configuration store, or a new protocol from a Serial Port Setup COMM_REQ. Installing the most
recently established port protocol puts that protocol back to its initial state. In the normal case,
upon loss of the programmer connection, the RTU Slave protocol will be reinstalled on the port.
It is important to note that there will be a delay of approximately 20 seconds from the time you
remove the programmer from the serial line, and the time that it is detected as missing. Therefore,
in the normal case mentioned above, there will be an interval after disconnecting the programmer
during which no RTU messages can be processed on that port. This delay is implemented to
prevent brief periods of signal instability from being mistaken as loss of programmer.
If a new configuration has been stored while the port is attached to the programmer, the newly
configured port protocol will become the most recently established protocol and will be installed
on the port upon a loss of programmer communications.
Example: If RTU Slave is running on Port 1 at 9600 baud and a PLC programmer (running at
9600 baud) is attached to the port, SNP Slave will be installed on the port, and the programmer
will communicate as normal. If during that communications session a configuration store is done
which sets up the port for SNP Slave at 4800 baud, this setup will not take effect until the port
loses communications with the programmer. Upon loss of programmer communications, the SNP
Slave protocol at 4800 baud will be installed.
Any COMM_REQs sent to the port by the application program while the PLC is attached to the
programmer will be processed by the SNP Slave protocol. A COMM_REQ that is supported by the
RTU Slave protocol, but is not supported by SNP Slave, will be rejected. For the case of a Serial
Port Change COMM_REQ, which is supported by both protocols, the new active port protocol
supplied by this COMM_REQ will not take effect immediately, but will become the most recently
established port protocol. This means that the new port configuration supplied by the Serial Port
Change COMM_REQ will not take effect until the programmer is disconnected.
5-20
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Configuring ASCII Output
This feature allows the Micro PLC to automatically dial a pager via modem and send a specified
byte string from Serial Port 2. Pager dialing and message transmission are set up by COMM_REQ
functions in the ladder logic.
Note
To implement this feature, Serial Port 2 must be configured as a CUSTOM port
(see page 5-13).
Pager enunciation is implemented by three commands, requiring three COMM_REQ command
blocks:
Autodial: 04400 (1130H)
Dials the modem. This command works the same way that the
SNP Master Autodial command 7400 does.
Put string: 04401 (1131H)
send from the serial port.
Specifies an ASCII string, from 1 to 250 bytes in length, to
Autodial: 04400 (1130H)
It is the responsibility of the PLC application program to hang
up the phone connection. This is accomplished by reissuing the autodial command and
sending the hangup command string.
Autodial Command Block
The Autodial command automatically transmits an Escape sequence that follows the Hayes
convention. If you are using a modem that does not support the Hayes convention, you may be
able to use the Put String command to dial the modem.
Examples of commonly used command strings for Hayes-compatible modems are listed below:
Command String
Length
Function
ATDP15035559999<CR>
16 (10H)
Pulse dial the number 1-503-555-9999
ATDT15035559999<CR>
16 (10H)
Tone dial the number 1-503-555-9999
ATDT9,15035559999<CR>
18 (10H)
Tone dial using outside line with pause
ATHO<CR>
5 (05H)
Hang up the phone
ATZ <CR>
4 (04H)
Restore modem configuration to internally saved values
Table 5-7 lists a sample COMM_REQ command block that dials the number 234-5678 using a
Hayes-compatible modem. The ladder logic that creates this command block is shown in Figure
5-2. For a more detailed example of the use of COMM_REQ functions and command blocks, refer
to Figure 5-1.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-21
5
Table 5-7. Sample Command Block for CUSTOM Protocol Autodial Command
Word
Definition
Values
1
0009H
CUSTOM data block length (includes command
string)
2
0000H
NOWAIT mode
3
0008H
Status word memory type (%R)
4
0000H
Status word address minus 1 (Register 1)
5
0000H
reserved
6
0000H
reserved
7
04400 command (1130H) Autodial command number
8
00030 (0001H)
Modem response timeout (30 seconds)
9
0012 (000CH)
Number of bytes in command string
10
5441H
A (41H), T (54H)
11
5444H
D (44H), T (54H)
12
3332H
Phone number:
13
3534H
4 (34H), 5 (35H)
14
3736H
6 (36H), 7 (37H)
15
0D38H
8 (38H) <CR> (0DH)
2 (32H), 3 (33H)
|%T0004 +—————+
+—————+
+—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+————————————————+BLKMV+———————————————————+BLKMV+
|
| WORD|
| WORD|
| WORD|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0201 CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0108
CONST —+IN Q+
|
0009 |
|
0001 |
|
0D38 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST +IN2 |
CONST +IN2 |
CONST +IN2 |
|
0000 |
|
0012 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN3 |
CONST —+IN3 |
CONST —+IN3 |
|
0008 |
|
5441 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN4 |
CONST —+IN4 |
CONST —+IN4 |
|
0000 |
|
5444 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN5 |
CONST —+IN5 |
CONST —+IN5 |
|
0000 |
|
3332 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN6 |
CONST —+IN6 |
CONST —+IN6 |
|
0000 |
|
3534 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN7 |
CONST —+IN7 |
CONST —+IN7 |
|
1130 +—————+
3736 +—————+
0000 +—————+
Figure 5-2. Sample Autodial Command Block (Tone dials the number 234-5678.)
Note
After the Put String command block has been sent, an Autodial command block
must be sent to hang up the phone connection. In the example above, you would
replace the string DT in word 11 with the string HO (48H, 4FH).
5-22
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Put String Command Block
Table 5-8 lists a sample COMM_REQ command block that sends the data string, “hello world”
using the Put String command (04401). The ladder logic rung that creates this command block is
shown in Figure 5-3. A maximum transmit timeout of 30 seconds is specified. The string data
begins at Word 10. This command is similar to the Autodial command except that Put String does
not send the escape sequence for Hayes-compatible modems.
The Maximum Transmit Timeout field specifies, in seconds, the maximum time interval the
COMM_REQ will wait for the entire string to be sent. If this time is set to 0, a default value of 4
seconds plus the time required to transmit the number of characters is used. If the string is not
transmitted during the specified interval or the default interval, an error code is generated.
The Number of Bytes in Command String field specifies the length of the command string to be
sent. This length includes all characters. A status code indicating successful transmission will be
returned when the string has been completely sent out the serial port.
Table 5-8. Sample Command Block for Put String Command
Word
GFK-1065F
Definition
Values
1
0009H
CUSTOM data block length (includes command
string)
2
0000H
NOWAIT mode
3
0008H
Status word memory type (%R)
4
0000H
Status word address minus 1 (Register 1)
5
0000H
reserved
6
0000H
reserved
7
04401 command (1131H) Put String command number
8
001EH
Maximum transmit timeout (30 seconds)
9
000BH
Number of bytes in command string
10
6568H
h (68H), e (65H)
11
6C6CH
l (6CH), l (6CH)
12
206FH
o (6F), “ “ (20H)
13
6F77H
w (77H), o (6FH)
14
6C72H
r (72H), l (6CH)
15
0064H
d (64H)
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-23
5
|%T0004 +—————+
+—————+
+—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+————————————————+BLKMV+———————————————————+BLKMV+
|
| WORD|
| WORD|
| WORD|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0201 CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0108
CONST —+IN Q+
|
0009 |
|
001E |
|
0064 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST +IN2 |
CONST +IN2 |
CONST +IN2 |
|
0000 |
|
000B |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN3 |
CONST —+IN3 |
CONST —+IN3 |
|
0008 |
|
6568 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN4 |
CONST —+IN4 |
CONST —+IN4 |
|
0000 |
|
6C6C |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN5 |
CONST —+IN5 |
CONST —+IN5 |
|
0000 |
|
206F |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN6 |
CONST —+IN6 |
CONST —+IN6 |
|
0000 |
|
6F77 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN7 |
CONST —+IN7 |
CONST —+IN7 |
|
1131 +—————+
6C72 +—————+
0000 +—————+
Figure 5-3. Sample Put String Command Block (Sends the string, “hello world.”)
5-24
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Status Word for Custom Protocol COMM_REQs
A value of 1 will be returned in the COMM_REQ status word upon successful completion of a
CUSTOM protocol command. Any other value returned in the COMM_REQ status word is an
error code where the low byte is a major error code and the high byte is a minor error code.
Table 5-9. Status Codes for Custom Protocol
Major Status Code
1 (01H)
Description
Successful Completion (this is the expected completion value in the COMM_REQ status word).
12 (0CH)
Local CSTM_PROT error — Port configuration command 65520 (FFF0H). An error occurred while
processing a local command. The minor error code identifies the specific error.
13 (0DH)
Remote CSTM_PROT error — Put String command 4401 (1131H). An error occurred while processing a
remote command. The minor error code identifies the specific error.
2 (02H)
14 (0EH)
GFK-1065F
COMM_REQ command is not supported.
2 (02H)
String length exceeds end of reference memory type.
3 (03H)
COMM_REQ data block length is too small. String data is missing or incomplete.
48 (30H)
Serial output timeout. The serial port was unable to transmit the string. (Could be due to
missing CTS signal when the serial port is configured to use hardware flow control.)
50 (32h)
COMM_REQ timeout. The COMM_REQ did not complete within a 20-second time limit.
Autodial Error — Autodial command 4400 (1130). An error occurred while attempting to send a command
string to an attached external modem. The minor error code identifies the specific error.
1 (01H)
Not used.
2 (02H)
The modem command string length exceeds end of reference memory type.
3 (03H)
COMM_REQ Data Block Length is too small. Output command string data is missing or
incomplete.
4 (04H)
Serial output timeout. The serial port was unable to transmit the modem autodial output.
(May be due to missing CTS signal when the serial port is configured to use hardware flow
control.)
5 (05H)
Response was not received from modem. Check modem and cable.
6 (06H)
Modem responded with BUSY. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. The
remote modem is already in use; retry the connection request at a later time.
7 (07H)
Modem responded with NO CARRIER. Modem is unable to complete the requested
connection. Check the local and remote modems and the telephone line.
8 (08H)
Modem responded with NO DIALTONE. Modem is unable to complete the requested
connection. Check the modem connections and the telephone line.
9 (09H)
Modem responded with ERROR. Modem is unable to complete the requested command.
Check the modem command string and modem.
10 (0AH)
Modem responded with RING, indicating that the modem is being called by another modem.
Modem is unable to complete the requested command. Retry the modem command at a later
time.
11 (0BH)
An unknown response was received from the modem. Modem is unable to complete the
requested command. Check the modem command string and modem. The modem response is
expected to be either CONNECT or OK.
50 (32H)
COMM_REQ timeout. The COMM_REQ did not complete within a 20-second time limit.
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-25
5
Configuring Expansion Units (23 and 28-Point Micro PLCs)
Each 23 and 28-point Micro PLC can support up to four expansion units. (See Chapter 3 for
installation instructions.) The expansion unit configuration screens follow immediately after the
high speed counter screens (or the Serial Port 2 screen). Table 5-10 lists the parameters for each
type of expansion module available. The default selection is EMPTY UNIT, as shown in the
screen below. To configure an expansion module, press TAB to select EMPTY UNIT, press the ↓
key to choose the model, and press ENTER.
There are three types of expansion units
•
Series 90 14-point standard expansion units which have 8 discrete inputs and 6 discrete
outputs
•
Generic expansion units which can have a mixture of %I, %Q, %AI, and/or %AQ references
(14PTGENERIC and GENERICEXP)
•
I/O Link Interface expansion unit which has 32 bytes of input data and 32 bytes of output data
that can be mapped to any valid reference memory except %S (IC693UEX013)
Table 5-10. Configuration Parameters for Expansion Units
Parameter
Description
Possible Values
Expansion Module
Default Value
EMPTY UNIT
IC693UEX1/2
14PTGENERIC
IC693UEX013
GENERICEXP
EMPTY UNIT
IC693UEX1/2 and 14PTGENERIC
%I Ref Adr
Discrete input reference
not editable
%I0017
%I0017
%I Size (Bits)
Discrete input size
not editable
8
8
%Q Ref Adr
Discrete output reference
not editable
%Q0017
%Q0017
%Q Size (Bits)
Discrete output size
6
6
%I0049–0257
%I0049
256
256
%Q0049–0257
%Q0049
6
6
not editable
IC693UEX013
5-26
%I Ref Adr
Discrete input reference
%I Size (Bits)
Discrete input size
%Q Ref Adr
Discrete output reference
%Q Size (Bits)
Discrete output size
not editable
not editable
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Table 5-10. Configuration Parameters for Expansion Units - Continued
Parameter
Description
Possible Values
Default Value
GENERICEXP
Address Offset
(hex)
0300–0F00
0300
%I Ref Adr
Discrete input reference
%I0305
%I0305
%I Ref Size
(Bits)
Discrete input size
0–208
0
%Q Ref Adr
Discrete output reference
%Q305
%Q305
%Q Ref Size
(Bits)
Discrete output size
0–208
0
%AI Ref Adr
Analog input reference
%AI0020
%AI0020
%AI Ref Size
(Words)
Analog input size
0–208
0
%AQ Ref Adr
Analog input reference
%AQ013
%AQ013
%AQ Ref Size
(Words)
Analog input size
0
0
Logicmaster Screens for Configuring Expansion Units
The expansion unit configuration screens follow immediately after the high speed counter screens
(or the Serial Port 2 screen). The default expansion unit selection is EMPTY UNIT. The
configuration parameters that you see will depend on the type of expansion module selected.
To configure an expansion unit, use the → key to move the cursor to EMPTY UNIT and press the
TAB key to change the type of expansion module. The parameters displayed depend on the
expansion module selected.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-27
5
Series 90 Micro 14-Point Expansion Unit
The expansion unit, IC693UEX011 (AC input power), can be connected to a Micro PLC base unit
to provide additional I/O points (8 DC inputs and 6 relay outputs). The Micro expansion units
have no configurable parameters.
14-Point Generic Expansion Unit
This screen allows you to configure a third-party 14-point expansion unit.
5-28
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Generic Expansion Unit
The Logicmaster 90 configuration software provides the Generic Expansion Input/Output Module
configuration so that third parties can develop a wide range of input/output modules with varying
amounts of discrete or analog I/O.
Generic input/output modules can be placed on any 256-byte boundaries except for the four 256byte areas reserved for the 14-point expansion units. The configuration software maps the I/O to
open locations in the read/write tables within the PLC on byte boundaries. Each table can be
independently mapped.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-29
5
I/O Link Interface Expansion Unit
Note
The I/O Link IEU (IC693UEX013) is not sold in the United States. This page is
for informational purposes only. For details on installation and operation, refer
to the documentation provided with the I/O Link IEU.
The I/O Link IEU is a slave device on an I/O link. This device connects to a Micro PLC base unit
or to an expansion unit and allows the Micro PLC to reside on an I/O Link network. The I/O Link
IEU receives 32, 64, 128, or 256 inputs from the I/O link and transmits 32, 64, 128, or 256 to the
I/O link. Because the I/O Link IEU has only one expansion connector, it must be the last unit in a
chain of expansion units if other units are connected to the same base Micro PLC. This also
means that there can be only one I/O Link IEU per Micro PLC.
Any available %Q discrete reference memory address can be used for the output data and any
available %I discrete reference memory address can be used for the input data as long as it does
not overlap the input reference address of other input devices. The I/O Link IEU’s reference
addresses will default to %I0049 and %Q0049 when the Micro PLC’s configuration is defaulted.
If the Micro PLC logs a Loss of Expansion Unit fault while scanning the input data from the I/O
Link IEU, the input reference memory data will be set to all zeros.
5-30
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
HHP Screens for Configuring Expansion Units
As an example, suppose a setup contains a generic expansion unit, a standard expansion unit, and
an I/O Link Interface expansion unit.
When the CPU’s Default I/O parameter is enabled, expansion units are automatically configured.
For the purposes of this example, Default I/O is disabled. Note that when manually configuring
expansion units with the HHP, the expansion unit must be physically present and you must press
READ + ENT on the HHP to initiate the configuration process.
Configuring Generic Expansion Units
In the following example, the generic expansion unit has 2 bytes of discrete input data, 1 byte of
discrete output data, 15 words of analog input data, and 2 words of analog output data. The
address offset for the generic unit is 0A00h.
1.
Press ↓ until configuration for R0:S7 appears and press READ + ENT:
R0:07 GENERIC >S
ADDR: 0A00
2.
Press → to go to %I reference screen:
R0:07 GENERIC <S
I0016:
3.
Press 4 + 9 + ENT to configure discrete input data at %I49–64:
R0:07 GENERIC <S
I0016:I0049-0064
4.
Press → to go to %AI reference screen:
R0:07 GENERIC <S
AI015:
5.
Press 2 + 0 + ENT to configure analog input data at %AI20–34:
R0:07 GENERIC <S
AI015:AI020-034
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-31
5
6.
Press → to go to %Q reference screen:
R0:07 GENERIC <S
Q0008:
7.
Press 4 + 9 + ENT to configure discrete output data at %Q49–56:
R0:07 GENERIC <S
Q0008:Q0049-0056
8.
Press → to go to %AQ reference screen:
R0:07 GENERIC <S
AQ002:
9.
Press 1 + 3 + ENT to configure analog input data at %AQ13–14:
R0:07 GENERIC <S
AQ002:AQ013-014
Configuring Standard Expansion Units
1.
Press ↓ to go to the next slot:
R0:08
2.
Press READ + ENT to configure the standard expansion unit:
R0:08 MIXED
I8/Q6:QI0017
5-32
<S
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
<S
GFK-1065F
5
Configuring I/O Link Interface Expansion Units
1.
Press ↓ to go to the next slot:
R0:09
2.
<S
Press READ + ENT to configure the I/O Link Interface expansion unit:
R0:09 I/O Link<S
32in/32out bytes
3.
Press → to configure input data reference:
R0:09 32in
4.
Press R + ENT to select %R memory type:
R0:09 32in
R16:
5.
<S
<S
Press 1 + ENT to select %R1–16 for input reference:
R0:09 32in
<S
R16:R0001-0016
6.
Press → to configure output data reference:
R0:09 32out
7.
Press Q + ENT to select %Q memory type:
R0:09 32out
Q256:
8.
<S
<S
Press 5 + 7 + ENT to select %Q57–312 for output reference:
R0:09 32out
<S
Q256:Q0057-0312
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-33
5
Reference Error Checking
When configuring the references for generic and I/O Link Interface expansion units, the HHP will
verify that the specified reference + length doesn’t go beyond the end of the corresponding
reference table. It will also verify that input data references do not overlap those of other input
devices that have been configured in the system.
When Past End of Ref Memory error is detected, the HHP will display an error message as
follows:
R0:09 ref err <S
Q256:Q0289-0544
When an Overlapping Input reference error is detected, the HHP will display an error message as
follows:
R0:09 ref err <S
I256:I0017-0272
5-34
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Configuring Q1 for PWM or Pulse Output (IC693UDR005/010 and
IC693UAL006)
The high-speed DC output (Q1) can be configured for PWM, pulse train, or HSC output. Counter
channel 1 can be configured for only one of these outputs at a time. Because AQUADB counting
uses channels 1–3, the PWM and pulse train outputs are not available when a type B counter is
configured. (In the sample screen below, PWM is enabled.)
Note
The configurations for HSC, PWM, and Pulse outputs are sent to the CPU when
the Micro PLC changes from STOP to RUN mode. When the transition to RUN
mode occurs, the currently configured output stops running and the new
configuration takes over.
Note
A pulldown resistor, connected between Q1 and COM1, is required for high
frequency Pulse and PWM (up to 2Khz) outputs and for duty cycles in the lower
ranges (5% and lower). A 1.5 Kohm, 0.5 watt resistor is recommended for this
purpose.
Table 5-11. Memory Locations for PWM and Pulse Train Parameters
Output
PWM
Pulse Train
GFK-1065F
Parameter
Memory Location
PWM Frequency, Q1
AQ2
PWM Duty Cycle, Q2
AQ3
Pulse Train Frequency
AQ123
Number of pulses to send
AQ124
Start pulse train
Q494
Pulse train complete on Q1
I494
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-35
5
PWM Output
PWM output can be used to control DC and stepper motors. You can select the frequency of the
PWM output (19hz to 2Khz) by writing a value to memory location AQ2. The PWM duty cycle
(0 to 100%) is selected by writing a value to memory location AQ3. Sample calculations of PWM
duty cycle and frequency are provided in Table 5-12.
Warning
When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode, PWM will continue to
operate. Also PWM will continue to operate over a power cycle. Therefore,
if PWM is running when power is lost, it will run when power is restored.
Table 5-12. Sample Values for PWM Duty Cycle and Frequency
Contents of Frequency Register
(AQ2)1
Two’s
Complement
Contents of Duty Cycle Register
(AQ3)1
Decimal
Hex
Two’s
Complement
Typical On Duty
Frequency2
Cycle (%)3
24VDC, 200mA
Decimal
Hex
0
0
–
0
0
–
0 (default)
614
266
–
491
1EB
–
2 Khz
98
819
333
–
614
266
–
1.5 Khz
85
1,229
4CD
–
860
35C
–
1 Khz
77
2459
99B
–
1475
5C3
–
500 Hz
63
4919
1337
–
2460
99C
–
250 Hz
52
12299
300B
–
4920
1338
–
100 Hz
41
35142
8946
–30394
1230
4CE
–30394
35 Hz
4
40999
A027
–24537
7380
1CD4
–24637
30 Hz
18
64736
FCDF
–801
6553
1999
–1037
19 Hz
10
100 (default)
Formulas:
1.
2.
Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers. They can be entered as hex or as two’s complement values.
9.84 MHz
−1
Frequency calculation: % AQ 2 =
Frequency tolerance is ±0.01%
8∗ frequency
 on _ duty _ cycle
  9.84 MHz 
3. On Duty Cycle calculation: % AQ3 = 
− delta _ delay  
 −1

8
 100∗ frequency

Where on duty cycle is a value from 0 to 100% and delta delay is the difference between the off and on response times of the output
device. (See Table 5-13 for typical delta delay values.)
9.84 MHz 

4. On Time calculation: AQ3= (ontime − delta _ delay )
−1
8


5
5-36
Off Time calculation: Off Time =
1
− ontime
frequency
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Table 5-13. Typical Values for Delta Delay
Units
Revision/Date Code for IC693UDR005
Typical Delta Delay
at 24VDC, 16mA output (1.5 Kohm load)
IC693UDR005
Revision B with date code less than 606
0.22ms
IC693UDR005
Revision C or later, or Revision B with date code equal
to or greater than 606
0.09ms
IC693UDR010/IC593UAL006
0.09ms
Note
In Logicmaster 90, when entering hexadecimal numbers in a reference table, a
leading A through F must be preceded by a zero (for example, 0FFFF). To enter
a two’s complement number, enter it as a negative integer (int). For additional
information on editing values in reference tables, see “Reference Tables” in the
Logicmaster™ 90 Series 90™-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s
Manual, GFK-0466.
Sample calculation for PWM Output: The formulas provided with Table 5-12 can be used to
determine the value of %AQ3 required at the fastest frequency to produce a minimum ON and
OFF pulse width when the application is primarily concerned with varying the frequency. For
example, an application might require a PWM output of 0 to 2Khz with an input device that
requires a minimum pulse width of 50µs. With a fixed ON time, the worst-case OFF time occurs
at 2Khz. Therefore, the value of AQ3 that will guarantee at least a 50µs OFF pulse width is given
by:
OFF time=Period – ON time
50µs OFF=500µs – ON time
ON time = 450µs
% AQ =
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
(450µs − 0.09ms) × 9.84 MHz − 1 = 443
8
5-37
5
Pulse Train Output
You can select the frequency (10Hz to 2Khz) of the pulse train output (PTO) by writing a value (32768 to 32767) to memory location AQ123. The number of pulses to be output is selected by
writing a value to memory location AQ124.
The pulse train is started when the Q494 bit is set to 1 by the ladder logic program. Starting the
pulse train clears I494. When the number of pulses specified in AQ124 has been generated, the
I494 bit will be set to 1 and Q494 will be cleared. For sample pulse train frequency calculations,
refer to the table below.
Warning
When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode, PTO will continue to
operate. Also, PTO will continue to operate over a power cycle. Therefore,
if PTO is running when power is lost, it will run when power is restored.
Table 5-14. Example Values for Pulse Output Frequency
Contents of Frequency Register (AQ123)1
Decimal
Hex
Frequency (Hz)2
0
0
0 (default)
307
133
1,997
409
199
1,500
614
266
1,000
1,229
4CD
500
2459
99B
250
6,149
1805
100
20,499
5013
30
30, 749
781D
20
Formulas:
1. Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers. Enter them as hex, or as
two’s complement.
2.
5-38
% AQ123 =
9.84 MHz
−1
frequency∗16
Frequency tolerance is ±0.01%
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Configuring of Outputs Q1 to Q5 (IC693UDD104)
Certain transistor outputs of model IC693UDD104 can be configured to be PWM-, Pulse Train, or
HSC-outputs.
For simultaneous use of these functionalities there are some restrictions for possible combinations
:
Table 5-15. Combinations with A4 Configuration (4 CountersType A)
Counter 1 at Q1
or
PWM Output Q1
or
Pulse Train Output Q1
Counter 2 at Q2
or
PWM Output Q2
or
Pulse Train Output Q3
Counter 3 at Q3
or
PWM Output Q3
or
Pulse Train Output Q5
Counter 4 at Q4
or
PWM Output Q4
Example for a permissible combination:
Counter 1 at Q1 + PWM Output Q2 + Pulse Train Output Q5 + PWM Output Q4
Example for a not permissible combination:
Counter 2 at Q2 + Pulse Train Output Q3
Table 5-16. Combinations with B1-3,A4 Configuration (1 Counter Type B + 1 Counter Type A)
PWM Output Q1
1 x Type B
Counter at Q1
or
or
Pulse Train Output Q1
AND
PWM Output Q2
Counter 4 at Q4
or
or
Pulse Train Output Q3
PWM Output Q4
Example for a permissible combination:
Type B Counter at Q1 + PWM Output Q4
Example for a not permissible combination:
Type B Counter at Q1+ Pulse Train Output Q3
Note
A bias resistor, connected between the output and COM1, is required for high
frequency Pulse and PWM (up to 2 Khz) outputs and for duty cycles in the lower
ranges (5% and lower). A 1.5 Kohm, 0.5 watt resistor is recommended for this
purpose.
Note
The configurations for HSC, PWM, and Pulse outputs are sent to the CPU when
the Micro PLC changes from STOP to RUN mode. When the transition to RUN
mode occurs, the currently configured output stops running and the new
configuration takes over.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-39
5
Table 5-17. Memory Locations for PWM and Pulse Train Parameters
Output
PWM Q1
PWM Q2
PWM Q3
PWM Q4
Pulse Train Q1
Pulse Train Q3
Pulse Train Q5
Parameter
Memory Location
PWM Frequency
AQ2
PWM Duty Cycle
AQ3
PWM Frequency
AQ4
PWM Duty Cycle
AQ5
PWM Frequency
AQ6
PWM Duty Cycle
AQ7
PWM Frequency
AQ8
PWM Duty Cycle
AQ9
Pulse Train Frequency
AQ123
Number of pulses to send
AQ124
Start pulse train
Q494
Pulse train complete
I494
Pulse Train Frequency
AQ125
Number of pulses to send
AQ126
Start pulse train
Q495
Pulse train complete
I495
Pulse Train Frequency
AQ127
Number of pulses to send
AQ128
Start pulse train
Q496
Pulse train complete
I496
PWM Output (IC693UDD104)
PWM output can be used to control DC and stepper motors. You can select the frequency of the
PWM output (19 hz to 2 Khz) by writing a value to e.g. memory location AQ2.
The PWM duty cycle (0 to 100 %) is selected by writing a value to e.g. memory location AQ3.
Sample calculations of PWM duty cycle and frequency are provided in Table 4-6.
Warning
When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode, PWM will continue to
operate. Also PWM will continue to operate over a power cycle. Therefore, if
PWM is running when power is lost, it will run when power is restored.
5-40
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Table 5-18. Sample Values for PWM Duty Cycle and Frequency
Contents of Frequency Register
e.g. AQ2
Contents of Duty Cycle
Register e.g. AQ3
Typical On Duty Cycle (%)
at 24 VDC, 16 mA, 1.5Kohm
load
Decimal
Hex
Decimal
Frequency
0
0
0
100 % (default)
0 (default)
614
266
491
98%
2 kHz
819
333
614
85%
1,5 kHz
1229
4CD
860
77%
1 kHz
2459
99B
1475
63%
500 Hz
4919
1337
2460
52%
250 Hz
12299
300B
4920
41%
100 Hz
35142
8946
7250
21%
35 Hz
40999
A027
7380
18%
30 Hz
64736
FCDF
6553
10%
19 Hz
Formulas :
9.
Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers. They can be entered as hex
or as two´s complement values.
10. Frequency calculation :
AQ2 =(9,84 MHz / (8 x frequency)) - 1
Frequency tolerance is +-0,01%
11. On Duty Cycle calculation :
AQ3 = ((On_duty_cycle / (100 x frequency)) - delta_delay)(9,84MHz/8) -1
On Duty Cycle = 0 to 100 %
Delta Delay = Difference between the off and on response times of the output device (see Table
4-7 for typical delta delay values)
4. On Time calculation :
AQ3 = ((ontime - delta_delay) * (9,84 MHz / 8)) - 1
5. Off Time calculation :
Off Time= (1 / frequency) - ontime
Table 5-19. Typical Values for Delta Delay
GFK-1065F
Model
Typical Delta Delay
at 24 VDC, 16mA output (1,5Kohm load)
IC693UDD104 Version B
0,09 ms
Chapter 5 Configuration
5-41
5
Note
In Logicmaster 90, when entering hexadecimal numbers in a reference table, a
leading A through F must be preceeded by a zero (for example, 0FFFF).
To enter a two´s complement number, enter it as a negative integer (int). For
additional information on editing values in reference tables, see “Reference
Tables” in the Logicmaster™ 90 Series 90™ -30/20/Micro Programming
Software User´s Manual (GFK-0466).
Sample Calculation for PWM Output
The formulas provided with Table 4-6 can be used to determine the value of AQ3 required at the
fastest frequency to produce a minimum ON and OFF pulse width when the application is primarily
concerned with varying the frequency. For example, an application might require a PWM output of
0 to 2 Khz with an input device that requires a minimum pulse width of 50 µs. With a fixed ON
time, the worst-case OFF time occurs at 2 Khz. Therefore, the value of AQ3 that will guarantee at
least a 50 µs OFF pulse width is given by
OFF time = Period - ON time
50 µs OFF = 500 µs - ON time
ON time = 450 µs
AQ3 = ((450µs-90µs)*(9,84Mhz / 8))-1 = 443
5-42
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
5
Pulse Output (IC693UDD104)
You can select the frequency (10Hz to 2Khz) of the pulse train by writing a value (-32768 to
32767) to memory location e.g. AQ123. The number of pulses to be output is selected by writing a
value to memory location e.g. AQ124.
The pulse train is started when the e.g. Q494 bit is set to 1 by the ladder logic program. Starting the
pulse train clears, for example, I494. When the number of pulses specified in AQ124 has been
generated, the I494 bit will be set to 1 and Q494 will be cleared.
For sample pulse train frequency calculations, refer to the table shown below.
Warning
When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode, Pulse Train Output will continue to operate. Also
Pulse Train Output will continue to operate over a power cycle. Therefore, if Pulse Train Output is
running when power is lost, it will run when power is restored.
Table 5-20. Example Values for Pulse Output Frequency
Contents of Frequency Register (e.g., AQ123)
Decimal
Hex
Frequency (Hz)
0
0
0 (default)
307
133
1997
409
199
1500
614
266
1000
1229
4CD
500
2459
99B
250
6149
1805
100
20499
5013
30
30749
781D
20
Formulas:
GFK-1065F
1.
Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers. Enter them as hex, or as
two´s complement.
2.
AQ123 = (9,84 MHz / (frequency * 16)) - 1
Chapter 5 Configuration
Frequency tolerance is +- 0,01 %
5-43
Chapter
High Speed Counters
6
The Series 90 Micro PLC has four built-in high speed counters (HSCs). Each counter provides
direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 5KHz for industrial control applications such as
meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity measurement, material handling, motion control, and
process control. This chapter describes the features, operation, and configuration of the HSCs. For
electrical and circuit specifications for the HSCs, refer to Chapter 4.
The HSCs are configured using the Series 90-30/20 Hand-Held Programmer or the configuration
function provided by the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. Many features can also be
configured from the application program. The HSC function can operate in one of two modes:
A4 – four identical, independent simple (type A) counters.
B1–3, A4 – one type B counter (for A-Quad-B counting) and one type A counter.
In either mode, each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for
up or down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive). The HSCs run independently of the PLC logic. If the PLC is in STOP mode, outputs
that are configured for HSC operation can be configured to operate in one of three failure modes
described on page 6-7. Type A counter operation is described on page 6-8, and type B counter
operation is described on page 6-14.
Warning
When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode, the HSCs will
continue to operate. Also, the HSCs will remain in run mode through a
power cycle. Therefore, if an HSC is running when power is lost, it will run
when power is restored.
GFK-1065F
6-1
6
Table 6-1. High Speed Counter Terminal Assignments
Point
Input
Output
B1–3, A4 Configuration
I1
I2
Count 1
Preload/Strobe 1
B counter (Phase 1)
Not used
I3
I4
Count 2
Preload/Strobe 2
B counter (Phase 2)
Not used
I5
Count 3
Not used
I6
I7
Preload/Strobe 3
Count 4
Preload/Strobe for B counter
Count 4 (A counter)
I8
I9-I13 (23-point)
I9-I16 (28-point)
Preload/Strobe 4
Not used
Not used
Preload/Strobe 4
Not used
Not used
Q1
COUNTER 1
TYPE B COUNTERS 1–3
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5–Q6
Q7-Q9 (23-point units)
COUNTER 2
COUNTER 3
COUNTER 4
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
TYPE A COUNTER 4
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Q7–Q12 (28-point units)
6-2
A4 Configuration
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
High Speed Counter/CPU Interface
During each I/O scan, the HSC automatically sends 15 words (%AI) of Register Data Values and
16 status bits (%I) to the CPU, and the CPU sends 16 bits (%Q) of output data to the HSC.
COMM_REQ function blocks in the user program can be used to send additional data commands
to the HSC (See page 6-34).
Registers
Counts per Timebase Register
The Counts per Timebase register indicates the number of counts in a given time interval. The
Counts per Timebase data is a 16-bit signed number. The sign indicates up counts (+) or down
counts (–). The timebase value is specified in milliseconds and ranges from 10 to 65535
(increments of 10 milliseconds).
Preload Register
This register is used if the counter’s Preload/Strobe parameter is set to Preload. (Preload and
Strobe cannot be active at the same time.) This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90
configuration software or the HHP. It cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ.
When a preload input occurs, the configured preload value is inserted into the Accumulator and a
Preload flag is set to indicate this to the CPU. If the application program uses this flag, it should
clear the flag before the next preload occurs. The appropriate edge (either rising or falling,
depending on configuration) on the Preload input always loads the Accumulator regardless of the
state of the Preload flag. In the Preload mode, the Preload/Strobe input is normally used to
perform the reset function for each counter. Therefore, the Preload default value has been set to 0
(zero). However, the Preload value can be configured to any value within the counter’s selected
range.
If a Preload input occurs, the corresponding Preload Status bit is set. See “Status Bits (%I)” on
page 6-5. The application program can monitor this bit, and if necessary, reset it using the Reset
Preload output bit.
The application program can adjust the value in the Accumulator by sending the HSC a
Communications Request (COMM_REQ) from the CPU (see page 6-34). This adjustment can be
any value between –128 and +127. The adjustment value is summed with the contents of the
Accumulator. Alternately, the value in the Accumulator can be set in the Logicmaster 90
Configuration software, duplicating the preload functionality.
Note
If a count is received at the same time the CPU adjusts the Accumulator value,
the count will be lost. This happens because the CPU must read the
Accumulator, add the specified adjustment value, and write back to it, during
which time received counts are ignored.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-3
6
Strobe Register
This register is used if the counter’s Preload/Strobe parameter is set to Strobe. (Preload and Strobe
cannot be active at the same time.) This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90
configuration software or the HHP. It cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ.
When the Strobe signal goes active, the current value in the Accumulator is stored in the
associated Strobe register and a Strobe flag (status bit) is set to indicate to the CPU that a Strobe
value was captured. This value remains in the Strobe register until the Strobe signal goes active
again and is overwritten. The Strobe flag stays on until the application program clears it. The
Strobe input always updates the Strobe register with the latest Accumulator value regardless of the
state of the Strobe flag.
Data Automatically Sent by the HSC
Analog Input (%AI) Data
The 15 words (%AI) of Analog Input data values and 16 Status bits (%I) sent to the CPU are
listed in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2. Description of %AI Data
Reference
6-4
Description
Value
%AI01
%AI02
%AI03
%AI04
%AI05
HSC Status Code
Counts per timebase HSC1
Counts per timebase HSC2
Counts per timebase HSC3
Counts per timebase HSC4
%AI06
%AI07
%AI08
Accumulator HSC1
Strobe Register HSC1
Accumulator HSC2
–32768 to 32767
–32768 to 32767
–32768 to 32767
–32768 to 32767
–32768 to 32767
%AI09
%AI10
%AI11
%AI12
Strobe Register HSC2
Accumulator HSC3
Strobe Register HSC3
Accumulator HSC4
–32768 to 32767
–32768 to 32767
–32768 to 32767
–32768 to 32767
%AI13
%AI14–%AI15
Strobe Register HSC4
not used
–32768 to 32767
0
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
(see Table 6-3)
–32768 to 32767
–32768 to 32767
GFK-1065F
6
High Speed Counter Status Codes
The HSC Status Code in the %AI Input Data contains the error codes returned to the PLC. These
codes are set as a result of message or configuration command errors. To clear this code, the
CLEAR ERROR bit in the discrete outputs (%Q) should be set.
Table 6-3. Error Codes Returned
Code
0–2
3
4–5
6
7–10
11
12
13
14
Description
not used
Invalid Command
Unused
Invalid Counter Number
Unused
Counter 1 Limit Error
Counter 2 Limit Error
Counter 3 Limit Error
Counter 4 Limit Error
Definition
N/A
Command number received was invalid for the HSC.
N/A
Counter number in the Data Command Word was not a
valid counter based on the current configuration.
N/A
Counter configuration limit was rejected because the new
values set would be incompatible (High limit < > Low limit)
with current High and Low limit values.
Status Bits (%I)
These status bits are sent to the CPU as inputs, and can influence outputs sent from the CPU to the
HSC. Data formats for the HSC are shown on the following pages.
512 511 510 509 508 507 506 505
504 503 502 501 500 499 498 497
Output Status HSC1
Strobe Status HSC1
Output Status HSC2
Strobe Status HSC 2
Output Status HSC3
Strobe Status HSC 3
Output Status HSC4
Module Ready (always 1)
Strobe Status HSC 4
Preload Status HSC1
Not used (always 0)
Preload Status HSC 2
Counter error status
Preload Status HSC 3
Preload Status HSC 4
Strobe/Preload Status: The HSC sets these bits when a strobe or preload occurs. The CPU must
clear the bit using the corresponding Reset Strobe/Reset Preload output.
Module Ready: Always a 1.
Error: Set to indicate an error condition. When this occurs, the error code is returned in the HSC
Status code (word 1). When the error is acknowledged by the CPU, it should be cleared by sending
the Clear Error output.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-5
6
Data Automatically Sent to the HSC (%Q)
Once each I/O scan, the CPU sends 16 bits (%Q) of data to the HSC. The application program can
use these %Q references to send commands to the HSC. The %Q data format for the counter is
shown below.
512 511 510 509 508 507 506 505
504 503 502 501 500 499 498 497
Enable Output HSC1
Reset Strobe bit for HSC1
Enable Output HSC2
Reset Strobe bit for HSC2
Enable Output HSC3
Reset Strobe bit for HSC3
Enable Output HSC4
Reset Strobe bit for HSC4
Not used/unavailable
Reset Preload bit HSC1
Not used/unavailable
Reset Preload bit HSC2
Reset Preload bit HSC3
Clear Error (all counters)
Reset Preload bit HSC4
Enable Output
Clear Error
Reset Strobe
Reset Preload
Bits 505 through 508 are used to enable or disable the module’s outputs. If an
enable bit is 0, the corresponding HSC output will always remain 0.
Set by the CPU to clear an error after it has been acknowledged. It clears
errors for all counters.
Clears the HSC’s corresponding Strobe input status bit. For example, Reset
Strobe bit 1 is used to reset the HSC’s Strobe status bit 1. If the corresponding
Strobe input status changes to 1, the program logic should set this bit to 1 and
then back to 0 on the next I/O scan.
Clears the HSC’s corresponding Preload input status bit. For example, reset
Preload bit 1 is used to reset the HSC’s Preload status bit 1. If the
corresponding Preload input status changes to 1, the program logic should set
this bit to 1 and then back to 0 on the next I/O scan.
In addition to the %Q discrete output data that is sent every sweep to the HSC, commands can be
sent by the CPU (using the COMM_REQ function in the ladder diagram) to change some of the
operating parameters of the counters. For a description of how to use the COMM_REQ function,
see page 6-34.
6-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Output Failure Mode
This parameter applies to all counters, no matter what their configuration. When the Micro PLC
transitions from RUN to STOP mode for any reason, the HSC outputs respond according to the
setting of this parameter:
NORMAL (default setting) The inputs will continue to be processed and the outputs will
continue to operate under control of the counters. If Normal is selected, the transition from
RUN to STOP mode has no effect on counter outputs.
FRCOFF All outputs will be forced off. The counters will continue to operate but will not
change the state of the outputs.
HOLD
The HSCs retain the last state of the output points before the PLC stopped. The
counters will continue to operate but will not change the states of the outputs.
These responses remain in effect until the Micro PLC returns to the RUN mode.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-7
6
Type A Counter Operation
Type A Counter Overview
Each type A counter consists of one 16-bit Accumulator that can be programmed to count either
up or down. The counter accepts two inputs: (The Accumulator can also be changed by loading a
new value from the CPU or by applying a Preset Input.)
•
•
A Count input that increments or decrements a 16-bit Accumulator. The count input can be
configured to be positive current or negative current edge-sensitive.
Preload/Strobe input that either preloads a user-defined value into the Accumulator or
strobes the Accumulator into a register. The Preload/Strobe signal can be configured to be
positive current or negative current edge-sensitive.
The counter has one output with programmable on and off presets.
Details of the Type A counter are shown in Figure 6-1. The counter has an Accumulator register,
a Counts per Timebase register, one Strobe register, and one set of ON/OFF Preset values.
Up or Down Counter (16-bit)
PRELOAD
Preload Value
(16-bit)
PRELOAD/
A
Count
Pulse
Accumulator
(16-bit)
STROBE
Counts per
Time Base
(16-bit)
STROBE
Strobe Register
(16-bit)
On/Off Presets
Output
Figure 6-1. Type A Counter Block Diagram
6-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Type A Operating Parameters
How the HSC function operates depends on how its operating parameters are configured. For
example, the figure below illustrates the case where the counter has been configured to count on
the low to high transition of the A PULSE input. The COUNT signal represents an internal signal
that indicates where counting occurs with respect to the pulse input.
A PULSE
input
COUNT
Accumulator
Value
N
N
N
2
1
The following paragraphs describe how the operating parameters affect the operation of an A-type
counter. For details on configuring the parameters, refer to “Configuration” on page 6-20.
Counter Enable/Disable
When disabled, the HSC is inactive and the output associated with the counter is available to the
user program. When enabled, the HSC is active and its output is dependent on the Output Enable
parameter. (This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP; it cannot be
changed by a COMM_REQ.)
Counter Output Enable/Disable
When disabled, the HSC output is available to the user program. When enabled, the output is
reserved for the HSC and cannot be controlled by the user program. (This parameter must be set
by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP; it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ.)
Preload/Strobe
If Preload is selected, the configured Preload Value will be loaded into the Accumulator when the
Preload/Strobe signal is active. If Strobe is selected, the Accumulator value is placed in the strobe
register when the Preload/Strobe signal is active. (This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster
90 software or the HHP; it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ.)
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-9
6
Count Mode
Each counter has programmable count limits that define its range (Hi Limit and Lo Limit). The
counter can either count continuously within these limits, or count to either limit, then stop. This
parameter applies only to A-type counters and is ignored for B-type counters.
Note
If n is the desired number of pulses to be counted, you must configure the
counter so that high limit = n–1 for up-counting, or low limit = n+1 for downcounting.
Continuous (default) The Accumulator wraps when the n+1 (or n-1) count is reached and
continues counting. For example, if the Count Direction is UP and the Hi Limit is n, the
Accumulator will wrap to the Lo Limit when it reaches n+1.
One-Shot The counter stops at 1 past the limit (i.e. at n+1 if n is the high limit, and n–1 if
n is the low limit). When the counter is at the limit, counts in the opposite direction will
count it back off the limit.
In either mode, when the counter is at the limit, counts in the opposite direction will count it back
off the limit. (This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP; it cannot be
changed by a COMM_REQ.)
Count Direction
Each A-type counter can be configured to count either up (the Accumulator increments for each
count received) or down (the accumulator decrements for each count). The default is up.
Strobe/Count Edge
For A-type counters, Strobe and Count inputs are edge sensitive. Each Strobe and Count input on
the module can be individually configured to have either the positive or the negative edge active.
By default, they are positive-edge sensitive. (These parameters must be set by the Logicmaster 90
software or the HHP; they cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ.)
Positive (default)
Negative
A count occurs on a positive-to-negative transition.
A count occurs on a negative-to-positive transition.
Counter Time Base
For each counter, the time base represents a span of time that can be used to measure the rate of
counting. For example, the program could be required to monitor the number of count pulses that
occur during a 30-second interval.
A timebase from 10 msec to 65535 msec can be selected for each counter. The counter timebase is
set to 1 second (1000 msec) by default. The module stores the number of counts that occurred
during the last-completed timebase interval in the Counts/Timebase register. Up counts are
positive (+) and down counts are negative (-). The range of the Counts/Timebase register is –
6-10
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
32768 and +32767 counts. The timebase value selected should not allow the Counts/Timebase
register to overflow at the maximum count frequency. If it does, the sign of the Counts/Timebase
will change from (+) to (–) or (–) to (+).
Anytime you modify the counter configuration using the COMM_REQ function, you will cause
the counts/timebase value to be reset, except for changes to On/Off Presets and Preload. For
example: If Count Direction is changed for an A-type counter, the counts/timebase value is reset.
Count Limits
Each counter must be assigned upper and lower count limits. Default values are 0 (Lo Limit) and
32767 (Hi Limit). All Accumulator preload values and output on/off preset values must lie within
these limits. Both the Hi and Lo limits can be positive, or both can be negative, but the high limit
is always greater than the low limit.
When setting the limits using the COMM_REQ function, the Hi Limit must be greater than or
equal to Lo Limit, On Preset, Off Preset, Preload, and current Accumulator value. The Lo Limit
must be less than or equal to Hi Limit, On Preset, Off Preset, Preload, and current Accumulator
value. (The Logicmaster 90 configuration software and the HHP will not allow you to set
incompatible limits.)
If a COMM_REQ sets new limits that are incompatible, they will be rejected and the old limits
retained. In this case a counter limit error code will be returned. To avoid this situation when the
limits are changed one at a time, a good rule to follow is: always move the high limit first when
shifting the limits up and always move the low limit first when shifting them down.
The limit range for both Type A and Type B counters is –32,768 to +32,767.
Output Preset Points
Each counter output has a preset ON and OFF point which must be located between the Hi and Lo
limits. The output state indicates when the Accumulator value is between the ON and OFF Preset
points.
For example:
a43003
COUNTS
ACCUMULATOR
VALUE
OFF PRESET
VALUE
ON PRESET
VALUE
TIME
CORRESPONDING
OUTPUT
GFK-1065F
ON
OFF
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-11
6
If the output is enabled for the HSC channel being used, the output will turn on in accordance
with the following table:
Preset closest to low limit
ON
OFF
Output ON
>ON Preset
< = OFF Preset
Output OFF
> OFF Preset
< = ON Preset
< = OFF Preset
< = ON Preset
> ON Preset
> OFF Preset
As the following example shows, the output can be either on or off when the Accumulator value
lies between the Preset points.
On
Preset +1
Off
P reset +1
O ff
Preset +1
On
Preset +1
Increasing C ounts
Note
If your program issues a COMM_REQ that changes count direction, the counter
will go immediately into the new mode. You should be aware that the output
does not change states at exactly the same points on an Up-counter as it does on
a Down-counter.
The output takes the value of the On or Off preset after the Accumulator has gone through the
preset point (n+1 for an up counter and n-1 for a down counter).
6-12
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Example for A-type counter:
Lo Limit = 0
Hi Limit = 200
On Preset = 150 Off Preset = 160
Count Direction = Up
O n Pres et O n
Lo Lim it
0
149
150
151
Off P rese t Off
159
16 0
161
H i Lim it
20 0
C o un t D i re c t i o n
Count Direction = Down
Lo L im it
0
O n O n Pres et
14 9
150
151
On
159
Off P rese t
160
161
Hi L im it
200
C o un t D i re c t i o n
Preload Value
When a preload input occurs, the configured preload value is inserted into the Accumulator and a
Preload flag is set to indicate this to the CPU. The preload value can be configured to any value
within the counter’s selected range.
For each counter, you can specify a starting count value that will be used when the Preload input
is activated. This value must be located between the Hi and Lo limits. The Accumulator is
initialized to the Preload value on a STOP to RUN transition. (The default value is 0.)
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-13
6
Type B Counter Operation
The primary difference between a type B counter and a type A counter is the way counting is
handled to generate a change to the Accumulator. A type A counter simply counts input pulses
and increments or decrements the Accumulator. A type B counter uses two input signals for AQuad-B counting.
A-Quad-B Counting
If a counter is configured for A-Quad-B counting, a count occurs for each transition of either A or
B. There are four counts for each A-Quad-B cycle. Counts are evenly spaced with respect to the
input waveforms when the phase relationship between A and B is shifted by 1/4 cycle. The phase
relationship between A and B determines count direction, as shown below.
The count direction is up if A leads B.
A
B
COUNT
N+6
Accumulator
N
Value
The count direction is down if A lags B.
A
B
COUNT
Accumulator N
Value
N+6
6-14
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Type B Counter Overview
As shown in Figure 6-2, the Micro PLC’s B-type counter has a Preload/Strobe input (I6), two
Count Pulse inputs, and one output with On/Off Presets (Q1). The type B counter has a Strobe
Register, a 16-bit Accumulator, and a Counts-per-Timebase Register. The maximum count rate is
5 KHz.
Up Or Down Counter
PRELOAD
Preload Value
(16 bit)
I1
PRELOAD/
STROBE
Accumulator
(16 bit)
I3
I6 INPUT
Counts Per
Time Base
(16*bit)
Strobe Register
STROBE
On/Off Presets
OUTPUT
Figure 6-2. Type B Counter Block Diagram
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-15
6
Type B Operating Parameters
The following paragraphs describe how the operating parameters affect the operation of a B-type
counter. (The following parameters have no effect on the operation of a B-type counter even
though they can be changed in the configuration software screens: Count Mode, Count Edge, and
Count Direction.)
For details on configuring the parameters, refer to “Configuration,” which begins on page 6-20.
Counter Enable/Disable
When disabled, the HSC is inactive and the output associated with the counter is available to the
user program. When enabled, the HSC is active and its output is dependent on the Output Enable
parameter. (This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP; it cannot be
changed by a COMM_REQ.)
Counter Output Enable/Disable
When disabled, the HSC output is available to the user program. When enabled, the output is
reserved for the HSC and can not be controlled by the user program. (This parameter must be set
by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP; it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ.)
Preload/Strobe
If preload is selected, the configured Preload Value will be loaded into the Accumulator when the
Preload/Strobe signal is active. If Strobe is selected, the Accumulator value is placed in the strobe
register when the Preload/Strobe signal is active. (This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster
90 software or the HHP; it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ.)
Count Mode
This parameter applies to only to A-type counters and is ignored for the B-type counter. The
B-type counter always counts in continuous mode. The Accumulator wraps when the n+1 (or n-1)
count is reached and continues counting. For example, if the Hi Limit is n, the Accumulator will
wrap to the Lo Limit when it reaches n+1. When the counter is at the limit, counts in the opposite
direction will count it back off the limit.
Note
If n is the desired number of pulses to be counted, you must configure the
counter so that high limit = n–1 for up-counting, or low limit = n+1 for downcounting.
6-16
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Strobe Edge
Each Strobe input on the module can be individually configured to have either the positive or the
negative edge active. By default, they are positive-edge sensitive. (This parameter must be set by
the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP; it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ.)
Positive (default)
A count occurs on a positive-to-negative transition.
Negative
A count occurs on a negative-to-positive transition.
Counter Time Base
A timebase from 10 msec to 65535 msec can be selected. The counter timebase is set to 1 second
(1000 msec) by default. The module stores the number of counts that occurred during the lastcompleted timebase interval in the Counts/Timebase register. Up counts are positive (+) and down
counts are negative (-). The range of the Counts/Timebase register is –32768 and +32767 counts.
The timebase value selected should not allow the Counts/Timebase register to overflow at the
maximum count frequency. If it does, the sign of the Counts/Timebase will change from (+) to (–)
or (–) to (+).
For a B-type counter, the counts per timebase value represents the relative shift over the sample
time, not the exact number of counts. This value indicates a relative change in position. For
example, if the counter starts at 10, counts up to 20, and then counts back to 15, the resulting
counts per timebase is 5.
C h an ge
direction
Sta rt
En d
10
15
20
Ch ange in position =5
A ctual travel= 24
Count Limits
Each counter can be assigned upper and lower count limits. All Accumulator preload values and
output on/off preset values must lie within these limits. Both the Hi and Lo limits can be positive,
or both can be negative, but the high limit is always greater than the low limit.
When setting the limits using the COMM_REQ function, the Hi Limit must be greater than or
equal to Lo Limit, On Preset, Off Preset, Preload, and current Accumulator value. The Lo Limit
must be less than or equal to Hi Limit, On Preset, Off Preset, Preload, and current Accumulator
value. (The Logicmaster 90 configuration software and the HHP will not allow you to set
incompatible limits.)
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-17
6
If a COMM_REQ sets new limits that are incompatible, they will be rejected and the old limits
retained. In this case a counter limit error code will be returned. To avoid this situation when the
limits are changed one at a time, a good rule to follow is: always move the high limit first when
shifting the limits up and always move the low limit first when shifting them down.
The limit range for both Type A and Type B counters is –32,768 to +32,767.
Output Preset Points
Each counter output has a preset ON and OFF point which must be located between the Hi and Lo
limits. The output state indicates when the Accumulator value is between the ON and OFF preset
points. For example:
a43003
COUNTS
ACCUMULATOR
VALUE
OFF PRESET
VALUE
ON PRESET
VALUE
TIME
CORRESPONDING
OUTPUT
ON
OFF
If the output is enabled for the HSC channel being used, the output will turn on in accordance
with the following table:
Preset closest to low limit
Output ON
Output OFF
ON
> ON Preset
< = OFF Preset
> OFF Preset
< = ON Preset
OFF
< = OFF Preset
> ON Preset
< = ON Preset
> OFF Preset
As the following example shows, the output can be either on or off when the Accumulator value
lies between the Preset points. The output takes the value of the On or Off preset after the
Accumulator has gone through the preset point (n+1 when counting up and n-1 when counting
down).
On
Preset +1
Off
Preset +1
O ff
Preset +1
On
Preset +1
Increasing Counts
6-18
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Note
You should be aware that the output does not change states at the same points
when the Accumulator is increasing as it does when it is decreasing (see the
figures below). The exception to this is when the Preload input activates (as
when a COMM_REQ within the program changes the Accumulator); in this
case the waveform will change state at the preset point instead of at 1 past the
preset.
Example for B-type counter:
Lo Limit = 0
Hi Limit = 200
On Preset = 150 Off Preset = 160
Lo L im it
0
On Pre set
149
150
151
O ff P re se t
H i L im it
160
200
159
161
Increasing C ounts
Lo L im it
0
O n P re s et
149
15 0
15 1
15 9
Off P re set
H i L im it
160
200
16 1
D ecreasing C ounts
Lo L im it
0
O n P re s et
149
15 0
15 1
15 9
Off P re set
H i L im it
160
200
16 1
Preload Value
For each counter, you can specify a starting count value that will be used when the Preload input
is activated. This value must be located between the Hi and Lo limits. The Accumulator is
initialized to the Preload value on a STOP to RUN transition. (The default value is 0.)
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-19
6
Configuration
Note
When the Micro PLC changes from STOP to RUN mode, the configurations for
HSC, PWM, and Pulse outputs are sent to the HSC from the CPU. This has the
net result of stopping the currently running counters, reconfiguring all counters
to the current CPU configurations, and restarting them according to the new
configuration.
When the Series 90 Micro PLC first powers up, it has default values for all the HSC parameters.
To meet the requirements of most applications, the HSCs will have to be configured before they
can be used.
Configuration of the HSC can be accomplished in three ways:
•
Using the configuration function in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software package (page
6-24).
•
Using the Series 90-30 Hand-Held Programmer (screens are shown beginning on page 6-27).
•
Sending data using the COMM_REQ command in ladder logic programs (see page 6-34). If
configuration is to be done using a COMM_REQ, the counters must first be enabled in the
HHP or Logicmaster 90 software configuration.
Tables 6-4 through 6-6 list the configuration parameters for the HSC function and the
abbreviations for those parameters as they are displayed on the Hand-Held Programmer and in the
Logicmaster 90 screens. For details on how these parameters control operation of A-type counters,
refer to page 6-9; for B-type counters, refer to page 6-16.
Table 6-4. Parameters Common to A and B-type Counter Configurations
Parameter
Counter Type
Logicmaster 90
Abbreviation
Ctr Types
Output Failure Mode Failure Mde
6-20
HHP
HHP
Screen Abbreviation Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
B1–3/A4
–
1
CNTR TYPE
ALL A
2
FAIL MODE
NORMAL FRCOFF HOLD
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
Default
ALL A
NORMAL
GFK-1065F
6
Table 6-5. Abbreviations for ALL A-type Counter Configuration
Parameter
Logicmaster 90
Abbreviation
HHP
HHP
Screen No. Abbreviation
Value 1
Value 2
Default
Counter 1
Enable/Disable
Count Enabl
3
CTR1
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 1 Output
Enable/Disable
Out Enable
4
CTR1 OUT
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 1 Direction
Count Dir
5
CTR1 DIR
UP
DOWN
UP
Counter 1 Mode
Count Mode
6
CTR1 MODE
CONT
1 SHOT
CONT
Counter 1 Preload/Strobe Pld/strobe
selection
7
CTR1
PRELOAD
STROBE
PRELOAD
Counter 1 Strobe Edge
Strobe Edge
8
STB EDGE1
POS
NEG
POS
Counter 1 Count Edge
Count Edge
9
CNT1 EDGE
POS
NEG
POS
Time Base 1
Time Base
10
TIME BS 1
–
–
1000mS
High Limit 1
Hi Limit
11
HI LIM 1
–
–
+32767
Low Limit 1
Lo Limit
12
LO LIM 1
–
–
0
ON Preset 1
On Preset
13
ON PST 1
–
–
+32767
OFF Preset 1
Off Preset
14
OFF PST1
–
–
0
Preload 1
Pld Value
15
PRELD 1
–
–
0
Counter 1 PWM Output
Enable/Disable*
PWM Out %Q1
PWMOUT1
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 1 Pulse Output
Enable/Disable*
Pul Out %Q1
PULSEOUT1
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter Signal
Count Sig
–
Counter 2
Enable/Disable
Count Enabl
18
CTR2
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 2 Output
Enable/Disable
Out Enable
19
CTR2 OUT
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
16
17
–
NONE
–
–
Counter 2 Direction
Count Dir
20
CTR2 DIR
UP
DOWN
UP
Counter 2 Mode
Count Mode
21
CTR2 MODE
CONT
1 SHOT
CONT
Counter 2 Preload/Strobe Pld/strobe
selection
22
CTR2
PRELOAD
STROBE
PRELOAD
Counter 2 Strobe Edge
Strobe Edge
23
STB EDGE2
POS
NEG
POS
Counter 2 Count Edge
Count Edge
24
CNT2 EDGE
POS
NEG
POS
Time Base 2
Time Bas
25
TIME BS 2
–
–
1000mS
High Limit 2
Hi Limit
26
HI LIM 2
–
–
+32767
Low Limit 2
Lo Limit
27
LO LIM 2
–
–
0
ON Preset 2
On Preset
28
ON PST 2
–
–
+32767
OFF Preset 2
Pld Value
29
OFF PST2
–
–
0
Preload 2
Pld Value
30
PRELD 2
–
–
0
Counter Signal
Count Sig
–
NONE
–
–
–
*These parameters apply only to Micro PLCs that have a DC output (IC693UDR005/010 and
UAL006).
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-21
6
Table 6-5. Abbreviations for ALL A-type Counter Configuration - Continued
Logicmaster 90
Abbreviation
Parameter
Counter 3 Enable/Disable
HHP
Screen
HHP
Abbreviation
Value 1
Value 2
Default
Count Enabl
31
CTR3
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 3 Output Enable/Disable
Out Enable
32
CTR3 OUT
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 3 Direction
Count Dir
33
CTR3 DIR
UP
DOWN
UP
Counter 3 Mode
Count Mode
34
CTR3 MODE
CONT
1 SHOT
CONT
Counter 3 Preload/Strobe selection
Pld/strobe
35
CTR3
PRELOAD
STROBE
PRELOAD
Counter 3 Strobe Edge
Strobe Edge
36
STB EDGE3
POS
NEG
POS
Counter 3 Count Edge
Count Edge
37
CNT3 EDGE
POS
NEG
POS
Time Base 3
Time Bas
38
TIME BS 3
–
–
1000mS
High Limit 3
Hi Limit
39
HI LIM 3
–
–
+32767
Low Limit 3
Lo Limit
40
LO LIM 3
–
–
0
ON Preset 3
On Preset
41
ON PST 3
–
–
+32767
OFF Preset 3
Off Preset
42
OFF PST3
–
–
0
Preload 3
Pld Value
43
PRELD 3
–
–
0
Counter Signal
Count Sig
–
Counter 4 Enable/Disable
Count Enabl
44
CTR4
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 4 Output Enable/Disable
Out Enable
45
CTR4 OUT
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
–
NONE
–
–
Counter 4 Direction
Count Dir
46
CTR4 DIR
UP
DOWN
UP
Counter 4 Mode
Count Mode
47
CTR4 MODE
CONT
1 SHOT
CONT
Counter 4 Preload/Strobe selection
Pld/strobe
48
CTR4
PRELOAD
STROBE
PRELOAD
Counter 4 Strobe Edge
Strobe Edge
49
STB EDGE4
POS
NEG
POS
Counter 4 Count Edge
Count Edge
50
CNT4 EDGE
POS
NEG
POS
Time Base 4
Time Bas
51
TIME BS 4
–
–
1000
High Limit 4
Hi Limit
52
HI LIM 4
–
–
+32767
Low Limit 4
Lo Limit
53
LO LIM 4
–
–
0
ON Preset 4
On Preset
54
ON PST 4
–
–
+32767
OFF Preset 4
Off Preset
55
OFF PST4
–
–
0
Preload 4
Pld Value
56
PRELD 4
–
–
Counter Signal
Count Sig
–
6-22
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
–
NONE
0
–
–
GFK-1065F
6
Table 6-6. Abbreviations for B1–3/A4 Counter Configuration
Logicmaster 90
Abbreviation
Parameter
Counter 1 Enable/Disable
HHP
Screen
HHP
Abbreviation
Value 1
Value 2
Default
Count Enabl
3
CTR1
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 1 Output Enable/Disable
Out Enable
4
CTR1 OUT
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 1 Direction*
Count Dir
5
CTR1 DIR
N/A
N/A
UP
Counter 1 Mode*
Count Mode
6
CTR1 MODE
CONT
1 SHOT
CONT
Counter 1 Preload/Strobe selection
Pld/strobe
7
CTR1
PRELOAD
STROBE
PRELOAD
Counter 1 Strobe Edge
Strobe Edge
8
STB EDGE1
POS
NEG
POS
Counter 1 Count Edge*
Count Edge
9
CNT1 EDGE
POS
NEG
POS
Time Base 1
Time Base
10
TIME BS 1
–
–
1000mS
High Limit 1
Hi Limit
11
HI LIM 1
–
–
+32767
Low Limit 1
Lo Limit
12
LO LIM 1
–
–
0
ON Preset 1
On Preset
13
ON PST 1
–
–
+32767
OFF Preset 1
Off Preset
14
OFF PST1
–
–
0
Preload 1
Pld Value
15
PRELD 1
–
–
0
Counter 1 PWM Output
Enable/Disable**
PWM Out %Q1
16
PWMOUT1
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 1 Pulse Output
Enable/Disable**
Pul Out %Q1
17
PULSEOUT1
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter Signal
Count Sig
–
Counter 4 Enable/Disable
Count Enabl
18
CTR4
–
ENABLE
A-QUAD-B
DISABLE
–
DISABLE
–
Counter 4 Output Enable/Disable
Out Enable
19
CTR4 OUT
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Counter 4 Direction
Count Dir
20
CTR4 DIR
UP
DOWN
UP
Counter 4 Mode
Count Mode
21
CTR4 MODE
CONT
1 SHOT
CONT
Counter 4 Preload/Strobe selection
Pld/strobe
22
CTR4
PRELOAD
STROBE
PRELOAD
Counter 4 Strobe Edge
Strobe Edge
23
STB EDGE4
POS
NEG
POS
Counter 4 Count Edge
Count Edge
24
CNT4 EDGE
POS
NEG
POS
Time Base 4
Time Base
25
TIME BS 4
–
–
1000
High Limit 4
Hi Limit
26
HI LIM 4
–
–
+32767
Low Limit 4
Lo Limit
27
LO LIM 4
–
–
0
ON Preset 4
On Preset
28
ON PST 4
–
–
+32767
OFF Preset 4
Off Preset
29
OFF PST4
–
–
0
Preload 4
Pld Value
30
PRELD 4
–
–
0
Counter Signal
Count Sig
–
–
NONE
–
–
*Count Direction, Count Mode, and Count Edge are ignored for the type B counter.
**PWM and Pulse Output parameters apply only to DC IN/DC OUT Micro PLCs and are not
available when the B1–3, A4 mode is selected.
Note
Counter 1 is an A-QUAD-B counter and counter 4 is an A type counter.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-23
6
Logicmaster 90 Software
The HSC parameters are shown in the following configuration screens.
Refer to the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466, for
details on the use of the configuration software.
I/O Scanner and Counter Type Configuration
The first HSC screen, shown below, displays the counter types, failure mode, and I/O
configuration.
Counter types. The counter function can operate with four type A counters (A4), or with one type
B counter and one type A counter (B1-3, A4).
Failure mode. This parameter selects the state the outputs will assume when the PLC transitions
from RUN to STOP mode. These responses remain in effect until the Micro PLC returns to the
RUN mode.
NORMAL (default setting): The inputs will continue to be processed and the outputs
will continue to operate under control of the counters. If Normal is selected, the transition
from RUN to STOP mode has no effect on counter outputs.
FRCOFF: All outputs will be forced off. The counters will continue to operate but will
not change the state of the outputs.
HOLD: The HSCs retain the last state of the output points before the PLC stopped. The
counters will continue to operate but will not change the state of the outputs.
The I/O configuration (View Only Parameters) cannot be modified.
6-24
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Counter-specific Configuration
Examples of configuration screens for a type A counter and a type B counter are provided in this
section. For details on how these parameters control operation of A-type counters, refer to page 69; for B-type counters, refer to page 6-16.
Type A Counter
Type A counters 1–4 are all configured in the same way, with the exception of Counter 1 in
models that have Pulse and PWM output (IC693UDR005/010 and IC693UAL006).
The following screen presents the parameters for a type A Counter 1 in a Micro PLC that has
Pulse and PWM output. Configuration for counters in other relay-output Micro PLCs is the same
except for these two outputs.
To proceed to the screen for the next counter, press the PGDN key.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-25
6
Type B Counter
In the following screen, the B1–3, A4 counter configuration is selected. (In the B1–3, A4
configuration, counters 1–3 form a single type B counter.)
The following screen presents the configuration parameters for the type B counter. (On DC-output
Micro PLCs, Pulse and PWM outputs are not available when the type B counter is configured.)
Refer to Table 6-6 for parameter definitions. For details on how these parameters control
operation of B-type counters, refer to page 6-16.
6-26
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Hand-Held Programmer
If you have just configured the Series 90 Micro PLC parameters using the Hand-Held Programmer
(see Chapter 5) all you need to do is press the ↓ key to go to the slot assigned to HSC. For details
on how these parameters control operation of A-type counters, refer to page 6-9; for B-type
counters, refer to page 6-16.
Note: The Series 90 Micro PLC functions are assigned to rack and slot locations corresponding to
those in the Series 90-30 PLCs. The Series 90 Micro PLC system is always in rack 0, and its HSC
functions are in slot 4.
Configuration Screens Common to A4 and B1-3A4 Configurations
The following series of screens shows the parameters common to both counter types in the HSC.
Press the ± key to toggle the screen display, then press the ENT key to record the value. If you
change your mind about a parameter, press the CLR key instead of ENT to recall the original
value. To get to the next screen in the series, press the → key. To back up to previous parameters
(screens), press the ← key. (Screen numbers correspond to numbers listed in Tables 6-4 through
6-6.)
Screen 1 - Counter Type
R0:04 HSC
CNTR TYPE:ALL A
<S
Press the ± key to select the type of counter, then press the ENT key. The CLR key (before ENT is
pressed) will cancel the operation.
Screen 2 - Output Default/Module Failure Mode
R0:04 HSC
<S
FAIL MODE:NORMAL
This screen selects the state that the outputs assume if the PLC goes to STOP mode.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-27
6
A4 Counter Specific Screens
The following screens will be displayed when ALL A is selected in Screen 1.
Screens 3, 18, 31, 44 - Counter Enable
These screens enable or disable the specified
counter. Each counter enabled will use certain
portions of PLC reference memory and PLC input
and output resources. If CTR1 is set to ENABLE,
screens 4–15 will appear (or 19–30 for counter
number 2, 32–43 for counter
number 3, and 45–56 for counter number 4 ).
R0:04 HSC
CTRx :DISABLE
<S
Screens 4, 19, 32, 45 - Count Output Enable
Note
If the configured Series 90 Micro PLC is a DC IN/DC OUT type, this screen
will only appear for Counter 1 if the PWM OUTx option and the PULSE OUTx
option for the same channel are disabled (see screens 16 and 17 on page 6-30).
This series of four screens is used to set the
counter output enable.
R0:04 HSC
CTRx OUT:ENABLE
<S
Screens 5, 20, 33, 46 - Count Direction
These screens are used to set the count
direction for each counter.
R0:04 HSC
CTRx DIR:UP
<S
Screens 6, 21, 34, 47 - Count Mode
These screens specify the Count Mode:
continuous or one-shot.
R0:04 HSC
CTRx MODE:CONT
<S
Screens 7, 22, 35, 48 - Counter
Strobe/Preload Selection
This series of screens is used to select
PRELOAD or STROBE operation for
Counters 1–4.
6-28
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
R0:04 HSC
CTRx :PRELOAD
<S
GFK-1065F
6
Screens 8, 23, 36, 49 - Strobe Edge
These screens configure the Preload/Strobe
edge to trigger on a positive or negativegoing signal.
R0:04 HSC
STB EDGEx :POS
<S
Screens 9, 24, 37, 50 - Count Edge
These screens configure the counter input
edge to trigger on a positive or negativegoing signal.
R0:04 HSC
CTRx EDGE: POS
<S
Screens 10, 25, 38, 51 - Time Base
Value
These screens allow you to enter the time
base to be used in the Counts Per Time Base
R0:04 HSC
calculation. The default is 1000
TIME BS x: 1000
milliseconds (1 second). To change the time
base, use the numeric keys on the HHP to select the value,
then press the ENT key to record the value.
<S
Screens 11, 26, 39, 52 - High Limit
These screens are used to specify the highest
(most positive) value the count Accumulator
R0:04 HSC
can reach. The default is 32767, which is the
HI LIM x: 32767
maximum value the counters can handle. As
with the time base, use the HHP numeric keys to
change the value, then press the ENT key to
record it. Pressing CLR instead of ENT cancels the entry.
<S
Screens 12, 27, 40, 53 - Low Limit
These screens specify the lowest (most
negative) value for the Count Accumulator.
R0:04 HSC
LO LIM x: 0
<S
Screens 13, 28, 41, 54 - ON Preset Value
When the counter Accumulator exceeds this value
(depending also on the value of the OFF preset)
the associated output is turned on (depending on
the state, either enabled or disabled, of the output
control flags in the %Q data word). For details,
see “Output Preset Points” on page 6-18.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
R0:04 HSC
ON PST x: 32767
<S
6-29
6
Screens 14, 29, 42, 55 - OFF Preset Value
When the counter Accumulator exceeds this
value, the associated output is turned off.
R0:04 HSC
OFF PST x: 0
<S
R0:04 HSC
PRELD x: 0
<S
Screens 15, 30, 43, 56 - Preload Value
This parameter specifies the value that will be
loaded into the Accumulator when the
associated PRELOAD input on the terminal
strip is asserted. It is also the value loaded to
the Accumulator on a STOP to RUN transition.
The following two screens will be seen only for Micro PLCs that have DC output
(IC693UDR005/010 and UAL006).
Note
The PWM Out and PULSE OUT options are available only on counter channel
1. For additional details, see “Configuring DC Outputs” in Chapter 5.
Screen 16 - PWM Output
This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option
and the PULSE OUTx option for channel 1 are
disabled. This screen selects PWM as the counter
output.
R0:04 HSC
<S
PWMOUTX: DISABLE
Screen 17 - Pulse Output
This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option
and the PWM OUTx option for channel 1 are
disabled. This screen selects a pulse train as the
counter output.
R0:04 HSC
<S
PULSEOUTX: DISABLE
Note
When the Micro PLC changes from STOP to RUN mode, the configurations for
HSC, PWM, and Pulse outputs are sent to the HSC from the CPU. This has the
net result of stopping the currently running counters, reconfiguring all counters
to the current CPU configurations, and restarting them according to the new
configuration.
6-30
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Type B Counter Specific Screens
The following screens are specific to B1-3/A4 counters and are displayed when B1-3, A4 is
selected as the counter type in Screen 1. In this configuration, counter 1 is the A-Quad-B and
counter 4 is the A-type counter.
Screens 3, 18 - Count Enable
This series of two screens enables or disables a
specified counter. This means that each counter
R0:04 HSC
<S
enabled will use certain portions of PLC
CTRx :DISABLE
reference memory and PLC input and output
resources. Only one set of the two screens is
shown here. All of the other counters are configured in the same manner, except that the counter
number is different. Note that if CTR1 is set to ENABLE screens 4–15 will appear (or 19–30 for
counter number 4).
Screens 4, 19 - Count Output Enable
This series of three screens is used to set the
counter output enable.
R0:04 HSC
CTRx OUT:ENABLE
<S
R0:04 HSC
CTRx DIR:UP
<S
Screens 5, 20 - Count Direction
This parameter has no effect on the operation of
the B-type counter and is ignored.
Screens 6, 21 - Count Mode
This parameter has no effect on the operation
of the B-type counter and is ignored.
Screens 7, 22 - Counter Strobe/Preload
Selection
This series of screens is used to select
PRELOAD or STROBE operation for the
counters.
R0:04 HSC
CTRx MODE:CONT
<S
R0:04 HSC
CTRx :PRELOAD
<S
R0:04 HSC
STB EDGEx :POS
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
<S
6-31
6
Screens 8, 23 - Strobe Edge
These screens configure the Preload/Strobe input edge to trigger on a positive or negative-going
signal.
Screens 9, 24 - Count Edge
Although this parameter can be configured for
a type B counter (screen 9), it is ignored
because every transition causes a count in AQUAD-B counting.
R0:04 HSC
CTRx EDGE: POS
<S
Screens 10, 25 - Time Base Value
These screens allow you to enter the time base
R0:04 HSC
<S
that is used in the Counts Per Time Base
TIME
BS
x:
1000
calculation. The default is 1000 milliseconds (1
second). To change the time base, select the
value using the numeric keys on the Hand-Held Programmer, and then press the ENT key to
record the value.
Screens 11, 26 - High Limit
R0:04 HSC
<S
These screens are used to specify the highest
HI LIM x: 32767
(most positive) value of the Count Accumulator.
The default is 32767, which is the maximum
value the counters can handle. As with the timebase, use the Hand-Held Programmer numeric
keys to change the value, then press the ENT key to record it. Pressing CLR instead of ENT cancels
the entry.
Screens 12, 27 - Low Limit
These screens specify the lowest (most negative)
value for the Count Accumulator.
R0:04 HSC
LO LIM x: 0
<S
R0:04 HSC
ON PST x: 32767
<S
Screens 13, 28 - ON Preset Value
When the counter Accumulator exceeds this value
(depending also on the value of the OFF preset)
the associated output is turned on (depending on
the state, either enabled or disabled, of the output
control flags in the %Q data word). For details,
see “Output Preset Points” on page 6-18.
Screens 14, 29 - OFF Preset Value
When the Accumulator exceeds this value
(dependent also on the state of the ON Preset), the
associated output is turned off.
6-32
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
R0:04 HSC
OFF PST x: 0
<S
GFK-1065F
6
Screens 15, 30 - Preload Value
This parameter specifies the value that will be loaded
into the Accumulator when the associated PRELOAD
input on the terminal strip is asserted. It is also the
value loaded to the Accumulator on a STOP to RUN
transition.
R0:04 HSC
PRELD x: 0
<S
Note
The PWM Out and PULSE OUT outputs are not available when the B1–3, A4 counter
configuration is selected.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-33
6
COMM_REQ Function
In addition to the %Q discrete output data that is sent every sweep to the HSC, commands can be
sent by the CPU (using the COMM_REQ function block) to change some of the operating
parameters of the counters. These commands are all 6 bytes in length.
The PLC ladder program sends Data Commands using the COMM_REQ (Communication
Request) function. The COMM_REQ requires that all its command data be placed in the correct
order (in a command block) in the CPU memory before it is executed. It should then be executed
by a one-shot coil to prevent sending the data to the HSC multiple times.
The COMM_REQ function is effective only on counters that are enabled.
Command Block
The format for Data Commands is as follows:
MSB
LSB
command word
0n
cc
data word (LSW)
dd
dd
data word (MSW)
dd
dd
where: n=counter 1-4
cc=subcommand code
dd=data type
Always 0000
The command block used to send Data Commands is composed of 13 words arranged as shown in
Table 6-7 (all values in hexadecimal unless otherwise indicated). Use the Block Move (BLKMV)
function to move these values to the Register tables (see the Series 90™-30/20/Micro
Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467, for information on using the BLKMV
and COMM_REQ functions).
Table 6-7. Command Block for Data Commands
Location
Data
Description
%R0001
%R0002
%R0003
0004
don’t care
don’t care
Always 0004 for this HSC application
Not used (Always zero) Micro PLC ignores the WAIT flag for all COMM_REQ functions.
Not used
%R0004
%R0005
%R0006
don’t care
don’t care
don’t care
Not used
Not used
Not used
%R0007
%R0008
don’t care
don’t care
Not used
Not used
%R0009
%R0010
0008
000A
Data type (8 = registers)
Start location of Command word–1 (%R0011)
%R0011
%R0012
%R0013
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
Command word (See Table 6-8, Table 6-9)
LS data word
MS data word
not used by Micro PLC
*The command block can be placed in any word-oriented area of memory that is not reserved.
Table 6-8 lists the Data Command words for type A counters. Table 6-9 lists the Data Command
words for type B counters. Following the tables are descriptions of each command.
6-34
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Table 6-8. Data Commands – Type A Counter
Command Word
(Hexadecimal)
Command Name
Load Accumulator n
0n 01
Load Hi Limit n
0n 02
Load Lo Limit n
0n 03
Load Acc n Increment
0n 04
Set Cntr n Direction
0n 05
Load Timebase n
0n 06
Load ON Preset n
0n 0B
Load OFF Preset n
0n 15
Load Preload n
0n 1F
*n = Counter #1–4
The bytes in the command word are always treated as independent bytes,
consisting of a counter ID byte and a command code byte.
Note
Command words can be entered in decimal format. For example,
Load Accumulator
Load Hi Limit
Load Lo Limit
Load Accumulator
02 01 (hex.) or 513 (decimal)
02 02 (hex) or 514 (decimal)
02 03 (hex) or 515 (decimal)
Command Code = 01H
Used to set any value within counter limits directly into the Accumulator.
Example: To set Counter 3 to 1234H, load COMM_REQ command registers with:
Command word: 0301
LS data word: 1234
Load Hi Limit
Load Lo Limit
Command Code = 02H
Command Code = 03H
Used to set the Hi and Lo limits to any value within the counter range.
Example: To change the upper limit of counter 4 to 10000 (2710H), load registers with:
Command word: 0402
LS data word: 2710
Note: If the limits are loaded in the wrong order, they could be rejected and cause an error flag to
be set. To avoid this, remember to always move the Lo Limit first when shifting the limits down
or the Hi Limit first when shifting the limits up. Also, if the new value of the Hi/Lo limit is out of
range with the current Accumulator value, the load operation will be rejected. It is only successful
if all parameters, including the current Accumulator value, are within the new Hi/Lo range.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-35
6
Load Acc Increment
Command Code = 04H
Used to offset a counter Accumulator by a small number of counts (up to +127 or –128). Only the
least significant byte of data is used with this command.
Example: To offset counter 3 by –7 counts, load:
Command word: 0304
LS data word: 00F9
This can be done at any time, even while the counter is counting at maximum rate. If the offset
causes the counter to exceed its limits, this parameter will be rejected. If a count is received at the
same time the CPU updates the Accumulator value, the count will be lost.
Set Cntr Direction
Command Code = 05H
Used to change the count direction (up or down) of a type A counter. Only the LSB of the first
data
word is used for this command (00 = up, 01 = down).
Example: To set the direction of counter 4 to down, load:
Command word: 0405
LS data word: 0001
Load Timebase
Command Code = 06H
Used to change the time interval referenced by the counter when computing its counts/timebase
register data.
Example: To change the timebase for counter 2 to 600 ms (258H), load:
Command word: 0206
LS data word: 0258
Note: The maximum range of the counts/timebase (CTB) register is +32767 and –32768 counts.
The length of the timebase and the maximum count frequency should be coordinated so that these
limits are not exceeded. The indication will roll over from (+) to (–) or (–) to (+) if exceeded.
Load ON Preset
Command Code = 0BH
Load OFF Preset
Command Code = 15H
Used to set up the output turn on/off points within the counter range. There is one output
associated with each counter.
Example: To set counter 3 output to turn on at 5000 (1388H) counts, load:
Command Code: 030B
LS data word: 1388
and off at 12000 (2EE0H) counts, load:
Command Code: 0315
LS data word: 2EE0
Load Preload
Command Code = 1FH
Used to change the count value that will be loaded into the counter Accumulator when the Preload
input is activated.
Example: To make counter 2 start at 2500 (09C4H) counts at its preload signal, load:
Command word: 021F
LS data word: 09C4
6-36
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Table 6-9. Data Commands – Type B Counter
Command Name
Command Word (Hexadecimal)
Load Accumulator n
0n 01
Load Hi Limit n
0n 02
Load Lo Limit n
0n 03
Load Acc n Increment
0n 04
Load Timebase n
0n 06
Load ON Preset n
0n 0B
Load OFF Preset n
0n 15
Load Preload n
0n 1F
Note: n = Counter #1 or 4 (only counter 1 is B-type)
The bytes in the command word are always treated as independent bytes
– a counter ID byte and a command code byte.
Note
Command words can be entered in decimal format. For example:
Load Counter 1 Accumulator
01 01 (hex.) or 1025 (decimal)
Load Counter 1 Hi Limit
01 02 (hex) or 1026 (decimal)
Load Counter 1 Lo Limit
01 03 (hex) or 1027 (decimal)
Load Accumulator
Load Hi Limit
Load Lo Limit
Load Acc Increment
GFK-1065F
Command Code = 01H
Used to set any value within counter limits directly into the Accumulator. (If a count is received at
the same time the CPU updates the Accumulator value, the count will be lost. This happens
because the CPU must read the Accumulator, increment it, and write back to it, during which time
received counts are ignored.)
Example: To set Counter 1 to 2211H, load COMM_REQ command registers with:
Command word: 0101
LS data word: 2211
Command Code = 02H
Command Code = 03H
Used to set the Hi and Lo limits to any value within the counter range.
Example: To change the upper limit of counter 1 to 1690 (4240H), load registers with:
Command word: 0103
LS data word: 4240
Note: If the limits are loaded in the wrong order, they could be rejected and cause an error flag to
be set. To avoid this, remember to always move the Lo Limit first when shifting the limits down
or
the Hi Limit first when shifting the limits up. Also, if the new value of the Hi/Lo limit is out of
range with the current Accumulator value, the load operation will be rejected. It is only successful
if all parameters, including the current Accumulator Value, are within the new Hi/Lo range.
Command Code = 04H
Used to offset a counter Accumulator by a small number of counts (up to +127 or –128).
Example: To offset counter 1 by 9 counts, load:
Command word: 0104
LS data word: 0009
This can be done at any time, even while the counter is counting at maximum rate. If the offset
causes the counter to exceed its limits, this parameter will be rejected. If a count is received at the
same time the CPU updates the Accumulator value, the count will be lost.
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-37
6
Command Code = 06H
Load Timebase
Used to change the time interval referenced by the counter when computing its counts/timebase
register data.
Example: To change the timebase for counter 1 to 600 ms (258H), load:
Command word: 0106
LS data word: 0258
Note: The maximum range of the counts/timebase (CTB) register is +32767 and –32768 counts.
The length of the timebase and the maximum count frequency should be coordinated so that these
limits are not exceeded. The indication will roll over from (+) to (–) or (–) to (+) if exceeded.
Load ON Preset
Command Code = 0BH
Load OFF Preset
Command Code = 15H
Used to set up the output turn on/off points within the counter range.
Example: To set counter 1 output to turn on at 5000 (1388H) counts, load:
Command word: 010B
LS data word: 1388
and off at 12000 (2EE0H) counts, load:
Command word: 0115
LS data word: 2EE0
Command Code = 1FH
Load Preload
Used to change the count value that will be loaded into the counter Accumulator when the preload
input is activated.
Example: To make counter 1 start at 9632 (25A0H) counts at its preload signal, load:
Command word: 011F
LS data word: 25A0
Example
The COMM_REQ function is conditionally executed in the ladder logic to communicate a request
to the HSC. A sample ladder diagram for configuring the HSC function is provided in Figure 6-3.
In this example, the Accumulator for Counter 3 is loaded with 1234.
Rung 4 uses a one-shot coil (%T0002) to execute the COMM_REQ once. This prevents
multiple messages from being sent.
Rung 5 contains the Block Move Word function and is used to load the commands, which are
listed in Tables 6- 8 and 6-9. In this example, %R0101 through %R0114 are used for the
COMM_REQ command block. (Any registers can be used except for %R1617 through
%R1814, which are reserved.)
The COMM_REQ function, executed in Rung 6, has four inputs and one output.
Parameter
6-38
Description
enable
%T0002 is used to enable the COMM_REQ function.
IN
Points to the starting address of the command block, which is %R0101.
SYSID
Indicates which rack and slot to send the message to (physical location of HSC
module). The SYSID is always 0004 for the HSCs in the Series 90 Micro PLC.
TASK
This parameter is ignored during HSC communications and should be set to zero.
FT
This output is energized if an error is detected during processing of the COMM_REQ.
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
| << RUNG 4 >>
|%T0001
%T0002
+——] [—————————————————————————————————————————————————————(↑)——|
|
|
| << RUNG 5 >>
|
|%T0002 +—————+
+—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+————————————————+BLKMV+
|
| WORD|
| WORD|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONS— —+IN1 Q+—%R0101 CONS— —+IN1 Q+—%R0108
|
0004 |
|
0000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONS— —+IN2 |
CONS— —+IN2 |
|
0000 |
|
0008 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN3 |
CONST —+IN3 |
|
0000 |
|
006E |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN4 |
CONST —+IN4 |
|
0000 |
|
0301 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN5 |
CONST —+IN5 |
|
0000 |
|
1234 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN6 |
CONST —+IN6 |
|
0000 |
|
0001 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN7 |
CONST —+IN7 |
|
0000 +—————+
0000 +—————+
|
|
| << RUNG 6 >>
|
|%T0002
+—————+
%M0001
+——] [————————————+COMM_|+—————————————————————————————————( )——|
|
| REQ ||
|
|
||
|
%R0101 –+IN FT++
|
|
|
|
CONST –+SYSID|
|
0004 |
|
|
|
|
|
CONST –+TASK +
|
00000 +—————+
|
Figure 6-3. Ladder Logic Example for Setting a High Speed Counter Parameter
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-39
6
Application Examples–RPM Indicator
An RPM indicator is a typical application for a type A HSC.
Feature used: Counts/Timebase Register
The HSC can be used as a position/motion indicator when connected to a feedback device (such as
an encoder) that is coupled to a rotary motion. RPM indication can be obtained directly from the
counter’s Counts/Timebase register (CTB) or derived from it by a simple calculation.
RPM is calculated by:
RPM =
where:
CTB
PPR × T
CTB = counts/timebase reading from the counter
PPR = pulses/revolution produced by the feedback device
T = timebase expressed in minutes
Note that if the pulses/revolution is some integer power of 10, then setting the timebase for 6, 60,
600, 6000, or 60,000 will yield a direct reading of RPM in the CTB register with an assumed
decimal placement.
Example 1
If feedback produces 1000 pulses/revolution, CTB reading = 5210, and the timebase is configured
for 600ms: then T = 600ms / 60000ms/min = .01 and 1/T = 100
RPM =
5210
× 100 = 521
1000
CTB reading is RPM with .1 RPM resolution.
Example 2
Assume the same conditions as example 1, except the timebase is now set to 60ms, which gives
T = 60/60000 = .0001 and 1/T = 1000.
Because the rotation is at the same speed as in example 1, the CTB reading now equals 521 and
RPM =
521
× 1000 = 521
1000
CTB reading is now RPM with 1 RPM resolution.
6-40
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
6
Application Example — Input Capture
The HSC strobe inputs can act as pulse catch inputs for inputs 2, 4, 6, and 8, by using the Strobe
Status bits as a latch.
To use this feature:
1.
Configure the Micro PLC to use the HSC function with Strobe input.
2.
Enable A-type counter(s). (Any or all of the counters can be enabled.)
•
The corresponding Strobe Status bit will be latched if there is a pulse of at least 100 µsec
in width.
•
The Reset Strobe bits can be used as clear functions for the latched status bits.
Example: To capture pulses on input I2, enable Counter 1 and configure strobe for the
Pld/strobe parameter (see “Configuration” in this chapter). You can also configure POS
(positive) or NEG (negative) for the Strobe Edge parameter.
The Strobe Status bit (%I498) will be latched if there is a 100 microsecond or longer pulse on
I2. To clear this bit, the logic program should write a 1, followed by a 0, to the corresponding
output to the HSC (%Q498).
(For other inputs, see “Status Bits (%I)” on page 6-5.)
GFK-1065F
Chapter 6 High Speed Counters
6-41
Chapter
Analog I/O
7
The 23-point Micro PLC (IC693UAL006) features two analog input channels and an output
channel, which can be configured in voltage or current mode. The analog I/O function can be
configured by the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or by the HHP.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
GFK-1065F
•
Overview
•
Configuration
•
Calibration
7-1
7
Overview
The two input analog channels use a 10-bit successive-approximation A/D converter. The Micro
PLC firmware translates counts from two input channels of the A/D converter into values that are
stored in %AI0018 and %AI0019 (Figure 7-1).
As a part of the analog input scan, the firmware calculates the %AI register value using the
following formula:
%AI = (A/D count X Gain) + Offset
where Gain and Offset are internally calibrated values (refer to page 7-Calibration for information
about calibration).
Any calculated value exceeding 32,767 is clamped at that maximum value. Any calculated value
less than 0 will be clamped at 0.
A nalog Input C hannel 1
A nalog Input C hannel 2
C hannel 1 C ount
A /D C onverter
C hannel 2 C ount
A nalog I/O function in M ic ro P LC firm w are
% A I0 018
calculates % AI and stores the results in the
reference location for the c hannel.
% A I0 019
Figure 7-1. Analog Input Channel
To generate the analog output, the value in %AQ0012 is translated into a count value for the D/A
converter, which drives the analog output (Figure 7-2). Table 7-1 lists the ranges of values in the
PLC analog register and the corresponding quantities on the analog I/O point.
As part of the analog output scan, the firmware will calculate the D/A value using the following
formula:
D/A count = (%AQ X Gain) + Offset
where Gain and Offset are internally calibrated values.
Any calculated value that exceeds 4095 will be clamped at that maximum value. Any calculated
value less than 0 will be clamped at 0.
% A Q 0 012
Ana log I/O function in M icro P LC firm w are
ca lcu lates a c ou nt value that corresponds
to th e des ired cu rrent or voltage
and w rites th e c alc ulated value to the D /A .
Output c ount
A nalog O utput C hannel
D /A C o nverter
Figure 7-2. Analog Output Channel
Table 7-1 shows the relationship between the analog register value and the actual value on the input
or output for each mode. Table 7-2 summarizes the performance characteristics of the analog I/O
function. (Refer to “Specifications” in Chapter 2 for general module specifications.) For details of
the input and output interface circuitry, refer to “Analog Inputs” and “Analog Outputs” in Chapter
4. For field wiring information and diagram, refer to “General Wiring Procedures” in Chapter 4.
7-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
7
Table 7-1. Relationship of Register Values to Analog Values*
Mode
Analog Value on Input
or Output Point
Register Value in
%AQ or %AI
Resolution/Bit
User Counts/Bit
Voltage 0—10V
0 to 10,000mV
0 to 32000
10mV/bit
32
Current 0—20mA
0 to 20,000µA
0 to 32000
40µA/bit
64
Current 4—20mA
4 to 20,000µA
0 to 32000
40µA/bit
64
Mode
Formula
Voltage 0—10V
Register Value = 3.2 x mV
Current 0—20mA
Register Value = 1.6 x µA
Current 4—20mA
Register Value = 2 x µA -8000
*Based on factory-loaded offset and gain.
Example: If the analog input function is configured for Current 4—20mA mode, a 7.5mA current
on input, IN1, will result in a value of 7,500µA x 2 -8000 = 14,992 in %AI0018.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 7 Analog I/O
7-3
7
Table 7-2. Analog I/O Specifications
Analog Input Channels
2, differential
Input ranges
0 to 10V (10.24V max.)
0 to 20mA (20.5mA max.)
4 to 20 mA (20.5mA max.)
Calibration
Factory calibrated to
0.313mV per count on 0 to 10V range
0.625µA per count on 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20 mA ranges
Resolution:
0 to 10 V range
0 to 20 mA range
4 to 20 mA range
Accuracy
7-4
10 bits (1 LSB=10mV)
9 bits (1 LSB=40µA)
8+ bits (1 LSB=40µA)
1% of full scale over full operating temperature range
Linearity
±3 LSB maximum
Isolation
non-isolated
Common mode voltage
±200 V maximum
Current input impedance
250 ohms
Voltage input impedance
800 Kohms
Input filter time
20.2ms to reach 1% error for step input
Analog Output Channel
1, single-ended, non isolated
Output ranges
0 to 10V (10.24V maximum)
0 to 20mA (20.5mA maximum)
4 to 20mA (20.5mA maximum)
Resolution
12 bits over 0 to 10V range
12 bits over 0 to 20mA range
11+ bits over 4 to 20mA range
Accuracy
±1% of full scale over full operating temperature range
(0°C to 55°C)
Current: maximum compliance voltage, at 20mA
user load range
output load capacitance
output load inductance
10V
0 to 500 ohms
2000 pF maximum
1 henry maximum
Voltage: output loading
output load capacitance
2 Kohm minimum at 10 volts
1 µF maximum
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
7
Configuration
The analog I/O function can be configured using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or the
HHP.
Table 7-3. Configuration Parameters for Analog I/O
Parameter
Description
Possible Values
Default Value
ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION
AI0018 Mode
Range
AI0019 Mode
Range
Voltage or current mode
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
Current range selection
4–20mA
0–20mA
4–20mA
Voltage or current mode
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
Current range selection
4–20mA
0–20mA
4–20mA
%AI0018
%AI0018
2
2
Voltage or current mode
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
Current range selection
4–20mA
0–20mA
4–20mA
%AQ0012
%AQ0012
1
1
%AI Ref Addr
Analog input reference
%AI Size
Analog input size
not editable
not editable
ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
AQ0012 Mode
Range
%AQRef Addr
Analog output reference
%AQ Size
Analog output size
GFK-1065F
Chapter 7 Analog I/O
not editable
not editable
7-5
7
Logicmaster 90 Screens
The screens for configuring the Analog I/O function follow the High Speed Counter configuration
screens in the Logicmaster 90 software. (Press the PAGE DOWN key to access the Analog I/O
configuration screens.)
Analog Input
Analog Output
7-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
7
HHP Screens
The initial screen for configuring the Analog I/O function follows the HSC screens. For general
information on using the HHP, see “Configuration and Programming Using the HHP” in Chapter 5.
1.
Press the ↓ key until the configuration for analog input channel screen appears as follows:
R0:05 AI
<S
AI2:AI018-AI019
2.
Press the → key . The following channel 1 mode screen will appear:
R0:05 AI
<S
Ch1Mode: voltage
3.
Press ± to select channel 1 current mode, then press the ENT key to accept the change. The
following screen will appear:
R0:05 AI
<S
Ch1Mode: current
4.
Press the → key to access the following channel 1 range screen:
R0:05 AI
<S
Ch1Range: 4-20mA
5.
Press the ± key to select the 0–20mA range, then press the ENT key to accept the change:
R0:05 AI
<S
Ch1Range: 0-20mA
6.
Press the → key to access the following channel 2 mode screen:
R0:05 AI
<S
Ch2Mode: voltage
7.
Press the ± key to select channel 2 current mode, then press the ENT key to accept changes:
R0:05 AI
<S
Ch2Mode: current
8.
Press the → key to access the following channel 2 range screen:
R0:05 AI
<S
Ch2Range: 4-20mA
GFK-1065F
Chapter 7 Analog I/O
7-7
7
9.
Press the ± key to select 0–20mA range and then press the ENT key to accept the change:
R0:05 AI
<S
Ch2Range: 0-20mA
10. Press the ↓ key to go to configuration for the analog output channel, which appears as follows:
R0:06 AQ
AQ1:AQ012
<S
11. Press the → key to go to the channel 1 mode screen:
R0:06 AQ
<S
Ch1Mode: voltage
12. Press the ± key to select channel 1 current mode, then press the ENT key to accept the change:
R0:06 AQ
<S
Ch1Mode: current
13. Press the → key to access the following channel 1 range screen:
R0:06 AQ
<S
Ch1Range: 4-20mA
14. Press the ± key to select the 0–20mA range and then press the ENT key to accept the change:
R0:06 AQ
<S
Ch1Range: 0-20mA
7-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
7
Calibration
Note
The Analog I/O function is factory calibrated. Under normal circumstances, it
should not be necessary to change the calibration. Do not attempt the procedures
in this section unless you are familiar with the operation of D/A and A/D
converters.
Four calibration values for each analog channel are loaded into the Micro PLC flash memory at the
factory: voltage mode gain, voltage mode offset, current mode gain, and current mode offset. These
calibration values can be changed through a Service Request (SVCREQ) function. You can
calibrate the gain and offset values up to 50 times by following the calibration procedure described
in this section. If further calibration is necessary after the allocated number of tries is exhausted,
another set of 50 tries can be made available by updating the firmware.
Default Gains and Offsets
A set of default gains and offsets is maintained in the PLC firmware in case you want to restore
these values for calibration or for other reasons.
For the input channel, in voltage mode, the %AI range of 0 to 32,000 corresponds to 0 to 1,000
counts of the A/D converter. Therefore, the default input voltage gain is 32 and offset is 0. In
current mode, the %AI range of 0 to 500 corresponds to 0 to 32,000 counts, so that default current
gain is 64 and offset is 0.
The values for the A/D converter are fixed. In voltage mode, the input channel A/D range of 0 to
1,000 counts corresponds to a 0 to 10,000mV input signal. Therefore, the default input voltage gain
is 10 and offset is 0. In current mode, the input channel A/D range of 0 to 500 counts corresponds
to a 0 to 20,000µA input signal, for a gain of 40 and an offset of 0.
Input Channel Formula: %AI = (A/D count x Default Gain) + Offset
Table 7-4. Input Channel Gain and Offset
Mode
Fixed Gain
Converter/Input
Point
Range
A/D Converter
Range
%AI
Default Gain
%AI/Converter
Default
Offset
Voltage Mode (0–10,000mV)
10
0 – 1,000 counts
0 – 32,000
32
0
Current Mode (0–20,000µA)
40
0 – 500 counts
0 – 32,000
64
0
Current Mode (4–20,000µA)
40
100 – 500 counts
0 – 32,000
64
0
For the output channel, the D/A range of 0 to 4,000 corresponds to a range of 0 – 32,000 in %AQ,
giving a gain of 0.125 and an offset of 0 for both modes.
The values for the D/A converter are fixed. The output channel D/A range of 0 to 4,000 counts
corresponds to 0 to 10,000mV in voltage mode and to 0 to 20,000µA in current mode. Therefore,
the default output voltage gain is 2.5 and current gain is 5, leaving offsets of 0 for both modes.
Output Channel Formula: D/A count = (%AQ x Default Gain) + Offset
GFK-1065F
Chapter 7 Analog I/O
7-9
7
Table 7-5. Default Output Channel Calibration Values
Mode
Fixed Gain
Converter/Output
Point
Range
D/A Converter
Range
%AQ
Default Gain
%AQ/Converter
Default
Offset
Voltage Mode (0–10,000mV)
2.5
0 – 4,000 counts
0 – 32,000
0.125
0
Current Mode (0–20,000µA)
5
0 – 4,000 counts
0 – 32,000
0.125
0
Current Mode (4000–20,000µA)
5
800 – 4,000 counts
0 – 32,000
0.125
0
Calibration Procedure
To perform the calibration procedures you will need a precision analog meter (1mV voltage
accuracy and 1µA current accuracy).
Calibration of Input Channels
For each channel, the procedure consists of the following steps:
1.
Apply a reference voltage or current at a low range to the input. (The reference signal must be
measured precisely by a precision analog meter.) Record the value.
2.
For the channel being calibrated, read the %AI register and record the low value.
3.
Apply a reference voltage or current at a high range to the input. Precisely measure the
reference signal and record the value.
4.
For the channel being calibrated, read the %AI register and record the high value.
5.
Store the calculated gain and offset values in RAM or flash memory using a SVCREQ
instruction. (See “Storing Calibration Constants.”)
The Micro PLC firmware will automatically calculate the calibration gain and offset using the
following formulas:
Gain =
MeterHigh − MeterLow
% AI High − % AI Low
Offset = MeterHigh −
7-10
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
× DefaultGain
% AI High × Gain
DefaultGain
GFK-1065F
7
Calibration of Output Channels
For each channel, the procedure consists of the following steps:
1.
Write a low value to the %AQ register.
2.
At the output, measure the voltage or current using a precision analog meter and record the
value.
3.
Write a high value to the %AQ register.
4.
At the output, measure the voltage or current using a precision analog meter and record the
value.
5.
Store the calculated gain and offset values in RAM or flash memory using a SVCREQ
instruction. (See “Storing Calibration Constants.”)
The Micro PLC firmware will automatically calculate the calibration gain and offset using the
following formulas:
Gain =
% AQHigh − % AQLow
MeterHigh − MeterLow
xDefaultGain
Offset = % AQHigh × DefaultGain − MeterHigh × Gain
GFK-1065F
Chapter 7 Analog I/O
7-11
7
Storing Calibration Constants
The final step of calibrating an analog channel consists of storing the calibration values in flash
memory. This step requires the use of two SVCREQ functions:
SVCREQ 34 signals the Micro PLC to enter calibration mode. When SVCREQ 34 is received,
the PLC uses default gain and offset so that you can start the calibration process. No parameter
block is needed.
SVCREQ 35 performs the calibration. This function requires a parameter block containing the
calibration data and control data. Based on these inputs, the PLC computes the gain and offset
for each channel and mode specified. When the calibration SVCREQ is successfully
completed, the new calibration values will take effect.
The parameter block for SVCREQ 35 contains the 32 input words and 2 output words listed in
Table 7-5. After the SVCREQ function executes, the PLC returns the function status and the
number of tries available to the 2 output words.
Note
The third parameter in the block, Destination Control (at address +2), determines
whether to write the constants in flash or in RAM. You can select the RAM
option and calibrate as many times as necessary without burning the calibration
constants into the flash memory. When you are satisfied with the calibration, you
can select the flash option and finalize the calibration process. When the flash
option is selected, the calibration data is copied into RAM as well as burned into
flash memory.
It is important to issue a SVCREQ with the flash option selected in the
Destination Control parameter field once the desired calibration state is reached.
Otherwise, the new calibration values will be lost when the unit is powered off.
For detailed information on using SVCREQ functions, refer to the Series 90-30/20/Micro
Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467.
SVCREQ Parameters
enable
FNC
PARM
ok
When enable is energized, the requested service is performed.
FNC contains the constant or reference for the requested service. This can be any type of
memory except for %S.
PARM contains the beginning reference for the parameter block for the requested
service. This can be any type of word memory (%R, %AI, or %AQ)
The ok output is energized when the function is performed without error.
Example:
In this example, when the enabling
input %I0001 is on, SVCREQ function
number 35 is called, with the
parameter block starting at %R0001.
Output coil %Q0001 is set on if the
operation succeeds.
7-12
%I0001
%Q0001
SVC_
REQ
CONST
00035
%R0001
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
FNC
PARM
GFK-1065F
7
Table 7-6. SVCREQ 35 Parameter Block
Description
Password (“CA” 4143H)
GFK-1065F
Location
address
Password (“LB” 424CH)
address + 1
Destination Control: 0 for RAM, 1 for flash
address + 2
Select Control AI Ch 1 Vol: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 3
Input Channel 1 %AI18 High Value, Voltage
address + 4
Input Channel 1 %AI18 Low Value, Voltage
address + 5
Input Channel 1 Meter High Value, Voltage
address + 6
Input Channel 1 Meter Low Value, Voltage
address + 7
Select Control AI Ch 1 Cur: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 8
Input Channel 1 %AI18 High Value, Current
address + 9
Input Channel 1 %AI18 Low Value, Current
address + 10
Input Channel 1 Meter High Value, Current
address + 11
Input Channel 1 Meter Low Value, Current
address + 12
Select Control AI Ch 2 Vol: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 13
Input Channel 2 %AI19 High Value, Voltage
address + 14
Input Channel 2 %AI19 Low Value, Voltage
address + 15
Input Channel 2 Meter High Value, Voltage
address + 16
Input Channel 2 Meter Low Value, Voltage
address + 17
Select Control AI Ch 2 Cur: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 18
Input Channel 2 %AI19 High Value, Current
address + 19
Input Channel 2 %AI19 Low Value, Current
address + 20
Input Channel 2 Meter High Value, Current
address + 21
Input Channel 2 Meter Low Value, Current
address + 22
Select Control AQ Ch 1 Vol: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 23
Output Channel 1 %AQ12 High Value, Voltage
address + 24
Output Channel 1 %AQ12 Low Value, Voltage
address + 25
Output Channel 1 Meter High Value, Voltage
address + 26
Output Channel 1 Meter Low Value, Voltage
address + 27
Select Control AQ Ch 1 Cur: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 28
Output Channel 1 %AQ12 High Value, Current
address + 29
Output Channel 1 %AQ12 Low Value, Current
address + 30
Output Channel 1 Meter High Value, Current
address + 31
Output Channel 1 Meter Low Value, Current
address + 32
Status
address + 33
Number of tries available
address + 34
Chapter 7 Analog I/O
7-13
7
Notes:
Password Password is set to CALB. No calibration operation will be allowed without the
correct password. If an invalid password is provided, the service request will return error 3 in
the status word.
Destination Control Determines whether to write the calibration constants in flash memory
or in RAM.
Select Control
Allows you to calibrate a particular channel in a specific mode. Four
choices are allowed for each channel:
0:
Last user calibration. The last calibration in flash will be used for the channel and
for the mode. (If no user calibration exists, the last factory calibration will be
used.)
1:
New. The firmware will calculate new gain and offset using the values supplied
in the next four words. New calibration value will replace the value in the RAM
or flash as determined by the Destination Control field.
2:
Default. If this option is specified, neither factory nor user calibration value will
be used. Default calibration value will be used.
3:
Factory. If this option is specified, the last factory calibration value will be used.
Status
A status word will be returned by the special service request to notify the user the
result of the service request.
1=Complete
2=Out of tries
3=Invalid password
4=Not in calibration mode
5=Calibration values checksum bad
6=Invalid calibration data
Number of Tries Available Because the number of tries is limited per firmware update, the
number of tries left will be returned by the service request each time it is performed.
7-14
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
Chapter
System Operation
8
This chapter describes system operations of the Series 90 Micro PLC. It includes a discussion of
the PLC system sweep sequences, the system power-up and power-down sequences, system clocks
and timers, system security through password assignment, and the I/O system.
PLC Sweep Summary
The logic program in a PLC executes in a repetitive fashion until stopped by a command from the
programmer or by a command from another device, such as a host computer. This repetitive cycle,
which includes the sequence of operations necessary to execute a program one time, is called a
sweep. In addition to executing the logic program, the sweep includes obtaining data from input
devices, sending data to output devices, performing internal housekeeping, and servicing the
programmer (see Figure 8-1).
The following configuration items affect the Series 90 Micro PLC sweep:
Stop Mode:
Stop with I/O Disabled
Constant Sweep Mode:
GFK-1065F
Stop with I/O Enabled
Enable/Disable
8-1
8
A
Start-of-sweep
Housekeeping
I/O
Enabled
?
Housekeeping
No
Yes
B
Input Scan
Data
Input
No
Run
Mode
?
YES
C
Application
Logic Solution
Program
Execution
Scan
Time
of
PLC
I/O
Enabled
?
No
Yes
D
Data
Output
Output Scan
Programmer
Attached?
No
Yes
Communications
Services
E
Communications
Services
Start Next Sweep
Figure 8-1. PLC Sweep Sequence
8-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
8
Sweep Time Contribution
Five items contribute to the sweep time of the PLC. The sweep time consists of fixed times
(housekeeping and diagnostics) and variable times. The variable times vary according to the I/O
configuration, size of the user program, and the type of programming device connected to the PLC.
Table 8-1. Sweep Time Contribution
Time Contribution
(ms)
Time Contribution
(ms)
Sweep Element
Description
14-Point
23 and 28-Point
A
Housekeeping
• Schedule start of next sweep
• Determine mode of next sweep
• Update fault reference tables
• Reset watchdog timer
0.368
0.196
B
Data Input
Input data received
On DC-input units, B is increased by an amount
determined by the discrete input filter time (see
formula below).*
C
Program
Execution
User logic solved
Execution time is dependent on the length of the
program and the types of instructions used in the
program. Instruction execution times are listed in
Appendix A.
D
Data Output
Output data sent
0.1656
0.121
E
Communications
Services
Service requests from
programming device
Logicmaster 90: 0.380
HHP: 1.93
Logicmaster 90: 0.095
HHP: 0.333
*B for 14-point Micro PLC
0.365 + 0.036
filtertime × ( A + C + D + E )
0.5
filtertime × ( A + C + D + E )
0.5
To determine filter time, see “Discrete Input Filtering” on page 8-16.
*B for 23 and 28-point Micro PLCs
0.417 + 0.006
Housekeeping
The housekeeping portion of the sweep performs all of the tasks necessary to prepare for the start
of the sweep. If the PLC is in the constant sweep mode, the sweep will be delayed until the
required sweep time elapses. If the required time has already elapsed, the ov_swp %SA0002
contact is set and the sweep continues without delay.
Next, the timer values (hundredths, tenths, and seconds) are updated by calculating the difference
between the start of the previous sweep and the new sweep time. To maintain accuracy, the actual
start of sweep is recorded in 100 microsecond increments. Each timer has a remainder field which
contains the number of 100 microsecond ticks that have occurred since the last time the timer value
was incremented.
Input Scan
During this part of the sweep, all Series 90 Micro inputs are scanned, from lowest to highest
reference address, and their data stored in %I (discrete inputs) or %AI (analog inputs) memory, as
appropriate. The %AI1 through %AI15 analog inputs are used by the High Speed Counter. If the
CPU is in STOP mode and the I/OScan-Stop parameter is configured to NO, the input scan will be
skipped.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 8 System Operation
8-3
8
Program Execution
The application program is executed by the microprocessor on the CPU board. The logic solution
always begins with the first instruction in the application program immediately following the
completion of the input scan. Solving the logic provides a new set of outputs. The logic solution
ends when the END instruction is executed.
The program control capabilities provided by the Control functions are described in the Series 9030/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467, and in the Hand-Held
Programmer User’s Manual for Series 90-30/90-20 Programmable Controllers, GFK-0402. A list
of execution times for each programming function can be found in Appendix A.
Output Scan
During the output scan, Micro PLC outputs are scanned from lowest to highest reference address.
Outputs are updated using data from the %Q (for discrete outputs) memories. The output scan is
completed when all output data has been sent to all Micro PLC outputs.
If the CPU is in STOP mode and the I/OScan-Stop parameter is configured to NO, the output scan
will be skipped and outputs will be cleared.
If the CPU is in STOP mode with I/O scan enabled (I/OScan-Stop configured to YES), the scan is
executed, and the outputs will be updated using data from the %Q memories.
Programmer Service
This part of the sweep is dedicated to communicating with the programmer. If there is a
programmer attached, the CPU executes the Programmer Communications Window (Figure 8-2).
Support is provided for the HHP and for other programmers that can connect to the serial port and
use the Series Ninety Protocol (SNP) protocol.
The CPU performs one operation for the programmer each sweep, that is, it honors one service
request or responds to one key press. If the programmer makes a request that requires more than 6
milliseconds to process, the request processing will be spread out over several sweeps so that no
sweep is impacted by more than 6 milliseconds.
8-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
8
Start
Not
attached
Not
attached
Previous
status
?
Attached
Hand-Held
Attached
Programmer
attached
status
Not
attached
Previous
Status
?
No
Programmer
request
?
Abort
operation
in progress
Setup for
Hand-Held
Programmer
Key
Pressed
?
No
Yes
Yes
Process request
Attached
Setup for
Series 90
protocol
Send initial
display
Process key
Send new display
Stop
Figure 8-2. Programmer Communications Window Flow Chart
Deviations from the Standard Program Sweep
The user can select certain deviations from the Standard Program Sweep by configuration or by
program instructions. These variations are described in the following paragraphs.
Constant Sweep Time Mode
In the Standard Program Sweep, each sweep executes as quickly as possible with a varying amount
of time consumed each sweep. An alternative to this is the Constant Sweep Time mode. In the
Constant Sweep Time mode, each sweep consumes the same amount of time, which can be selected
during configuration to be from 5 to 200 milliseconds. For more information on the constant sweep
timer, refer to “Clocks and Timers” on page 8-11.
PLC Sweep When in STOP Mode
When the PLC is in STOP mode, the application program is not executed. In this mode, you can
choose whether or not the I/O is scanned, and communications with the programmer will continue.
For efficiency, the operating system uses larger time-slice values than those that are typically used
in RUN mode (usually about 50 ms per window).
GFK-1065F
Chapter 8 System Operation
8-5
8
Software Structure
The Series 90 software structure supports program execution and basic housekeeping tasks such as
diagnostic routines, input/output scanners, and alarm processing. The operating system also
contains routines to communicate with the programmer; these routines provide for the uploading
and downloading of application programs, return of status information, and control of the PLC. The
application (user logic) program, which controls the end process to which the PLC is applied, is
called a control program.
Program Structure
Each control program is comprised of a single program block. This includes the user program and
some system overhead. The program block must be less than or equal to 3K words (14-point units)
or 6K words (23-point and 28 point units).
Data Structure
The Series 90 Micro PLC has nine data memories, each designed for a specific purpose. The
following table lists these memories. (For a list of reserved memory addresses, see Appendix B.)
Table 8-2. Memory Data Types
Memory Type
User Reference
Data Type
Discrete Input
%I
bit
Discrete Output
%Q
bit
Discrete User Internals
%M
bit
Discrete Temporaries
%T
bit
Discrete System
%S
bit
Discrete Global
%G
bit
Register
%R
word
Analog Input
%AI
word
Analog Output
%AQ
word
Note: The % symbol is used to distinguish machine references from nicknames and is only
used with Logicmaster 90.
Table 8-3. Discrete Memory Reference Definitions
Type
8-6
Definition
Function
%I
Discrete reference input point
The state of the input as detected during the last input scan.
%Q
Discrete reference output point
The state of the output as last set by the application
program.
%M
User internal
Internal coil used for boolean logic when the result of a
rung is only required to be used later in the program as
conditional logic.
%T
Temporary
Internal coil – similar to %M reference except that it is
non-retentive.
%S
System discretes
(S, SA, SB, SC)
Include system bits used internally by the CPU, fault bits
for holding system fault data, and reserved bits for future
system expansion.
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
8
Notes for Discrete Memory Definitions
•
Temporary, %T, references are not saved across a power failure; that is, they are nonretentive. %M and %Q memories are retentive unless used with a “normal” coil,
––( )––, which is non-retentive. Retentive memory is backed up by a super cap (14-point)
or lithium battery (23-point and 28-point). For performance specifications for the super
cap and battery, see “Specifications” in Chapter 2.
•
User internals (%M) are useful when the coil in a rung is only required to be used later in
the logic solution as conditional logic and not outside the PLC. The following example
shows %I0012 and %I0016 being used to set user internal %M0005, similar to the use of a
control relay in electromechanical logic.
|%I0012
%I0016
%M0005
|——] [——————] [————————————————————————( )———
|
•
System discretes (S, SA, SB, SC) include: system bits, used internally by the CPU; fault
bits, for holding system fault data; and reserved bits, for future system expansion.
Many of the fault bits are referenced by the application program to determine what faults
exist in the Series 90 Micro PLC system. Examples of these fault contacts are over sweep
condition (ov_swp), and low battery (low_bat). The first scan contact (fst_scn) also
resides here. Refer to Chapter 9 for more information on Fault bits.
•
GFK-1065F
Transition bits are discrete memory locations used internally by the PLC when solving
logic that involves transitional coils. This data is not accessible to the user. The PLC sets
and resets this transition data based upon changes in the associated status table.
Chapter 8 System Operation
8-7
8
Powerup and Power-Down Sequence
Powerup Sequence
The powerup sequence for the Micro PLC consists of the following events, as shown in Figure 8-3.
1.
The CPU runs self-diagnostics. This includes checking a portion of RAM to determine whether
or not the RAM contains valid data. (Powerup diagnostics can be disabled through hardware
configuration. It is recommended that you not use this feature unless your application requires
unusually rapid powerup. For details, see “Fast Powerup” in the index.)
2.
The hardware configuration is compared with the software configuration. Any mismatches
detected constitute faults and are alarmed.
3.
If there is no software configuration, the CPU will use the default configuration.
4.
In the final step of the execution, the mode of the first sweep is determined based on CPU
configuration. Figure 8-3 shows the decision sequence followed by the CPU when it decides
whether to copy from flash memory or to power-up in STOP or RUN mode. In the figure, text
in bold refers to commands entered using the Hand-Held Programmer or the Logicmaster 90
software.
Command
clear
ld_not
ostop
HHP Key Combination
Press CLR and M/T simultaneously (using HHP)
Press LD and NOT simultaneously (using HHP)
Press NOT and RUN simultaneously (using HHP)
Power-Down Conditions
System power-down occurs automatically if the power supply detects that incoming AC power has
dropped. The minimum hold time is one half cycle.
Note
During a gradual power down, when the input power supply voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage, the Micro PLC may power off and then power on
again until the input voltage drops low enough to prevent power on again. You
should take precautions if this type of behavior cannot be tolerated in your
application.
8-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
8
Power Cycle
Table 8-4 lists the effects that a power cycle can have on Micro PLC operation under specific
conditions.
Table 8-4. Effects of a Power Cycle
Condition
Micro PLC loses power during a program store
operation
If system includes expansion unit(s):
Micro PLC base unit loses power before the
expansion unit(s)
Expansion unit(s) lose power before the Micro
PLC base unit while Micro PLC is scanning I/O
Micro PLC base unit powers up before the
expansion unit(s)
Expansion unit(s) power up before the Micro
PLC base unit
GFK-1065F
Chapter 8 System Operation
Effects
Configuration and reference tables will be deleted from
flash memory. You will need to restore not only your
program, but the configuration and reference tables.
Expansion units will be reset (all outputs will be set to
zero)
A Loss of Expansion Module fault will be logged.
If expansion units do not power up within approximately
3 seconds, a Loss of Expansion Module fault will be
logged.
Expansion unit outputs remain off until the Micro base
unit completes powerup and begins scanning I/O.
8-9
8
Start
Clear
True
False
False
ROM checksum
good?
Run from
RAM
True
False
False
Run from
ROM
True
RAM checksum
good?
ld_not
True
True
False
True
Run from
RAM
False
False
True
STOP mode
Copy flash to RAM
RAM checksum False
good?
Clear RAM
program
True
ostop
True
False
Power up in
STOP mode
True
False
Power up in
RUN mode
True
False
True
Battery voltage
low
False
True
Power down in
STOP mode
False
RUN mode
STOP mode
Figure 8-3. Powerup Decision Sequence
8-10
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
8
Clocks and Timers
Elapsed Time Clock
The Elapsed Time Clock uses 100-microsecond “ticks” to track the time elapsed since the CPU
powered-on. The clock is not retentive across a power failure; it restarts on each power-up. Once
per second the hardware interrupts the CPU to enable a seconds count to be recorded. This seconds
count rolls over approximately 100 years after the clock begins timing. Because the elapsed time
clock provides the base for system software operations and timer function blocks, it cannot be reset
from the user program or the programmer. However, the application program can read the current
value of the elapsed time clock by using Function Number 16 of the SVC_REQ function.
Time of Day Clock (23 and 28-Point Micro PLCs)
This clock maintains the current time and date in 28-point Micro PLCs. These settings can be
displayed and changed using the CPU configuration function in the Logicmaster 90 software. You
can also use the SVCREQ function number 7 within a Logicmaster 90 program to read and set the
time-of-day clock in the Micro PLC. Refer to the Series 90™-30/20/Micro Programmable
Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-4067, for information on using the SVCREQ instruction.
Watchdog Timer
The Watchdog Timer in the Micro PLC is designed to catch catastrophic failure conditions. The
timer value for the Watchdog Timer is 200 milliseconds; this is a fixed value which cannot be
changed. The Watchdog Timer starts from zero at the beginning of each sweep. If the Watchdog
timeout value is exceeded, the CPU goes through its power-up sequence and the PLC is left in
STOP-FAULT mode with a Watchdog Timer fault recorded.
To achieve a watchdog timeout value greater than 200ms, which the Micro PLC requires, the
watchdog function is implemented as a two step process. Because the watchdog timer has a
maximum timeout of 100ms, the time is first programmed as an interval timer that generates an
interrupt after 100ms. If this time elapses, the firmware then programs the timer as a watchdog
timer which will reset the microprocessor after an additional 105ms. The second step does not
usually occur unless the user program is greater than 100ms. Therefore, if a device holds the wait
line before the second step occurs (which only occurs if the user program is greater than 100ms),
the microprocessor will hang because it can never service the interrupt service routine that
programs the second step of the process.
Constant Sweep Timer
This timer controls the length of a program sweep when the Series 90 Micro PLC operates in
Constant Sweep Time mode. In this mode, each sweep consumes the same amount of time. For
most application programs, the Input Scan, Application Program Logic Scan, and Output Scan do
not require exactly the same amount of execution time in each sweep. The value of the Constant
Sweep Timer is set by the programmer and can be any value from 5 to 200 milliseconds. The
default value is 100 ms.
If the Constant Sweep Timer expires before the completion of the sweep, and the previous sweep
was not complete, the PLC places an over-sweep alarm in the PLC Fault table. At the beginning of
the next sweep, the PLC sets the ov_swp fault contact. This contact is reset when the PLC is not in
Constant Sweep Time mode or if the last sweep did not exceed the Constant Sweep Timer.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 8 System Operation
8-11
8
Timer Function Blocks
The Micro PLC supports two types of timer function blocks in the Logicmaster 90 software: an ondelay timer, and a start-reset timer.
Timed Contacts
Four timed contacts, each of which cycles on and off for a specified interval, are available in the
Logicmaster 90 software: 0.01 second, 0.1 second, 1 second, and 1 minute.
8-12
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
8
System Security
Overview
Security in the Series 90 Micro PLC is designed to restrict access to selected PLC functions. The
Series 90 Micro PLC supports two types of system security: password protection and OEM
protection. Both types of protection can be accessed through the Status and Control portion of the
Logicmaster 90 software or the Hand-Held Programmer.
Password protection and OEM protection are described briefly here. Refer to the Logicmaster™ 90
Series 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466, or the Hand-Held
Programmer User’s Manual, GFK-0402, for further details on the use of these system security
features.
Password Protection
Privilege Levels
There are four security or privilege levels in the PLC password system. The default level (level 4),
in a system with no passwords, allows read and write access to all configuration, logic, and data
memories. Levels 2 through 4 can be protected by a password.
There is one password for each of levels 2 through 4 in the PLC, and each password may be
unique; however, the same password can be used for more than one level. Passwords can only be
entered or changed using the Logicmaster 90 Micro programmer or the HHP. Passwords are one to
four ASCII characters in length. The HHP only allows the ASCII characters 0 to 9 and A to F.
The privileges granted at each level are a combination of that level, plus all lower levels. The levels
and their privileges are:
Level 1
Any data, except passwords, may be read. This includes all data memories (%I, %Q, %AQ,
%R, etc.), fault tables, and all program block types: data, value, and constant. No values may
be changed in the PLC. This is the default level for a system with passwords at all levels.
Level 2
This level allows level 1 privileges plus write access to the data memories (%I, %R, etc.).
Level 3
This level allows levels 1 and 2 privileges plus write access to the application program in
STOP mode only.
Level 4
This is the default level in a system with no passwords assigned. This level, the highest, allows
the privileges of levels 1 through 3, plus read and write access to all memories, and the ability
to display, set, or delete passwords for levels 1 through 3 in both RUN and STOP modes
(configuration data can be written only in STOP mode).
GFK-1065F
Chapter 8 System Operation
8-13
8
Privilege Level Change Requests
To enter or change passwords, the programmer must be in on-line mode and communicating with
the PLC. Entering or changing passwords requires access to the highest level. If no passwords have
been set up for the system, this level is automatically available.
Note
Once passwords have been entered, they can only be changed by:
•
Entering the correct password to access the highest-level privileges.
•
In the configuration software, by placing the master diskette in the system disk drive
of the computer and pressing the ALT and O keys. (It is important to keep the
original software master diskettes in a secure location because this allows passwords
to be overridden.)
A programmer requests a privilege level change by supplying the new privilege level and the
password for that level. A privilege level change will be denied if the password sent by the
programmer does not agree with the password stored in the PLC’s password access table for the
requested level. If you attempt to access or modify information in the PLC using the HHP without
the proper privilege level, the HHP will respond with an error message stating that access is denied.
When communicating over a serial link, a privilege level change remains in effect only as long as
communications between the PLC and the programmer are intact. There does not need to be any
activity, but the communications link must not be broken. If there is no communication for 15
seconds, the privilege level returns to the highest unprotected level.
When the Logicmaster 90 Micro programmer is connected through the serial connection, the
programmer could detect a disconnect. If the PLC addresses the programmer and receives no
response, the PLC detects a disconnect and then drops the programmer privilege level to the default
privilege level (level 4). The PLC detects a disconnect of the HHP using a dedicated hardware
signal. When the HHP is disconnected, the PLC reverts to privilege level 4. Upon connection of the
PLC, Logicmaster 90 requests the protection status of each privilege level from the PLC.
Logicmaster 90 then requests the PLC to move to the highest unprotected level, thereby giving the
programmer access to the highest unprotected level without its having to request any particular
level. When the HHP is connected to the PLC, the PLC reverts to the highest unprotected level.
OEM Protection
The OEM protection feature provides a higher level of security than password protection and is
used by an original equipment manufacturer to further restrict access to program logic and
configuration parameters. When OEM protection is enabled (locked), the user has no access to the
logic program, and read-only access to the configuration. The OEM protection state is retentive
across a power cycle.
Refer to the Logicmaster™ 90 Series 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual,
GFK-0466, and to the Logicmaster 90 on-line HELP screens for details on the use of this feature.
8-14
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
8
I/O System for the Series 90 Micro PLC
The I/O system for the Series 90 Micro PLC provides the interface between the Series 90 Micro
CPU and the user-supplied input devices and equipment to be controlled. As shown in Figure 8-4,
the I/O Scanner writes to %AI, %I, and %M memory and reads from %AQ and %Q memory. It can
read and write to %G memory.
a45437
W ord
D a ta
D is c r e te
M e m ory
% AI
% AQ
% R
% I
% T
% G
% S
% Q
I/O
Scanner
I/O C o n fig u r a tio n
D ata
% M
1 6 B Iit s
1 B it
Micro PLC
B ackplane
P o te ntio m e te rs
% A I1 6 , % A I1 7
D is c re te
In p u t
P o int s
D is c re te
O utput
P o in ts
Figure 8-4. Series 90 Micro PLC I/O Structure
I/O Scan Sequence
For more information on scanning and the CPU sweep, refer to the discussion on pages 8-3 through
8-4.
Input Scan
Inputs to the Series 90 Micro PLC are scanned from the lowest to the highest
reference address.
Output Scan
Outputs are scanned during the Output Scan portion of the sweep, immediately
following the Logic Solution. Outputs are scanned in the same order as for the
Input Scan; from lowest to highest reference address.
Default Conditions for Micro PLC Output Points
At power-up, output points default to OFF. They retain this default condition until the first output
scan from the PLC occurs.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 8 System Operation
8-15
8
Software Filters
Note
Software filtering is effective on DC-input units only (IC693UAL006 and
IC693UDR001/002/005/010).
Discrete Input Filtering
Discrete Input Filtering Control
Filter control reference
Discrete input filtering (%I inputs) is done via software that allows
you to change the filtering time on the fly. The filter time for the
discrete inputs is adjustable from 0.5ms to 20ms in 0.5ms increments.
The memory location %AQ11 is used to store the filter time value. To
adjust the filter time, simply change the value in %AQ11.
Each value in %AQ11 represents one 0.5ms increment. For example,
if you set %AQ11 to a value of 10, the filter time will be 5ms. If you
set %AQ11 to 5, the filter time will be 2.5ms. The minimum value for
%AQ11 is 1 (0.5ms) and the maximum value is 40 (20ms). Due to
PLC limits, any value under 1 in %AQ11 represents a filter time of
0.5ms, and any value over 40 represents a filter time of 20ms.
Note
Because %AQ11 is used to control the discrete input filtering time, it is
recommended that you not use %AQ11 for any other purpose.
Default filter
time
Accuracy of
filter
The default value for %AQ11 is 6, which represents a filter time of 3ms.
The filter time set in %AQ11 will be accurate within ±0.5ms.
Limitations of Discrete Input Filtering
What a discrete input will not
scan.
What a discrete input will scan.
8-16
This software filter only lets in signals that have a duration
within ±0.5ms of the set filter time. For example, if the
filtering time is set to 5ms, it could allow any signal that is
greater than 4.5ms to be seen as an input.
What will be read on an input is not solely based on the
input filter setting. It is also based on the scan time. An
input will always be seen if it is longer than both the scan
time and the filter time.
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
8
Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering
Input Settings
Two potentiometers, located on the front panel of the Micro PLC, allow you to manually set input
values that are stored in %AI16 and %AI17. The top potentiometer controls %AI16, and the
bottom one controls %AI17.
Filter Control Reference
Due to the nature of analog input, the values seen in %AI16 and %AI17 will have some fluctuation.
This variation could make these inputs unusable for some applications. The Series 90 Micro PLC
uses an averaging filter to stabilize these inputs.
The filter used on %AI16 and %AI17 samples the values on these inputs once per sweep. When a
predetermined number of samples has been read, it averages them and stores the result in %AI16
and %AI17.
The value in memory reference %AQ1 controls the number of samples to be averaged, calculated
as follows:
Number of samples = 2%AQ1
For example, if 4 is placed in %AQ1, 16 samples will be averaged to determine the values to place
in %AI16 and %AI17. If 5 is placed in %AQ1, 32 samples will be averaged. You can place any
value in %AQ1, however, only the lower 3 bits of %AQ1 are recognized, giving a minimum value
of 0 and a maximum value of 7 (for 0 through 128 samples).
The analog value from the potentiometer is not reported until the number of sweeps determined by
the value in AQ1 has occurred. If you want to receive a value from the potentiometer on every
sweep, including the first sweep, AQ1 must contain 0.
Default Filter Time
The default value in %AQ1 is 4, meaning that 16 samples will be averaged.
Limitations of Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering
As with any filter, the longer the filter time (i.e., the more samples that are taken), the longer the
response time. Although the maximum value of 7 could be used in %AQ1, this value might cause a
long response time on larger programs. For example, if the sweep time of a program is 100ms, and
if the potentiometer value is changed, the new value would not show up for 12.8 seconds.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 8 System Operation
8-17
8
Diagnostic Data
Diagnostic bits are available in the %S memory. Diagnostic information is not available for
individual I/O points. Refer to Chapter 9 for more information on fault handling.
Flash Memory
The Series 90 Micro PLC provides flash memory for non-volatile user-program storage and for
system firmware. In addition, the Read/Write/Verify EE/Flash PROM with PLC User Memory
function, initiated from either Logicmaster 90 or the HHP, uses flash memory for storage of the
configuration and reference data.
Because the user program is stored in non-volatile flash memory, only one copy is maintained in
flash memory, even after the user invokes the Write to EEPROM/FLASH function in the
programming/configuration software or with the HHP. (Separate copies of the user configuration
and the reference tables are maintained in the EEPROM/FLASH areas of the flash memory.) The
Configuration entry Cfg From determines only whether the user configuration is obtained from
RAM or PROM. The user program is always read from flash (PROM) memory.
In addition, be aware that editing the user program with the HHP stores the edited copy of the
program in RAM memory. If you do not save the edited version of the program to flash memory,
the changes will be lost. See “Storing the User Program Using the HHP” in Chapter 5, for the key
sequence for this procedure.
Table 8-5. Settings for Cfg From Parameter
Default Settings
Read From
Location
Configuration
Program
Registers
RAM
X
N/A
X
EPROM/FLASH
–
X
–
Recommended Settings
Read From
Location
8-18
Configuration
Program
Registers
RAM
–
N/A
X
EPROM/FLASH
X
X
X
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
Chapter
Diagnostics
9
This chapter provides a guide to troubleshooting the Micro PLC and consists of two sections:
GFK-1065F
•
Powerup Diagnostics describes how to use the LED blink codes that the Micro PLC generates
if the unit fails the power-up self-test described in Chapter 3.
•
Faults and Fault Handling discusses how the Micro PLC handles system faults. These faults
can be diagnosed and corrected using the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP.
9-1
9
Powerup Diagnostics
If the Micro PLC fails the powerup self-test, it will generate an error message in the form of an
LED blink code.
Note
Powerup diagnostics can be disabled using the Logicmaster 90 configuration
software. Unless your application requires unusually fast powerup, it is
recommended that you leave this feature enabled. Disabling powerup diagnostics
has the following effects:
The I/O Link Interface Expansion Unit will not work.
No expansion units can be used. (If expansion units are connected while powerup
diagnostics are disabled, faults will be logged in the I/O tables.)
All HHP key sequences will be ignored when the Micro PLC is powering up.
Table 9-1. Powerup Diagnostic LED Blink Error Codes
Number of Blinks
9-2
RUN LED
OK LED
Error
1
1
Flags or ALU failed
1
2
Bad registers
1
3
Bad stack mechanism
1
4
Bad stack memory area
1
5
DMA 0 transfer failed
1
6
DMA 1 transfer failed
1
7
DMA 2 transfer failed
1
8
DMA 3 transfer failed
1
9
Addr line fail
2
1
Timer 0 not counting
2
2
Timer 1 not counting
2
3
Timer 2 not counting
2
4
Timer 3 not counting
2
5
Timer 4 not counting
2
6
Interrupt vector RAM failed
2
7
Bad diagnostics memory area
2
8
Bad cache memory area
3
1
Bad system heap RAM
3
2
WDT (watchdog timer) timeout
3
3
Bad nonvolatile RAM
9
9
Other error
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
9
Faults and Fault Handling
Faults occur in the Series 90 Micro PLC system when certain failures or conditions that affect the
operation and performance of the system occur. These conditions can affect the ability of the PLC
to control a machine or process.
Fault Handling
The condition or failure itself is called a fault. When a fault has been received and processed by the
Alarm Processor software in the CPU, it is called an alarm. The interface to the user for the Alarm
Processor is through the Logicmaster 90 programming software. Any detected fault is recorded in a
Fault Table and displayed on either the PLC Fault Table screen or the I/O Fault Table screens.
More information on faults and fault handling can be found in the Logicmaster Series 90™30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466 and the Logicmaster Series
90™-30/20/Micro 90-30 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual, GFK-0467. For
information on error detection and correction for Statement List programs and the Hand-Held
Programmer, refer to the Hand-Held Programmer, Series 90™-30/20/Micro Programmable
Controllers User’s Manual, GFK-0402.
Classes of Faults
The Micro PLC detects several classes of faults. These include internal failures, external failures,
and operational failures. Following are examples of these failures.
•
Internal Failures
†
†
•
Sequence fault
Operational Failures
†
†
†
GFK-1065F
Memory checksum errors
External Failures
†
•
Non-responding circuit boards
Communication failures
Configuration failures
Password access failures
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
9-3
9
System Response to Faults
Some faults can be tolerated, while others require that the system be shut down. I/O failures may be
tolerated by the PLC system, but may be intolerable by the application or the process being
controlled. Operational failures can normally be tolerated. Micro PLC faults have two attributes:
Fault Table Affected:
Fault Action:
I/O Fault Table
PLC Fault Table
Fatal
Diagnostic
Informational
Fatal faults are recorded in the appropriate table, diagnostic variables (if any) are set, and the
system is halted. Diagnostic faults are recorded in the appropriate table and any diagnostic
variables are set. Informational faults are only recorded in the appropriate table. Fault actions are
listed in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2. Fault Actions
Fault Action
Response by CPU
Fatal
Log fault in Fault Table
Set fault references
Go to STOP/FAULT mode
Diagnostic
Log fault in Fault Table
Set fault references
Informational
Log fault in Fault Table
Table 9-3 lists the fault groups, their fault actions, the Fault Tables affected, and the mnemonic for
system discrete %S points that are affected.
9-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
9
Table 9-3. Fault Summary
Fault Group
Fault Table
Special Discretes
System Configuration Mismatch
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
cfg_mm
PLC CPU Hardware Failure
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
hrd_cpu
Program Checksum Failure
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
pb_sum
PLC Fault Table Full
Diagnostic
-
sy_full
I/O Fault Table Full
Diagnostic
-
io_full
Application Fault
Diagnostic
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
apl_flt
No User Program on Power-up
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
no_prog
Corrupted User RAM
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
bad_ram
Password Access Failure
Diagnostic
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
bad_pwd
PLC Software Failure
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
sft_cpu
PLC Store Failure
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
stor_er
Constant Sweep Time Exceeded
Diagnostic
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
ov_swp
Unknown PLC Fault
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy_pres
Unknown I/O Fault
Fatal
I/O Fault Table
io_flt
any_flt
io_pres
Loss of Expansion Unit*
Diagnostic
I/O Fault Table
io_flt
any_flt
io_pres
Addition of Expansion Unit
Diagnostic
I/O Fault Table
io_flt
any_flt
io_pres
Expansion Unit Configuration
Mismatch
Fatal
PLC Fault Table
sy_flt
any_flt
sy-pres
*
GFK-1065F
Fault Action
los_iom
add_iom
cfg_mm
If the Micro PLC logs a Loss of Expansion Unit fault while scanning the input data from the
I/O Link IEU, the input reference memory data will be set to all zeroes.
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
9-5
9
Fault Summary References
Fault summary references are set to indicate what fault occurred. The fault reference remains on
until the PLC is cleared or until the application program clears the fault.
An example of a fault bit being set and then clearing the bit is shown in the following example. In
this example, the coil light_01 is turned on when an over sweep condition occurs. The light and the
ov_swp contact remain on until the %I0035 contact is closed.
| ov_swp
light_01
|——] [———————————————————————————————————————————————————————( )———
|
|%I0035
ov_swp
|——] [———————————————————————————————————————————————————————(R)———
|
Fault Reference Definitions
The Alarm Processor maintains the states of the 128 system discrete bits in %S memory. These
fault references can be used to indicate where a fault has occurred, and what type of fault it is. Fault
references are assigned, with a nickname, to %S, %SA, %SB, and %SC memory. These references
are available for use in the application program as required. The mnemonic for these discrete bits
and a description of each bit is provided in Table 9-4. Some discrete bits are reserved for future
use.
9-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
9
Table 9-4. System Discrete References
Reference
Nickname
Definition
%S0001
fst_scn
First Scan (Set to 1 when the current sweep is the first sweep.)
%S0002
lst_scn
Last Scan (Reset from 1 to 0 when the current sweep is the last sweep.)
%S0003
T_10MS
0.01 second timer contact
%S0004
T_100MS
0.1 second timer contact
%S0005
T_SEC
1.0 second timer contact
%S0006
T_MIN
1.0 minute timer contact
%S0007
alw_on
Always On
%S0008
alw_off
Always Off
%S0009
sy_full
Set when the PLC Fault Table fills up. Cleared when an entry is removed from the PLC
Fault Table and when the PLC Fault Table is cleared.
%S0010
io_full
Set when the I/O Fault Table fills up. Cleared when an entry is removed from the I/O
Fault Table and when the I/O Fault Table is cleared.
%S0013
prg_chk
Set when background program check is active.
%SA0002
ov_swp
Set when the PLC detects that the previous sweep took longer than the time specified
by the user. Cleared when the PLC detects that the previous sweep did not take
longer than the specified time. It is also cleared during the transition from STOP to
RUN mode.
%SA0003
apl_flt
Set when an application fault occurs. Cleared when the PLC transitions from STOP
mode to RUN mode.
%SA0009
cfg_mm
Set when a configuration mismatch is detected during system power-up. Cleared by
powering-up the PLC when no mismatches are present.
%SA0010
hrd_cpu
Set when the diagnostics detect a problem with the CPU hardware. Cleared by replacing
the CPU module.
%SB0009
no_prog
Set when an attempt is made to put the PLC in RUN mode when there is no executable
application program stored in the CPU. Cleared by storing an application program to
the CPU and putting the PLC in RUN mode.
%SB0010
bad_ram
Set when the CPU detects corrupted RAM memory at power-up. Cleared when the CPU
detects that RAM memory is valid at power-up.
%SB0011
bad_pwd
Set when a password access violation occurs. Cleared when a password is successfully
used to gain a privilege level.
%SB0014
stor_er
Set when an error occurs during a programmer store operation. Cleared when a store
operation is completed successfully.
%SC0009
any_flt
Set when any fault occurs. Cleared when both Fault Tables are cleared.
%SC0010
sy_flt
Set when any fault occurs that causes an entry to be placed in the PLC Fault Table.
Cleared when the PLC Fault Table is cleared.
%SC0011
io_flt
Set when any fault occurs that causes an entry to be placed in the I/O Fault Table.
Cleared when the I/O Fault Table is cleared.
%SC0012
sy_pres
Set as long as there is at least one entry in the PLC Fault Table. Cleared when the PLC
Fault Table has no entries.
%SC0013
io_pres
Set as long as there is at least one entry in the I/O Fault Table. Cleared when the I/O
Fault Table has no entries.
GFK-1065F
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
9-7
9
Fault Results
Two non-configurable faults have results that you should be aware of:
•
PLC CPU Software Failure
Whenever a PLC CPU Software Failure is logged, the Micro PLC immediately goes into a
special Error Sweep mode. The only activity permitted when the PLC is in this mode is
communications with the programmer. The only method of clearing this condition is to reset
the Micro PLC (i.e., cycle power).
•
PLC Sequence Store Failure
A sequence store is the storage of program blocks and other data preceded by the special Startof-Sequence command and ending with the End-of-Sequence command. If communications
with a programming device performing a sequence store is interrupted or if any other failure
occurs that terminates the download, the PLC Sequence Store Failure fault is logged. As long
as this fault is present in the system, the PLC will not transition to RUN mode.
Accessing Additional Fault Information
The Fault Tables contain basic information regarding the fault. If more detailed information is
needed, a hexadecimal dump of the fault can be obtained by positioning the cursor on the fault
entry and pressing the CTRL + F keys simultaneously. The hexadecimal information will be
displayed on the line directly below the function key display.
Two faults, Flash Memory Alarm and Watchdog Timer Application Fault, are unique to the
Series 90 Micro PLC. Refer to the table below for descriptions and corrective actions for these
faults. All other faults applicable to the Series 90 Micro PLC are described in the Logicmaster™
Series 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466.
If you find it necessary to contact Field Service concerning a fault, you should be prepared to tell
them both the information that is readable directly from the Fault Table and the hexadecimal
information you see when you press the CTRL + F keys. Field Service personnel will give you
further instructions.
Table 9-5. PLC CPU Software Faults
Name
Flash Memory Alarm
Error Code
Description
BAD_FLASH_OP = 32
The PLC operating system generates this fault when it detects an internal Flash device error
during a Flash write or erase operation.
Display the PLC Fault Table on the Programmer. Contact GE Fanuc PLC Field Service, giving
them all the information in the Fault Table.
Correction
Name
Error Code
Description
Correction
9-8
Watchdog Timer Application Fault
SFTWR_WD_EXPIRED = 2
The user’s program execution time exceeds the watchdog setting of 200 ms. PLC resets and
goes to STOP-FAULT mode.
Modify user program so time is not exceeded. If the user program is not causing the problem,
make sure any inductive loads being used are properly suppressed. For more information, see
“Output Circuit Protection” in Chapter 4.
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
9
Special Operational Notes
Inaccurate Logic Not Equal Message
When coil use is set to WARN MULTIPLE, Logicmaster 90 software allows multiple coil use with
warning messages. This feature can give misleading feedback for Micro PLCs. If coil references
are added or deleted in the RLD program, the Logic-Not-Equal warning will be displayed. To
correct the inaccurate message, enter the program edit package (press F1), and then select Option
(press F7). From the Multiple Coil Use screen, press F1 to run the coil check function. Storing the
program to the PLC will now result in Logic Equal. You can avoid this problem by disabling the
WARN MULTIPLE feature from the Multiple Coil Use screen. For details, refer to “Coil
Checking” in the Logicmaster™ 90 Series 90™-30/20/Micro Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466.
Technical Help
PLC Hotline
GFK-1065F
Phone numbers
800-433-2682 (or 804-978-6036)
Internet address
[email protected]
Fax number
804-978-5099
GE Fanuc Bulletin Board
Files on this bulletin board are provided by GE Fanuc “as-is” and no
warranties apply. The phone number is 804-975-1300 (up to 33,600
baud, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, no stop bits. After accessing the BBS,
select the BBS File area (PLC:AGENCY STATUS) and the file
(AGENSTDS.XLS). This information is also available on the Internet
at our technical support World Wide Web site at the address:
http://www.gefanucsupport.com
PLC Fax Link
804-978-5824
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
9-9
Appendix Instruction Timing
A
This appendix contains tables listing the memory size in bytes and the execution time in
microseconds for each function supported by the Micro PLC. Memory size is the number of bytes
required by the function in a ladder diagram application program.
Two execution times are shown for each function:
Execution Time
Description
Enabled
Time required to execute the function or function block when power flows into and out
of the function. Typically, best-case times are when the data used by the block is
contained in user RAM (word-oriented memory) and not in the discrete memory.
Disabled
Time required to execute the function when power flows into the function or function
block, however, it is in an inactive state (for example, when a timer is held in the reset
state).
Notes
1.
Times (in microseconds) are based on release 5.0 (14-point Micro PLCs) and release 6.0 (28point Micro PLCs) of Logicmaster 90 software.
2.
Timers and counters are updated each time they are encountered in the logic; timers by the
amount of time consumed by the last sweep and counters by one count.
3.
For bit operation functions, L = the number of bits. For bit position, N = the bit that is set. For
data move functions, N = the number of bits or words. B= the number of bits shifted more than
1 (that is, not counting the first bit). W=the number of words.
4.
For table functions, increment is in units of length specified.
5.
Enabled time for single length units of type %R, %AI, and %AQ.
6.
JUMPs, LABELs, COMMENTs, and non-nested MCRs are included in the Boolean timing
spec.
7.
Boolean contact execution times are as follows:
14-point Micro PLCs: 1.8 ms/K of logic for fast %I (%I1–%I64) references
1.6 ms/K of logic for fast %Q (%Q1–%Q64) references
.
2.2 ms/K of logic for normal inputs
2.8 ms/K of logic for normal outputs
23 and 28-point Micro PLCs: 1.0 ms/K of logic for fast %I (%I1–%I64) references
1.0 ms/K of logic for fast %Q (%Q1–%Q64) references
.
1.2 ms/K of logic for normal inputs
1.6 ms/K of logic for normal outputs
GFK-1065F
A-1
A
Table A-1. Instruction Timing
Execution Time(µ sec.)
Size
Group
Function
(bytes)
Enabled
14-point
14-point
Increment
28-point*
See note 7 on page A-1.
14-point
28-point*
NA
NA
Coils/
Relays
Coils/Relays
Timers
Off Delay Timer
15
48.8
25.8
64
33.5
NA
NA
On Delay Timer
Elapsed Timer
15
15
64.8
59.2
33.9
30.3
50.4
44.8
25.6
24.0
NA
NA
NA
NA
Counters
Up Counter
Down Counter
11
11
67.2
67.2
34.3
34.4
66.4
67.2
33.9
34.3
NA
NA
NA
NA
Math
Addition (INT)
Addition (DINT)
13
13
48
49.6
26.2
27.6
1.4
1.0
1.0
NA
NA
NA
NA
Subtraction (INT)
Subtraction (DINT)
Multiplication (INT)
Multiplication (DINT)
13
13
13
13
48.8
49.6
54.4
105.6
26.2
27.6
30.1
70.9
1.4
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Division (INT)
13
60.8
36.0
1.4
1.0
NA
NA
Division (DINT)
13
103.2
58.3
1.4
1.0
NA
NA
Modulo Division (INT)
13
63.2
37.0
1.4
1.0
NA
NA
Modulo Division (DINT)
13
105.6
59.3
1.4
1.0
NA
NA
Square Root (INT)
–
64
49.4
1.4
1.0
NA
NA
Relational
2
28-point*
Disabled
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
Square Root (DINT)
–
138.4
88.6
1.4
1.0
NA
NA
Equal (INT)
Equal (DINT)
9
9
24.8
25.6
12.8
13.2
0
0
0
0
NA
NA
NA
NA
Not Equal (INT)
9
24.8
12.8
0
0
NA
NA
Not Equal (DINT)
9
25.6
13.2
0
0
NA
NA
Greater Than (INT)
9
24.8
12.8
0
0
NA
NA
Greater Than (DINT)
9
25.6
13.2
0
0
NA
NA
Greater Than/Equal (INT)
9
24.8
12.8
0
0
NA
NA
Greater Than/Equal (DINT)
9
25.6
13.2
0
0
NA
NA
Less Than (INT)
9
24.8
12.8
0
0
NA
NA
Less Than (DINT)
9
25.6
13.2
0
0
NA
NA
Less Than/Equal (INT)
9
24.8
12.8
0
0
NA
NA
Less Than/Equal (DINT)
9
25.6
13.2
0
0
NA
NA
Range (INT)
–
–
32
23.1
24.5
1.4
1.0
NA
NA
1.4
1.0
NA
NA
Range (DINT)
39.2
*Times for 23-point Micro PLCs are the same as those for 28-point Micro PLCs
A-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
A
Table A-1. Instruction Timing - Continued
Execution Time(µ sec.)
Size
Group
Bit
Operation
Data Move
Function
(bytes)
Enabled
14-point
Disabled
Increment
28-point*
14-point
28-point*
14-point
28-point*
0
NA
NA
Logical AND
Logical OR
13
13
44
44
25.2
25.2
0
0
0
NA
NA
Logical Exclusive OR
13
44
25.2
0
0
NA
NA
Logical Invert, NOT
9
40.8
22.8
15
110.4
61.0
0
3.2
NA
Shift Bit Left
0
11.2
NA
12.0W
+1.87B
Shift Bit Right
15
117.6
65.8
10.4
3.0
Rotate Bit Left
15
124.8
69.7
0
0
Rotate Bit Right
15
124
68.9
0
0
Bit Position
13
56.8
23.3
1.4
1.0
Bit Clear
13
56.8
33.3
0
0
22.096W
+3.68B
23.76W
+3.79B
24.94W
+3.73B
24.94W
+3.73B
7.8W
+ 5.1B
NA
12.59W
+1.87B
1.83W
+ 1.87B
1.83W
+ 1.87B
4.5L
+ 3.23N
NA
Bit Test
13
40.8
23.0
0
0
NA
NA
Bit Set
13
56.8
32.9
NA
–
146.4
78
0
7
NA
Mask Compare (WORD)
0
11.2
Mask Compare (DWORD)
–
152
87
10.4
6
15.17W
+ 6.51B
30.02W
+ 7.47B
12.96W
+ 1.71B
25.79W
+ 2.24B
Move (INT)
13
50.4
Move (BIT)
13
67.2
Move (WORD)
13
50.4
Block Move
Block Clear
Shift Register (BIT)
Shift Register (WORD)
Bit Sequencer
COMM_REQ
–
9
15
15
15
–
91.2
45.6
143.2
65.6
68
74.4
29.16
(27.4)
38.0
(36.8)
29.16
(27.4)
52.0
24.8
75.2
37.6
36.0
40.8
0
0
8.19
5.36N
0
0
9.8
0
0
8.19
5.4N
(4.89N)
NA
2.6
0
21.6
9.6
16.0
NA
NA
6.6
0.288
11.64
NA
NA
NA
3.36
0.176
6.19
0.10
NA
7.2
0
39.2
19.2
30.4
NA
*Times for 23-point Micro PLCs are the same as those for 28-point Micro PLCs.
GFK-1065F
Appendix A Instruction Timing
A-3
A
Table A-1. Instruction Timing - Continued
Execution Time(µ sec.)
Size
Group
Function
Array Move
INT
DINT
BIT
BYTE
Search Equal
INT
DINT
BYTE
Search Not Equal
INT
DINT
BYTE
Search Greater Than/Equal
INT
DINT
BYTE
Search Greater Than
INT
DINT
BYTE
Search Less Than
INT
DINT
BYTE
Search Less Than/Equal
INT
DINT
BYTE
Conversion Convert to INT
Convert to BCD-4
Control
Do I/O
Service Request
#14
#15
#16
Nested MCR/ENDMCR
(combined)
PID-ISA
PID-IND
Enabled
Disabled
Increment
(bytes)
14-point
28-point*
14-point
28-point*
14-point
28-point*
21
21
21
21
104
116.8
163.2
96
56.0
63.2
88.0
52.0
8.8
8
7.2
8.8
3.2
3.2
2.4
3.2
14.88
29.78
10.56
7.2
7.38N
15.0N
5.42N
3.57N
19
19
19
64.8
71.2
64
39.2
42.4
37.6
7.2
7.2
7.2
2.4
2.4
2.4
6.02
11.24
5.02
2.97N
5.6N
2.35N
19
19
19
64.8
71.2
64
37.6
42.4
37.6
7.2
7.2
7.2
2.4
2.4
2.4
6.02
11.24
5.02
2.94N
5.54N
2.74N
19
19
19
64.8
71.2
64
39.2
42.4
38.4
7.2
7.2
7.2
2.4
2.4
2.4
6.02
11.24
5.02
2.94N
5.54N
2.74N
19
19
19
64.8
71.2
64
39.2
42.4
38.4
7.2
7.2
7.2
2.4
2.4
2.4
6.02
11.24
5.02
2.94N
5.54N
2.74N
19
19
19
64.8
71.2
64
39.2
42.2
38.4
7.2
7.2
7.2
2.4
2.4
2.4
6.02
11.24
5.02
2.94N
5.54N
2.74N
19
19
19
9
9
12
64.
71.2
64
48.0
36.8
157.9
39.2
42.4
38.4
26.95
20.65
7.2
7.2
7.2
1
1
2.4
6.02
2.4
11.24
2.4
5.02
1
NA
1
NA
See Table A-2.
2.94N
5.54N
2.74N
NA
NA
–
9
–
8
236
103.2
101.6
32.8
121.1
72.45
38.15
20.3
0
0
0
12.8
0
0
0
3.2
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
8
8
830
833
97
97
49
49
NA
NA
NA
NA
Table
429
432
*Times for 23-point Micro PLCs are the same as those for 28-point Micro PLCs, except for Do I/O function
(see Table A-2).
A-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
A
Table A-2. Timing for Do I/O Function
Execution Time(µ sec)
Model
No. Expansion Units
Enabled
Disabled
14-point
NA
157.9
25.2
23-point to discrete
input
NA
82.9
14.4
23-point (with default
analog pt config) to
analog input
NA
116.2
14.4
23-point to analog
output
NA
90.65
14.4
28-point
28-point
GFK-1065F
0 (outputs 1-16)
74.6
14.4
1 (outputs 1-24)
83.3
14.4
2 (outputs 1-32)
91.7
14.4
3 (outputs 1-40)
100.45
14.4
4 (outputs 1-48)
112.7
14.4
0 (inputs 1-16)
82.3
14.4
1 (inputs 1-24)
98.7
14.4
2 (inputs 1-32
100.5
14.4
3 (inputs 1-40)
109.6
14.4
4 (inputs 1-48)
118.3
14.4
Appendix A Instruction Timing
A-5
Appendix Reference Types
B
This appendix contains listings of the user reference types supported by the Micro PLC. It also
identifies references reserved for fault reporting (page B-2) and memory locations that are reserved
for I/O functions (page B-3).
User References
Data in Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC programs is referenced by its address in the system. A
reference specifies both a memory type and a precise address within that memory type. For
example:
%I00001
%R00256
specifies address 1 in input memory.
specifies address 256 in register memory.
The % symbol is used to distinguish machine references from nicknames and is only used with
Logicmaster 90 Micro software. The % symbol is not used with the HHP.
The prefix of a user reference indicates where data is stored in the PLC. References in the Micro
PLC are either discrete or register data types. The ranges and sizes of reference types supported by
the Micro PLC are listed in the following table.
GFK-1065F
B-1
B
Table B-1. Range and Size of User References for Micro PLC
Reference Type
Reference Range
14-Point
23 and 28-Point
User program logic
Discrete inputs
Discrete inputs, internal
Discrete outputs
Discrete outputs, internal
Discrete global references
Discrete internal coils
Discrete temporary coils
Not applicable
%I0001 - %I0008
%I0009 - %I0512
%Q0001 - %Q006
%Q0007 - %Q0512
%G0001 - %G1280
%M0001 - %M1024
%T0001 - %T0256
3K words
8 bits
504 bits
6 bits
506 bits
1280 bits
1024 bits
256 bits
6K words
16 bits
504 bits
12 bits
506 bits
1280 bits
1024 bits
256 bits
System status references
%S0001 - %S0032
%SA0001 - %SA0032
%SB0001 - %SB0032
%SC0001 - %SC0032
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
System register references
Analog and High Speed Counter inputs
Analog outputs
System registers*
%R0001 - %R0256
%AI0001 - %AI0128
%AQ0001 - %AQ0128
%SR0001 - %SR0016
256 words
128 words
128 words
16 words
2K words
128 words
128 words
16 words
*For viewing only; cannot be referenced in a user logic program.
References for Fault Reporting
The Series 90 Micro PLC monitors internal operations for either system or user problems called
faults. These faults are reported through the %S references and through an internal fault table.
Access to %S information is available through Logicmaster 90 Micro software or with the HHP.
For more details on faults and fault reporting see Chapter 9.
B-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
B
Fixed I/O Map Locations
The following tables list memory locations that are reserved for I/O functions. Use of these
addresses for other purposes in your ladder logic program is not recommended.
Table B-2. Reserved System Register References
Address
R1617–R1814
Function
If transition coils are used, this area is used to store their previous value.
Table B-3. Reserved Discrete Inputs
Address
GFK-1065F
Function
I00001
Input 1/Count 1/Encoder +
I00002
Input 2/Preload/Strobe/Interrupt 1
I00003
Input 3/Count 2/Encoder –
I00004
Input 4/Preload/Strobe/Interrupt 2
I00005
Input 5/Count 3
I00006
Input 6/Preload/Strobe/Interrupt 3
I00007
Input 7/Count 4
I00008
Input 8/Preload/Strobe/Interrupt 4
I17—24
First standard expansion unit (if configured)
I25—32
Second standard expansion unit (if configured)
I33—40
Third standard expansion unit (if configured)
I41—48
Fourth standard expansion unit (if configured)
I00494
Pulse Train complete on Q1
I00495
Pulse Train complete on Q3
I00496
Pulse Train complete on Q5
I00497—500
Strobe status HSC1—HSC4
I00501—504
Preload status HSC1—HSC4
I00505—508
Output status HSC1—HSC4
I00509
1 (module ready always 1)
I00510
not used (always 0)
I00511
not used (always 0)
I00512
Counter Error status
Appendix B Reference Types
B-3
B
Table B-4. Reserved Discrete Outputs
Address
B-4
Function
Q00001
Output 1/PWM Output/Pulse Output
Q00002
Output 2/PWM Output
Q00003
Output 3/PWM Output/Pulse Output
Q00004
Output 4/PWM Output
Q00005
Output 5/PWM Output/Pulse Output
Q00006
Output 6/PWM Output
Q17—24
First standard expansion unit (if configured)
Q25—32
Second standard expansion unit (if configured)
Q33—40
Third standard expansion unit (if configured)
Q41—48
Fourth standard expansion unit (if configured)
Q00494
Start Q1 Pulse Train
Q00495
Start Q3 Pulse Train
Q00496
Start Q5 Pulse Train
Q00497
Clear Strobe bit for HSC 1
Q00498
Clear Strobe bit for HSC 2
Q00499
Clear Strobe bit for HSC 3
Q00500
Clear Strobe bit for HSC 4
Q00501
Reset Preload bit HSC 1
Q00502
Reset Preload bit HSC 2
Q00503
Reset Preload bit HSC 3
Q00504
Reset Preload bit HSC 4
Q00505
Enable Output HSC 1
Q00506
Enable Output HSC 2
Q00507
Enable Output HSC 3
Q00508
Enable Output HSC 4
Q00509
Not used but unavailable
Q00510
Not used but unavailable
Q00511
Clear error (all counters)
Q00512
Not used but unavailable
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
B
Table B-5. Reserved Analog Inputs
Address
Function
AI00001
Module Status code
AI00002
Counts per timebase HSC 1
0 to 32767
AI00003
Counts per timebase HSC 2
0 to 32767
AI00004
Counts per timebase HSC 3
0 to 32767
AI00005
Counts per timebase HSC 4
0 to 32767
AI00006
Accumulator HSC 1
–32678 to 32767
AI00007
Strobe Register HSC 1
–32678 to 32767
AI00008
Accumulator HSC 2
–32678 to 32767
AI00009
Strobe Register HSC 2
–32678 to 32767
AI00010
Accumulator HSC 3
–32678 to 32767
AI00011
Strobe Register HSC 3
–32678 to 32767
AI00012
Accumulator HSC 4
–32678 to 32767
AI00013
Strobe Register HSC 4
–32678 to 32767
AI00014
Not used (set to 0)
AI00015
Not used (set to 0)
AI00016
Analog potentiometer input filtering (Analog Timer value 0)
AI00017
Analog potentiometer input filtering (Analog Timer value 1)
AI00018
Analog input channel 1
AI00019
Analog input channel 2
Table B-6. Reserved Analog Outputs
Address
GFK-1065F
Function
AQ00001
Controls the number of input samples for analog potentiometer input filtering.
AQ00002
PWM Frequency Q1
AQ00003
PWM Duty Cycle Q1
AQ00004
PWM Frequency Q2
AQ00005
PWM Duty Cycle Q2
AQ00006
PWM Frequency Q3
AQ00007
PWM Duty Cycle Q3
AQ00008
PWM Frequency Q4
AQ00009
PWM Duty Cycle Q4
AQ00011
Discrete input filtering time value
AQ00012
Analog output channel
AQ00123
Frequency of Q1 pulse train (0 to 2Khz)
AQ00124
Number of pulses to send to Q1 output (0 to 65535)
AQ00125
Frequency of Q3 pulse train (0 to 2Khz)
AQ00126
Number of pulses to send to Q3 output (0 to 65535)
AQ00127
Frequency of Q5 pulse train (0 to 2Khz)
AQ00128
Number of pulses to send to Q5 output (0 to 65535)
Appendix B Reference Types
B-5
Appendix PLC/Software Cross Reference
C
Information in this appendix is arranged to provide a convenient means of comparing the
capabilities of the Series 90 Micro PLC and the Series 90-20 PLC. Table C-1 lists the Logicmaster
90 software versions that are compatible with Series 90 Micro and Series 90-20 PLCs. The function
name and its HHP abbreviation and function number are listed in Table C-2. This table also
indicates which models of the Series 90 Micro and Series 90-20 PLCs support each function. A
comparison of ranges and sizes of user references is provided in Table C-3.
GFK-1065F
C-1
C
Table C-1. Programmer Compatibility
CPU
Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro
Software Revision
14, 23, and 28-point Micro, release 3.0 and later
8.00 or later
28-point Micro, release 2.01 and 2.02
6.01 or later
14-point Micro
5.01 or later
211 CPU
2.01 or later
Table C-2. Programming Function Matrix
Release
HHP
Instruction
HHP
Function
Number
Logicmaster
90-30/20/Micro
Software
Micro CPU
(IC692CPU211/212)
Normally Open
Contact
–| |–
NA
all
all
all
Normally Closed
Contact
–|/|–
NA
all
all
all
not supported
NA
3.02
all
all
Normally Open
Coil
–( )–
NA
all
all
all
Negated
Retentive Coil
–(/M)–
NA
all
all
all
Negated Coil
–(/)–
NA
all
all
all
Retentive Coil
–(M)–
NA
all
all
all
SET Coil
–(S)–
NA
all
all
all
–(SM)–
NA
all
all
all
RESET Coil
–(R)–
NA
all
all
all
Retentive
RESET Coil
–(RM)–
NA
all
all
all
Positive
Transition Coil
–(↑)–
NA
all
all
all
Negative
Transition Coil
–(↓)–
NA
all
all
all
not supported
NA
3.02
all
all
Function
Series 90-20 CPU
Contacts
Continuation
Contact <+>–
Coils
Retentive SET
Coil
Continuation Coil
–<+>
C-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
C
Table C-2. Programming Function Matrix - Continued
Release
Function
HHP
Instruction
HHP
Function
Number
Logicmaster
90-30/20/Micro
Software
Series 90-20 CPU
Micro CPU
(IC692CPU211/212)
Links
Horizontal link
––––––
NA
all
all
all
|
NA
all
all
all
tmr
10
all
all
all
On-Delay
Timer
ondtr
13
all
all
all
Off-Delay Timer
ofdt
14
4.5
all
4.40
Vertical link
Timers and Counters
Elapsed
Timer
Up Counter
upctr
15
all
all
all
Down Counter
dnctr
16
all
all
all
Math
Addition
add
60
all
all
all
dpadd
61
all
all
all
sub
62
all
all
all
dpsub
63
all
all
all
mul
64
all
all
all
dpmul
65
all
all
all
div
66
all
all
all
Division,
double precision
dpdiv
67
all
all
all
Modulo
Division
mod
68
all
all
all
dpmod
69
all
all
all
sqrt
70
3.02
all
all
dpsqrt
71
3.02
all
all
Addition,
double precision
Subtraction
Subtraction,
double precision
Multiplication
Multiplication,
double precision
Division
Modulo Division,
double precision
Square Root
Square Root,
double precision
GFK-1065F
Appendix C PLC/Software Cross Reference
C-3
C
Table C-2. Programming Function Matrix - Continued
Release
Function
HHP
Instruction
HHP
Function
Number
Logicmaster
90-30/20/Micro
Software
Series 90-20 CPU
Micro CPU
(IC692CPU211/212)
Relational
Equal
eq
52
all
all
all
Not Equal
ne
53
all
all
all
Less Than or
Equal To
le
54
all
all
all
Greater Than or
Equal To
ge
55
all
all
all
Less Than
lt
56
all
all
all
Greater Than
gt
57
all
all
all
Equal,
double precision
dpeq
72
all
all
all
Not Equal,
double precision
dpne
73
all
all
all
Less Than or
Equal To,
double precision
dple
74
all
all
all
Greater Than
or Equal To,
double precision
dpge
75
all
all
all
Less Than,
double precision
dplt
76
all
all
all
Greater Than,
double precision
dpgt
77
all
all
all
Range, signed
integer
rangi
140
4.01
all
4.40
Range, double
precision signed
integer
rangdi
141
4.01
all
4.40
rangw
142
4.01
all
4.40
not supported
NA
4.01
all
4.40
Range, word
Range, double
word
C-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
C
Table C-2. Programming Function Matrix - Continued
Release
Function
HHP
Instruction
HHP
Function
Number
Logicmaster
90-30/20/Micro
Software
Micro CPU
(IC692CPU211/212)
bitset
22
2.01
all
all
and
23
all
all
all
bitclr
24
2.01
all
all
Series 90-20 CPU
Bit Operation
Bit Set
Logical AND
Bit Clear
Logical OR
or
25
all
all
all
bittst
26
2.01
all
all
xor
27
all
all
all
bitpos
28
2.01
all
all
not
29
all
all
all
Shift Left
shl
30
all
all
all
Shift Right
shr
31
all
all
all
Rotate Left
rol
32
all
all
all
Bit Test
Logical
Exclusive OR
Bit Position
Logical Invert
Rotate Right
ror
33
all
all
all
Masked Compare,
word
mskompw
143
4.01
all
5.00
Masked Compare,
double word
mskcmpd
144
4.01
all
5.00
Multiple Integer
Move
movin
37
2.01
all
all
Constant Block
Move, Integer
bmovi
38
all
all
all
Multiple Bit
Move
movbn
40
2.01
all
all
Multiple Word
Move
movwn
42
2.01
all
all
Constant Block
Move
bmovw
43
all
all
all
Block Clear
blkcl
44
all
all
all
Shift Register
Word
shfrw
45
2.01
all
all
Shift Register Bit
shfrb
46
2.01
all
all
Bit Sequencer
seqb
47
all
all
all
comrq
88
all
all
all
Data Move
Communication
Request
GFK-1065F
Appendix C PLC/Software Cross Reference
C-5
C
Table C-2. Programming Function Matrix - Continued
Release
HHP
Instruction
HHP
Function
Number
Logicmaster
90-30/20/Micro
Software
Micro CPU
(IC692CPU211/212)
Search equal to
sreq
101 to 104
3.02
all
all
Search not equal
to
srne
105 to 108
3.02
all
all
Search less than
srlt
109 to 112
3.02
all
all
Search less than
or equal to
srle
113 to 116
3.02
all
all
Search greater
than
srgt
117 to 120
3.02
all
all
Search greater
than or equal to
srge
121 to 124
3.02
all
all
Array move
mova
130 to 134
3.02
all
all
Integer to BCD
BCD
80
all
all
all
BCD to integer
INT
81
all
all
all
Function
Series 90-20 CPU
Table Functions
Conversion
Control
Comment
commnt
NA
all
all
all
End
endsw
00
all
all
all
no operation
noop*
01
all
all
all
Nested Jump
jump
03
2.01
all
all
nested master
control relay
mcr
04
2.01
all
all
Target number for
jump
label
07
2.01
all
all
nested endmcr
mcr
08
2.01
all
all
Master Control
Relay (nonnested)
not supported
NA
all
all
all
End Master
Control Relay
(non-nested)
not supported
NA
2.01
all
all
Do I/O update
do_io
85
4.01
3.00
not supported
pid-isa algorithm
pidisa
86
2.01
all
all
pid-ind algorithm
pidind
87
2.01
all
all
Service Request
svcreq
89
all
all
all
*A comment is displayed by the HHP as a noop instruction. You cannot directly program a noop instruction with the HHP or with
Logicmaster 90 software.
C-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
C
Table C-3. Ranges and Sizes of User References
Reference Range
Reference Type
14-Point
Micro
User program logic
23 and 28Point
Micro
Series 90-20
Not applicable
Discrete inputs
%I0001 %I0008
Discrete inputs,
internal
%I0009 %I0512
%I0009 %I0512
Discrete outputs
%Q0001 %Q006
%Q0001 - %Q0012%
Discrete outputs, internal
w/ LED indicators
–
%I0001 - %I0006
–
14-Point
Micro
23 and 28Point Micro
Series 90-20
3K words
6K words
8 bits
16 bits
504 bits
504 bits
6 bits
12 bits
%Q0013 %Q0016
–
–
%Q0017 %Q0048
506 bits
506 bits
1K words
32 bits
4 bits
Discrete outputs,
internal
%Q0007 %Q0512
Discrete globals
%G0001 %G1280
%G0001 - %G1280
1280 bits
1280 bits
Discrete internal coils
%M0001 %M1024
%M0001 - %M1024
1024 bits
1024 bits
Discrete temporary coils
%T0001 %T0256
%T0001 - %T0256
256 bits
256 bits
System status references
%S0001 %S0032
%S0001 - %S0032
32 bits
32 bits
%SA0001 %SA0032
%SA0001 - %SA0032
32 bits
32 bits
%SB0001 %SB0032
%SB0001 - %SB0032
32 bits
32 bits
%SC0001 %SC0032
%SC0001 - %SC0032
32 bits
32 bits
%R0001 %R0256
%R0001 - %R0256
System register
references
%Q0007 %Q0512
%I0017 %I0048
Size
32 bits
256 words
2K words
256 words
Analog and High Speed
Counter inputs
%AI0001 %AI0128
%AI0001 %AI0128
%AI0001 %AI0016
128 words
128 words
16 words
Analog outputs
%AQ0001 %AQ0128
%AQ0001 %AQ0128
%AQ0001 %AQ0016
128 words
128 words
16 words
System registers*
%SR0001 %SR0016
%SR0001 - %SR0016
16 words
16 words
*For viewing only; cannot be referenced in a user logic program.
GFK-1065F
Appendix C PLC/Software Cross Reference
C-7
Appendix Serial Port and Cables
D
This appendix describes the serial port, converter, and cables used to connect Series 90 PLCs for
Series 90 Protocol (SNP). Sample cable diagrams are provided for some of the many point-to-point
and multidrop system configurations that are possible for Series 90 PLCs.
•
RS-422 Interface....................................................................................................... D-1
•
Cable and Connector Specifications .......................................................................... D-2
•
Port Configurations .................................................................................................. D-3
•
Serial Cable Diagrams .............................................................................................. D-7
Point-to-Point Connections ................................................................................ D-7
Multidrop Connections ...................................................................................... D-12
RS-422 Interface
The Series 90 PLC products are compatible with EIA RS-422 specifications. RS-422 drivers and
receivers are used to provide communications between system components that use multiple
driver/receiver combinations on a single cable with five twisted pairs.
Caution
Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met.
Common mode conditions that exceed those specified will result in errors in
transmission and/or damage to Series 90 PLC components.
Table D-1. System Connection Specifications
Cable type
Five twisted pairs (See Table D-2 for cable specifications.)
Maximum cable length
4000 feet (1200 meters)
Multidrop system configuration
Up to eight drivers and receivers (Although this number can
be increased with the use of a repeater, signal quality may
be diminished.)
Maximum common mode voltage between
drops
RS-422 standard (+7 volts to -7 volts)
Driver requirements
Output
Output impedance
±2V minimum into 100 ohms
120 Kohms minimum in the high impedance state.
Receiver
Input resistance
Sensitivity
GFK-1065F
12 Kohms or greater
±200 millivolt.
D-1
D
Cable and Connector Specifications
The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure. For best
performance, construct the cable assemblies according to the recommended connector parts and
specifications.
Table D-2. Connector/Cable Specifications
Item
Description
Series 90 PLC: Serial (RS-422) port with metric hardware
Connector: 15-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DA15S (solder pot) Hood: AMP
207470-1 connector shell
Hardware Kit: AMP 207871-1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips
Workmaster II: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector
Mating
Connectors
Connector: 25-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DB25S (solder pot) with
DB110963-3 hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)
Workmaster: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector
Connector: 9-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DE9S (solder pot) with DE110963-1
hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)
IBM-AT/XT: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector
Connector: 9-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DE9S (solder pot) with DE110963-31
hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)
RS-232/RS-485 Converter: one 15-pin male, and one 25-pin male connector
15-pin male connector requires metric hardware (same connector, hood, and hardware as for
Series 90 PLC listed above)
25-pin male D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DA25S (solder pot) with DB110963-3 hood or
equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)
Computer grade, 24 AWG (.22 mm2), minimum with overall shield
Catalog Numbers: Belden 9505, Belden 9306, Belden 9832
Cable
These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 19.2 Kbps
as follows:
RS-232:
50 feet (15 meters) maximum cable length
RS-422/RS-422:
4000 feet (1200 meters) maximum length. Must not exceed the
maximum RS-422 Common Mode specification of +7V to -7V. Isolation at the remote end can
be used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages.
At shorter distances under 50 feet (15 meters), almost any twisted pair or shielded twisted pair
cable will work, as long as the wire pairs are connected correctly.
When using RS-422/RS-422, the twisted pairs should be matched so that both transmit signals
make up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the other twisted pair. If this is
ignored, cross-talk resulting from the mismatching will affect the performance of the
communications system.
When routing communication cables outdoors, transient suppression devices can be used to
reduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge.
Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point. Failure to
do so could result in damage to the equipment.
D-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
D
Port Configurations
Series 90 PLC Serial Port
The Series 90 PLC serial port is compatible with RS-422. An RS-232 to RS-422 converter is
required to interface to systems that provide RS-232 compatible interfaces. The Series 90 PLC, RS422 serial port provides the physical connection for SNP communication. This port is a 15-pin Dtype female connector located as follows:
•
Series 90-70, Series 90-20, and Series 90 Micro PLCs – CPU Module
•
Series 90-30 PLC – Power Supply
Figure D-1 shows the serial port orientation and connector layout for the Series 90 PLC types.
Table D-3 lists the pin numbering and signal assignments, which are the same for both serial port
layouts.
a4 452 1
S e rie s 9 0 -3 0
PLC
S e rie s 9 0 - 7 0 , S e r ie s 9 0 - 2 0
a n d S e rie s 9 0 M ic r o P L C s
15
9
p in
1
8
p in
1
8
9
15
NO TE
S e r ie s 9 0 P L C co nn e c to rs
us e m e tr ic h a rd w a r e
( s e e c o n n e c to r s p e c ific a tio n s )
Figure D-1. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Connector Configuration
Note
The cable connector for the Series 90-70, Series 90-30, and Series 90 Micro PLC
serial port must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the
module to close properly. Refer to “Connector/Cable Specifications,” Table D-2.
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
D-3
D
Table D-3. RS-422 15-Pin Connector Assignments
Pin
*
Signal Name
Description
1
Shield
Shield
2
NC
No connection
3
No connection
No connection
4
ATCH* (Port 1)
Hand-Held Programmer attach signal
NC (Port 2)
No connection on Serial Port 2 of 28point Micro PLCs
5
+5VDC*
See “Specifications” in Chapter 2 for
capacity on Micro PLCs
6
RTS (A)
Request To Send
7
Signal Ground, 0V
Signal Ground
8
CTS (B’)
Clear to Send
9
RT*
Terminating resistor for RD**
10
RD (A’)
Receive Data
11
RD (B’)
Receive Data
12
SD (A)
Send Data
13
SD (B)
Send Data
14
RTS (B)
Request To Send
15
CTS (A’)
Clear to Send
Signals available at the connector but are not included in the RS-422 specification.
** Termination resistance for the Receive Data (RD) signal needs to be connected only
on units at the end of the lines. This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC
products by connecting a jumper between pins 9 and 10 inside the 15-pin D-shell with
the following exception. For Series 90-70 PLCs with catalog numbers
IC697CPU731J and IC697CPU771G (and earlier), the termination for RD at the PLC
is implemented by a jumper between pins 9 and 11.
SD (Send Data) and RD (Receive Data) are the same as TXD and RXD (used in the
Series Six PLC). (A) and (B) are the same as - and + . A and B denote outputs, and A’
and B’ denote inputs.
D-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
D
Workmaster Serial Port
The Workmaster II industrial computer, RS-232 serial port is a 25-pin D-type male connector, and
the early model Workmaster is a 9-pin male connector.
Figure D-2 shows the serial port connector layout for both computers. Table D-4 shows the pin
numbering and signal assignment for both connector types.
a44522
WORKMASTER
AND PC STANDARD
WORKMASTER
25 PIN
(EARLY MODEL) AND XT
13
25
5
PIN
1
PIN
1
9
6
12
Figure D-2. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Connector Configuration
Table D-4. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Pinout
Workmaster II (25-pin connector)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9,10
11
12-19
20
21
22
23-25
Signal
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
GND
DCD
DTR
Description
Not Connected
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Not Connected
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Not Connected
Tied to line 20
Not Connected
Data Terminal Ready
Not Connected
Ring Indicate
Not Connected
Workmaster (9-pin connector)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
GND
DCD
DTR
Description
Not Connected
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Not Connected
Signal Ground, 0V
Data Carrier Detect
Data Terminal Ready
For more information about the Workmaster industrial computer serial port refer to the following
manuals:
Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation, GFK-0401
Workmaster Programmable Control Information Center Guide to Operation, GEK-25373
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
D-5
D
IBM-AT Serial Port
The IBM-AT or compatible computer’s RS-232 serial port is a 9-pin D-type male connector as
shown in the figure below.
a44523
IBM-AT
5
PIN
1
9
6
Figure D-3. IBM-AT Serial Port
Table D-5. IBM-AT Serial Port Pinout
IBM-AT
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
DCD
RD
TD
DTR
GND
RTS
CTS
Description
Data Carrier Detect
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Not Connected
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Not Connected
IBM-XT
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
GND
DCD
DTR
Description
Not Connected
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Not Connected
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Data Terminal Ready
RS-232/RS-485 Converter
The RS-232/RS-485 Converter (IC690ACC900) can be used to convert from RS-232 to RS422/RS-485 communications. The converter has one 15-pin female D-type port, and one 25-pin
female D-type port.
This converter unit can be purchased from GE Fanuc Automation. Please contact any GE Fanuc
Automation sales office or field service representative.
For detailed information on the converter, refer to Appendix E. Examples of serial cable diagrams
that include the converter are provided in the remainder of this appendix.
D-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
D
Serial Cable Diagrams
Point-to-Point Connections
In the point-to-point configuration only two devices can be connected to the same communication
line. The communication line can be directly connected using RS-232 (50 feet, 15 meters
maximum) or RS-485 (4000 feet, 1200 meters maximum). Modems can be used for longer
distances.
Note
The cable connector for the Series 90-70, Series 90-30, and Series 90 Micro PLC
serial port must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the
module to close properly. Refer to “Connector/Cable Specifications” in Table
D-2.
RS-232 Point-to-Point Connections
Figures D-3 through D-5 illustrate typical RS-232 point-to-point connections to Series 90 PLCs.
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
D-7
D-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
25-P IN
FE M A LE
G ND
7
2
3
4
5
8
20
GN D
S H LD
RD
TD
C TS
R TS
DCD
25 -P IN
MA LE
7
1
3
2
5
4
8
25-P IN
FE M A LE
R S -23 2
P OR T
15-P IN
FE M A LE
R S -48 5
P OR T
R S -232 /R S -485
C O N V E R TE R
(IC 69 0A C C 900 )
15 - P IN
MA LE
0V
SHLD
DC D ( B )
DC D ( A )
RD ( B' )
RD ( A' )
SD ( B )
SD ( A )
RT
C TS ( B ' )
C TS ( A ' )
R TS ( A )
R TS ( B )
5V
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
8
6
14
5
7
1
P IN
R S -42 2
TW IS TE D S H IE LD E D
P A IR S
*
*
**
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
P IN
1 5- P IN
MA L E
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B ' )
RD
R TS ( B )
R TS ( A )
C TS ( A ' )
C TS ( B ' )
5V
0V
S H LD
C A TA L OG N U M B E R S IC 69 7C P U 731 A N D IC 69 7C P U 771 , TH E TE R M IN A TIO N FO R R D A T TH E P LC IS IMP L E ME N TE D B Y A JU M P E R B E TW E E N P IN 9 A N D P IN 11 .
R M IN A TIO N R E S IS TA N C E F O R TH E R E C E IV E D A TA (R D ) S IG N A L N E E D S TO B E C O N N E C TE D ON LY O N U N ITS A T TH E E N D O F TH E LIN E S . TH IS TE R M IN A TIO N IS M A D E ON TH E
** TE
S E R IE S 90 P L C P R O D U C TS B Y C ON N E C TIN G A JU MP E R B E TW E E N P IN 9 A N D P IN 10 IN S ID E TH E 1 5-P IN D -S H E LL W ITH TH E F OL LO W IN G E X C E P TIO N . F OR S E R IE S 9 0-70 P L C s,
OU R C E F OR P O IN T-TO -P O IN T C O N N E C TION 1 0 FE E T (3 ME TE R S ) O N L Y. C ON V E R TE R P O W E R S OU R C E B E YO N D 1 0 FE E T (3 ME TE R S ) A N D FO R MU LTID R OP
* PC OO WN NEERCSTIO
N MU S T B E E XTE R N A L S OU R C E .
25-P IN
M A LE
R S -2 32
PO RT
W O R K M A S TE R
TD
RD
R TS
C TS
D CD
D TR
IC 6 90C B L70 5 OR E Q U IV A L E N T
R S -232
S H IE L D E D P A IR S
P IN
P IN
15- P IN
FE M A LE
R S -42 2
P OR T
S E R IE S
9 0 P LC
a44 5 06
D
Figure D-4. Workmaster II (25-pin) Serial Connection to Series 90 PLCs
GFK-1065F
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
9 - P IN
FEMALE
2
3
7
8
1
4
5
2 5 - P IN
MALE
SH LD
GND
7
1
TD
RD
C TS
D TR
DCD
2
3
5
20
8
2 5 - P IN
FE M AL E
R S -2 32
PORT
1 5 - P IN
FEMALE
R S -42 2
PORT
R S -2 3 2/R S -4 2 2
CONVERTER
(IC 6 9 0 A C C 9 0 0 )
1 5 - P IN
MALE
DCD ( A )
DCD ( B )
RD ( A ' )
RD ( B ' )
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RT
C TS ( A ' )
C TS ( B ' )
RTS ( A )
RTS ( B )
+5V
0V
SHLD
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
8
6
14
5
7
1
P IN
RS-422
T W IS T E D S H IE L D E D
P A IR S
*
*
**
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
P IN
1 5 - P IN
MALE
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A ' )
RD ( B ' )
RD
R TS ( A )
R TS ( B )
C TS ( A ' )
C TS ( B ' )
+5V
0V
SH LD
RS-422
PORT
S E R IE S
90 PLC
a44507
1 5 - P IN
FEMALE
C A T A L O G N U M B E R S IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 3 1 A N D IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 7 1 , T H E T E R M IN A T IO N F O R R D A T T H E P L C IS IM P L E M E N T E D B Y A J U M P E R B E T W E E N P IN 9 A N D P IN 1 1 .
* * TS EE RR MIEINS A9 T0 IOP LNCRPERSOISDTUACNTCSE BFYO CR OTNHNEERCETCINEGIVAE JDUAMTPAE(RR DB )E ST WIG ENEANL NP INE E 9D SA NTDO PBINE C1 O0 NINNSEIDC ET ETDH EO N1 5L -YP OINN DU-SN HI TESL LA TWTITHHE TEHNED FOOFL LT OH WE INL ING EESX. CT EHPIST IOT ENR. MFINO ARTSI OENR IEIS SM9A0D- 7E0 OPNL CTsH, E
* PC OO WN NE ERCSTOIOUNR CMEU SF TO RB EP OE XINTTE-RT ON -APLOSINOTU CR OC EN .N E C T IO N 1 0 F E E T (3 M E T E R S ) O N L Y . C O N V E R T E R P O W E R S O U R C E B E Y O N D 1 0 F E E T (3 M E T E R S ) A N D F O R M U L T ID R O P
9 - P IN
MALE
RS-232
PORT
IB M - A T
( C O M P A T IB L E )
RD
TD
RTS
CTS
DCD
D TR
GND
IC 6 9 0 C B L 7 0 2 O R E Q U IV A L E N T
RS-232
S H I E L D E D P A IR S
P IN
P IN
D
Figure D-5. IBM-AT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs
D-9
D-10
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
9 -P IN
F E M A LE
2
3
4
5
8
9
7
RD
TD
C TS
D TR
D CD
25 -P IN
MA LE
1 SH LD
7 GND
3
2
5
20
8
2 5 -P IN
FEMALE
R S -2 32
PO RT
15 -P IN
F E MA LE
R S -42 2
POR T
R S -2 32 /RS -42 2
C O NV E RT E R
(IC 69 0A C C 90 0)
15 - P IN
MA LE
D CD ( A )
D CD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RT
CTS ( A' )
CTS ( B' )
R TS ( A )
R TS ( B )
5V
0V
S H LD
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
8
6
14
5
7
1
P IN
R S -4 22
TW IS TE D S HIE LD E D
P A IR S
*
*
**
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
P IN
1 5- P IN
M A LE
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
RD
RTS ( A )
RTS ( B )
CTS ( A ' )
CTS ( B ' )
5V
0V
S H LD
C A T A LO G N UM B E R S IC 69 7C P U 73 1 A ND IC6 97 CP U7 71 , T HE TE R M IN A TIO N FO R R D A T TH E P L C IS IM P L E ME NT E D B Y A JU MP E R B E TW E E N P IN 9 A N D P IN 11 .
R MIN A TIO N R E S IS T A N C E F O R TH E R E C E IV E D A TA (R D ) S IG NA L N E E D S TO B E C O N N E C T E D O N LY O N U NIT S A T TH E E N D O F T HE L IN E S . THIS TE R MIN A TIO N IS M A DE O N TH E
** TE
S E R IE S 9 0 P L C P R O DU C TS B Y C O N NE CTIN G A JU MP E R B E TW E E N P IN 9 A N D P IN 1 0 IN S ID E T HE 1 5-P IN D -S H E L L W IT H TH E F O LL O W IN G E XC E P T IO N . FO R S E R IE S 9 0-7 0 P LC s,
E R S O U RC E F O R P O IN T-T O-P O IN T C O N NE C TIO N 10 FE E T (3 M E TE R S ) O N L Y. C O N V E R TE R P O W E R S O U RC E B E YO N D 1 0 F E E T (3 ME TE R S ) A N D F O R M U L TID RO P
* PC OO WN NE
CTION MU S T B E E XT E R N A L S O U R C E .
9 -P IN
MA LE
R S -23 2
POR T
IB M-X T
OR
W O R K MA S TE R
TD
RD
R TS
C TS
D CD
DT R
GND
IC 69 0 CB L 70 1 O R E Q U IV A L E N T
R S -23 2
S H IE LD E D P A IR S
P IN
P IN
15 - P IN
F E M A LE
R S -42 2
POR T
S E R IE S
90 P LC
a4 45 08
D
Figure D-6. Workmaster or IBM-XT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs
GFK-1065F
D
RS-422 Point-to-Point Connection
If your host device is equipped with an RS-422 card, you can connect directly to Series 90 PLCs as
illustrated in the following figure.
a44509
Ho s t
C o m p u t er
Pin
PLC
Shielded Twisted Pairs
Pin
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
*
CTS ( A' )
CTS ( B' )
RTS ( B )
RTS ( A )
G ND
SHL D
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
8
15
3
2
7
1
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B ' )
RD
RTS ( A )
RTS ( B )
CTS ( B' )
CTS ( A' )
GND
SHLD
50 feet (15.2 meters) m axim um
(without is olation)
* Termination res istanc e for the receive data (RD) s ignal needs to be c onnected
only on units at the end of the lines . This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC
products by connecting a jumper between pin 9 and pin 10 ins ide the 15-pin D-shell with
the following exception: for Series 90-70 PLCs , catalog numbers IC697CPU731 and
IC697CPU771, the termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jum per between
pin 9 and pin 11.
Figure D-7. Typical RS-422, Host to PLC Connection, with Handshaking
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
D-11
D
Multidrop Connections
In a multidrop configuration, the host device is configured as the master and one or more PLCs are
configured as slaves. This method can be used when the maximum distance between the master and
any slave does not exceed 4000 feet (1200 meters). This figure assumes good quality cables and a
moderately noisy environment. A maximum of eight slaves can be connected using RS-422 in a
daisy chain or multidrop configuration. The RS-422 line must include handshaking and use wire
type as specified in the "Cable and Connector Specifications” section.
Programmer-to-Series 90 PLC Connections
The following illustrations show wiring diagrams and requirements for connecting a Workmaster II
or IBM-PS/2, Workmaster, IBM-AT/XT or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs in an eightwire multidrop, serial data configuration.
Figure D-8 provides an example of the wiring configuration required for the multidrop
configuration when using the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter. Figure D-9 illustrates the
wiring configuration required when a Work Station Interface (WSI) board is installed in the
computer. The 37-pin serial port connector for Workmaster II and Workmaster computers is on the
WSI board in the programming computer. The cable type for these connections should be 24 AWG
(0.22 mm2), 30V computer grade. Extra flexible cable construction is recommended for short
lengths.
Figures D-10 through D-12 show wiring diagrams and requirements for connecting a Workmaster
II or IBM-PS/2, Workmaster, IBM-AT or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs in an eight-wire
multidrop, serial data configuration.
D-12
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
2 5 - p in
f e m a le
7
GND
7
1
GND
SH LD
RD
TD
CTS
DTR
DCD
25 -pin
m a le
3
2
5
20
8
P in
2 5 - p in
fe m ale
RS-232
port
15 -pin
fe m ale
RS-422
port
R S -23 2/R S -42 2
C o n ve rt e r
( IC 6 9 0 A C C 9 0 0 )
(
(
(
(
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
8
6
14
5
7
1
P in
0V
5V
S e r ie s 9 0 - 7 0 a n d M ic r o
lo c a t e d o n C P U b o a r d .
PLC 15-Pin Connector
S e r ie s 9 0 - 3 0 lo c a t e d
o n p o w e r s u p p ly .
P o w e r S o ur c e
f o r C o n v e r te r
15 -pin
m ale
A' )
B' )
A )
B )
( A )
( B )
A' )
B' )
A )
B )
0V
SHLD
DCD
DCD
RD (
RD (
SD (
SD (
RT
CTS
CTS
RTS
RTS
5V
To other P LC s
RS -4 2 2
M a k e c o n n e c t io n s
in s id e D - c o n n e c t o r s .
*
*
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
P in
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
P in
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
1 5 - p in
m ale
A )
B )
A' )
B' )
A )
B )
A' )
B' )
0V
S H LD
SD (
SD (
RD (
RD (
RD
RTS
RTS
CTS
CTS
5V
1 5 - p in
m ale
A )
B )
A' )
B' )
A )
B )
A' )
B' )
0V
S H LD
SD (
SD (
RD (
RD (
RD
RTS
RTS
CTS
CTS
5V
a45648
1 5 - p in
fe m a le
S e r ie s 9 0
R S -4 2 2
P ort
Last
S tation
1 5 - p in
fe m a le
S e r ie s 9 0
R S -4 2 2
P ort
S lave
Station
con ne c tin g a ju m p er b e tw e en pin 9 a nd p in 1 0 insid e th e 1 5-p in D -sh e ll, w ith th e fo llo w in g e xc ep tio n: Fo r S e ries 9 0 P L C s, c ata lo g n u m b ers IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 31 a nd IC 69 7 C P U 7 71 ,
the te rm in a tio n fo r R D w ith th e follo w in g e xc e p tio n : F o r Se rie s 90 PL C s, c a ta lo g n u m b ers IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 3 1 a n d IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 7 1 , t he te rm in at io n fo r R D a t th e PL C is im p le m e nt e d
by pla cin g a ju m p e r b e tw e e n pin 9 an d p in 1 1 .
G rou nd p o te ntia l: M u ltip le u nits tha t a re n o t co n ne c ted to the s am e p o w er so u rc e m us t h a ve c om m on g ro un d p o ten tia ls o r g rou nd is o la tio n for p ro p er o pe ration of t his sys te m .
* T e rm in a tio n res is ta nc e for th e R E C E IV E D A T A (R D ) sig na l is n ee d e d on ly o n u n its at th e e nd s of the lin es . T h is term in a tio n is m ad e o n th e S erie s 90 P L C p rod uc ts b y
It is a ls o re co m m e n d ed th at an y n ec e s sa ry c o n n ec tio n s be m a de in sid e
th e ca b le c on n e cto r t o b e m o u nt ed o n th e P LC . T he u se of term ina l s trip s
to c on n e ct to o th ert yp e s o f co n n ec to rs alon g th e le ng th of the
tran s m iss io n lin e is n o t re c om m en d e d.
Notes
W h en w irin g R S -4 22 /4 85 m u ltid ro p ca b les , re fle ct ion s on th e t ran sm is sio n
lin e ca nb e re d u ce d b y c on fig urin g t he c ab le in a d ais y-c h ain fa sh io n a s
s ho w n b elo w .
M a s t er
C o n v ert er
S la ve S t ation
La s t S tat io n
2 5 - p in
m ale
IB M P S / 2
or
W o r k m a s t e r II
R S - 2 3 2 P o rt
2
3
4
5
8
20
TD
RD
R TS
C TS
DCD
D TR
P in
IC 6 9 0 C B L 7 0 5 o r e q u iv a l e n t
R S - 2 3 2 s h ie ld e d p a ir s
D
Figure D-8. Multidrop Configuration with Converter
D-13
D
a45649
W orkm aster or
W orkm aster II
SD
SD
RD
RD
CTS
CTS
RTS
RTS
(A)
(B)
(A ')
(B ')
(A ')
(B ')
(A)
(B)
RT
0V
S H IE L D
P in
27
26
35
34
31
30
33
32
36
1
37
M a k e c o n n e c t io n s
in s id e D - c o n ne c to r s
S h ie ld e d
T w is t e d
P a ir s
W SI
*
*
P in
10
11
12
13
6
14
15
8
9
7
1
Series
9 0 PLC
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
C TS (A ')
C TS (B ')
RT
0V
S H IE L D
1 5 - P in
C o nn e cto r
3 7 - P in
C o nne cto r
IMPORTANT!
D O N O T u s e t e r m in a l s t r ip s o r o th e r t y p e s o f
c o nn e c to r s a lo n g t h e le n g th o f t he t r a n s m is s io n
line w h e n w ir in g a m u lt id r o p s e r ia l d a ta
c o nf ig u r a t io n .
*
M a x im u m le n g th
o f 4 ,0 0 0 f e e t
( 1 ,2 0 0 m e te r s )
P in
10
11
12
13
6
14
15
8
9
7
1
W h e n w ir in g R S - 4 2 2 / 4 8 5 m u lt id ro p c a b le s ,
r e fle c t io n s o n th e tr a n s m is s io n lin e c a n
b e r e d uc e d b y c o n fig u r in g th e c a b le in
a d a is y c h a in f a s h io n , a s s h o w n b e lo w .
PLC 3
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
C TS (A ')
C TS (B ')
RT
0V
S H IE L D
1 5 - P in
C o nn e cto r
NOTE
W ork m a ste r
Se rie s
90 PLC
Se rie s
90 PLC
PLC 1
PLC 2
*
It is a ls o r e c o m m e n d e d th a t a n y n e c e s s a ry
c o n n e c t io n s b e m a d e ins id e t he c a b le
c o n n e c t o r t o b e m o u n te d o n t h e P L C .
P in
10
11
12
13
6
14
15
8
9
7
1
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
C TS (A ')
C TS (B ')
RT
0V
S H IE L D
1 5 - P in
C o nn e cto r
D o not use term inal s trips or othe r ty pe s
of connec tors a long the length of the
transm is sion line.
T o O th e r P L C s
M a xim u m o f 8 P L C s o n a m ul tid r o p
(m o r e w ith a r e p e a t e r ) .
* Tteerrmmininaat tioionn isr ems isa dt aen oc en fot h re tSh ee rieR Es C9E0 IVP EL CD pArToAd u( cRtDs )b sy igc noan ln ise c ntine eg dae dj uomnplye ro nb euntwitse e na tptinh e9eanndds poinf t h1 e0 linin seids .e Tt hheis
1 5 - p in D -s he ll, w ith th e fo llo w in g e xc e p tio n : F o r S e r ie s 9 0 P L C s , c a ta lo g n u m b e r s IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 3 1 a n d
IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 7 1 , t h e te r m in a tio n f o r R D a t t he P L C is im p le m e nt e d b y p la c in g a ju m p e r b e t w e e n p in 9 a n d p in 1 1 .
C AU TION
Ground potential: M ultiple units that are not connected to the same pow er source must hav e ground
pote ntial w ithin +- 7 V for proper opera tion of this s ystem . Failure to provide a comm on ground may c aus e
da mage to PLC components .
Figure D-9. WSI Multidrop Cabling to Series 90 PLC
D-14
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
9-p in
fe m a le
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
DC D
D TR
G ND
NOT E
2
3
4
5
8
9
7
RD
TD
C TS
D TR
D CD
2 5 -p in
m ale
1 SH LD
7 G ND
3
2
5
20
8
PIN
C O N VE R TE R
SLA V E ST AT IO N
2 5 -p in
fe m ale
RS-2 32
po rt
Po wer
so urce
fo r
C onve rte r
1 5-p in
m a le
D CD ( A )
D CD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RT
CTS ( A ' )
CTS ( B ' )
R TS ( A )
R TS ( B )
5V
0V
SH L D
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
8
6
14
5
7
1
PIN
0V
5V
to other P LC s
RS -4 2 2
M ak e c o nnec tion s
ins id e D-co nne cto rs
Gro und p ote ntia l: Multip le units, no t c onn ec te d to the sa m e po we r so urce , m us t ha ve co m m on gro und p oten tia ls o r g ro und iso la tio n fo r p ro p er
op e ra tio n o f this system .
ca ta lo g num b ers IC6 97 C PU 73 1 a nd IC6 9 7C PU 77 1 , the te rm ina tio n fo r RD a t the PL C is im p le m ente d by a jum p er b e twe e n p ins 9 a nd 1 1.
rm inatio n re sis ta nce fo r the rec e ive d ata (R D) s ig na l nee d s to b e co nne cted o nly o n units at the end of the line s . This te rm ina tio n is m a d e o n th e
* Te
Se ries 9 0 PL C p ro d ucts b y c onne c ting a jum p e r be twe e n p in 9 an d pin 1 0 ins id e th e 15 -pin D -s he ll with the fo llowing exce ptio n. F o r Se rie s 9 0 -7 0 PL C s,
PLC 15-pin connector
Se rie s 9 0 -3 0 loc a te d on
p owe r sup p ly
Se rie s 9 0 -7 0 loc a te d on the
CP U bo a rd
15 -pin
fem a le
RS -4 2 2
p ort
R S-2 32 /R S-42 2
Co nve rter
(IC 69 0 AC C9 0 0)
LA S T S TA TIO N
It is als o recom mended to mak e any nec ess ary connec tions ins ide the
cab le c onnec tor to be m ounted on the P LC . It is not recom mended to
use terminal strips to connec t to other types of conne ctors alon g the leng th of th e
trans mis sion line.
M AS TE R
W hen w iring R S -4 22 /48 5 multidro p cab les , reflections on the tran smiss ion line
can be reduc ed by c onfiguring the c able in a daisy c hain fas hion as show n below .
9-p in
m a le
RS -2 3 2
P ort
W ork m as te r
PIN
IC6 9 0 CBL 7 0 1 or e q uiva le nt
R S-23 2 s hie ld e d p airs
*
*
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
PIN
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
PIN
1 5 -p in
m ale
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
RD
RTS ( A )
RTS ( B )
CTS ( A' )
CTS ( B' )
5V
0V
SHL D
15 -pin
m a le
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
RD
RTS ( A )
RTS ( B )
CTS ( A' )
CTS ( B' )
5V
0V
SHL D
1 5 -p in
fe m ale
PS
RS -4 2 2
Po rt
Se rie s
90 -3 0
L a st
Sta tio n
15 -pin
fem a le
C PU
RS -4 2 2
Po rt
SE RIES
90 -7 0
Slave
Sta tio n
a 4 45 1 2
D
Figure D-10. Workmaster/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection
D-15
D-16
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
*
2
3
4
5
8
9
7
NOTE
9 -P IN
FEMALE
TD
RD
R TS
C TS
DCD
DTR
GND
2 5 - P IN
MALE
SHLD
GND
7
1
TD
RD
CTS
DTR
DCD
2
3
5
20
8
P IN
2 5 - P IN
FEMALE
RS-232
PORT
C ON VE R TER
S L A V E S T A T IO N
L A S T S T A T IO N
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
8
6
14
5
7
1
0V
+5 V
S E R IE S 9 0 - 3 0 L O C A T E D
ON POW ER SUPPLY
S E R IE S 9 0 - 7 0 L O C A T E D
ON THE CP U BO ARD
PLC 15-PIN CONNECT OR
PO W ER
SOU RCE
FO R
CONVERTER
15 - P IN
MALE
D CD ( A )
D CD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RT
C TS ( A ' )
C TS ( B ' )
R TS ( A )
R TS ( B )
+5V
0V
SH LD
P IN
TO O T H E R P L C s
RS -4 2 2
M A K E C O N N E C TIO N S
IN S I D E D - C O N N E C T O R S
*
*
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
P IN
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
P IN
15- PIN
MALE
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
RD
RTS ( A )
RTS ( B )
CTS ( A' )
CTS ( B' )
+5 V
0V
SH LD
15- PIN
MALE
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
RD
RTS ( A )
RTS ( B )
CTS ( A' )
CTS ( B' )
+5 V
0V
SH LD
G R O U N D P O T E N T IA L : M U L T IP L E U N IT S , N O T C O N N E C T E D T O T H E S A M E P O W E R S O U R C E , M U S T H A V E C O M M O N G R O U N D P O T E N T IA L S O R G R O U N D I S O L A T I O N F O R
P R O P E R O P E R A T I O N O F T H IS S Y S T E M .
T E R M I N A T I O N R E S IS T A N C E F O R TH E R E C E IV E D A T A ( R D ) S IG N A L N E E D S T O B E C O N N E C T E D O N L Y O N U N I TS A T T H E E N D O F T H E L IN E S . T H IS T E R M IN A T I O N IS M A D E O N T H E
S E R IE S 9 0 P L C P R O D U C T S B Y C O N N E C T IN G A J U M P E R B E T W E E N P IN 9 A N D P IN 1 0 I N S ID E T H E 1 5 - P IN D - S H E L L W IT H TH E F O L L O W I N G E X C E P T IO N . F O R S E R IE S 9 0 - 7 0 P L C s ,
C A T A L O G N U M B E R S IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 3 1 A N D IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 7 1 , TH E T E R M I N A T I O N F O R R D A T T H E P L C IS IM P L E M E N T E D B Y A J U M P E R B E T W E E N P I N 9 A N D P IN 1 1 .
A L S O IT IS R E C O M M E N D E D T O M A K E A N Y N E C E S S A R Y CO N N E C T IO N S IN S ID E T H E
C A B L E C O N N E C T O R T O B E M O U N T E D O N T H E PL C . IT IS N O T R E C O M M E N D E D T O
U S E T E R M IN A L S T R IP S T O O T H E R T Y P E S O F C O N N E C T O R S A L O N G T H E LE N G T H
O F T H E T R A N S M IS S IO N L IN E .
M AS TE R
1 5 - P IN
FEMALE
RS-422
PORT
R S -23 2/R S - 422
CONVERTER
(I C 6 9 0 A C C 9 0 0 )
W H E N W IR IN G R S -4 2 2 /48 5 M U L T ID R O P C A B L E S R E FL E C T IO N S O N T H E
TR A N S M IS S IO N L IN E C A N B E R E D U C E D B Y C O N F IG U R IN G T H E C A B LE IN
A D A IS Y C H A IN F A S H IO N A S S H O W N B E LO W .
9- P IN
MALE
RS -2 3 2
PORT
IB M - A T
( C O M P A T IB L E )
P IN
IC 6 9 0 C B L 7 0 2 O R E Q U IV A L E N T
R S - 2 3 2 S H IE L D E D P A IR S
15- PIN
FEMALE
C PU
RS-422
PORT
S E R IE S
90-30
LAST
S T A T IO N
15- PIN
FEMALE
C PU
RS-422
PORT
S E R IE S
90-70
SLAVE
S T A T IO N
a44513
D
Figure D-11. IBM-AT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection
GFK-1065F
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
N OTE
9- P IN
FEM ALE
2
3
4
5
8
9
7
PIN
2 5 - PIN
MAL E
SH L D
G ND
7
1
RD
TD
C TS
D TR
D CD
3
2
5
20
8
PIN
C O N VE R TE R
S LA VE S TA TIO N
LAS T S TA TIO N
2 5-PIN
FEMALE
R S-23 2
PO RT
P OW ER
SO UR CE
FOR
C O NVE RTE R
1 5- P IN
M AL E
DC D ( A )
DC D ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RT
C TS ( A' )
C TS ( B' )
R TS ( A )
R TS ( B )
5V
0V
S HL D
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
8
6
14
5
7
1
PIN
0V
5V
*
*
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
PIN
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
5
7
1
PIN
G R OU ND PO TE NTIAL : M UL TIPL E U NITS NO T CO NN EC TED TO THE SAM E PO W ER SO U RC E M UST HA VE C O MMO N G RO U ND PO TEN TIAL S O R G RO UN D IS OL ATIO N FO R
P RO PER O PER ATIO N O F TH IS SYSTE M.
C ATA LO G N UM BERS IC6 9 7C PU 73 1 AN D IC 69 7 CPU 7 71 , THE TE RMIN ATIO N FO R R D A T THE PL C IS IM PL EMEN TED B Y A JU MP ER BETW EE N P IN 9 A ND PIN 11 .
INATIO N RE SIS TAN CE FO R THE REC EIVE DATA (RD ) SIGN AL N EED S TO BE C O NN ECTED ON L Y ON U NITS AT THE EN D OF THE L IN ES. TH IS TE RMIN ATIO N IS MAD E O N TH E
* TERM
S ERIES 90 PLC PR O DU CTS BY C ON NE CTIN G A J UM PER BETW EEN PIN 9 AND PIN 1 0 IN SIDE TH E 1 5 -PIN D-SH EL L W ITH THE FOL L O W IN G EXCEPTIO N . FOR S ERIES 90 -70 P LC s,
TO O THE R PLC s
RS-4 22
MAKE CO N NEC TIO NS
INSID E D -C O NN ECTOR S
PLC 15-PIN CONNECT OR
S ERIES 9 0-30 LO CA TED
O N PO W ER SU PPL Y
S ERIES 9 0-70 LO CA TED
O N TH E C PU BO AR D
1 5-PIN
FEMALE
R S-42 2
PO RT
RS -2 32 /RS-4 22
CO N VER TER
(IC 6 90 AC C9 0 0)
ALS O IT IS R E C O MM EN D ED TO M AK E A NY N E C ES SA R Y C O N NE C TIO N S INS ID E T H E
CA B LE C O NN E C TO R T O B E MO U N TE D O N T H E PLC . IT IS N O T R EC O MM EN D E D TO
US E TE R MIN AL ST RIP S TO O TH E R TY PE S O F C O N NE C TO R S A LO N G TH E LE N G TH
O F T H E TR AN S MISS IO N LIN E.
MA ST ER
W H E N W IR IN G RS -422 /48 5 MU LT ID R O P C AB LE S RE FLE C TIO N S O N TH E
TR AN S MIS SIO N LIN E C AN B E R ED U C ED BY C O N FIG U R ING TH E C AB LE IN
A DA ISY C H A IN F AS H IO N AS S H O W N B ELO W .
9- PIN
MA LE
R S-2 3 2
PO RT
IBM -XT
(C O MPA TIBLE )
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
DC D
D TR
G ND
IC6 9 0C BL 70 1 O R EQ UIVAL EN T
RS -2 3 2 SHIEL DE D PAIRS
1 5 - P IN
M AL E
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
RD
R TS ( A )
R TS ( B )
C TS ( A ' )
C TS ( B ' )
5V
0V
SH L D
15 - PIN
MAL E
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
RD
R TS ( A )
R TS ( B )
C TS ( A ' )
C TS ( B ' )
5V
0V
SH L D
a 44 5 1 4
15 - PIN
FEMA LE
PS
RS-4 22
PO R T
SER IES
9 0 -3 0
1 5- P IN
F E MAL E
C PU
RS-4 22
PO R T
SER IES
9 0 -7 0
S LA VE
S TATIO N
D
Figure D-12. IBM-XT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection
D-17
D
PLC-to-PLC Master/Slave Connections
The 23 and 28-point Micro PLCs can operate as an SNP/SNPX master in a multidrop system that
meets the requirements for Series 90 devices. For system requirements, see Tables D-1 and D-2.
Figure D-13 shows possible configurations of systems that use the 23 or 28-point Micro PLC as an
SNP/SNPX master.
Figure D-14 shows a sample multidrop configuration with a Micro PLC as an SNP/SNPX master
that controls two Micro PLCs, a Series 90 CMM, and an Isolated Repeater/Converter
(IC655CMM590), known as a “Brick.” The Brick connects additional Series 90 PLCs. Figure D-15
details the cabling that connects the Micro PLC master to the slave devices. Note that, in this
diagram, an RTU master without flow control can replace the SNP/SNPX master. (The Micro PLC
operates as an RTU slave only.) To use an RTU master with hardware flow control, cabling must
be configured as shown in Figure D-16. For a description of RTU protocol, refer to the Series 90
PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual, GFK-0582. For details on Series 90 products other
than the Micro PLC, refer to the appropriate user’s and installation manuals.
Figures D-17 and D-18 detail the cabling that connects the Isolated Repeater/Converter to
downstream slave devices, with and without hardware flow control, respectively. (For more
information about the Isolated Repeater/Converter, refer to Appendix E.)
D-18
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
D
M ic r o P L C M a s te r
2 3 o r 2 8 - P o in t
(r e le a s e 3 . 0 a nd la t e r)
P ro g r a m m e r
(L o g ic m a s t e r 9 0
S o ft wa r e o r H H P )
Port
1
SN P/SN PX
N etw ork
a45714
Port
2 (M a s te r)
P o rt
1
M ic r o P L C
1 4 - P o in t
P o rt
2
9 0 -3 0 R a ck
PS
F ie ld C o n t r o l
S ys t e m
O p e ra t o r In t e rf a ce
U n it
M ic r o P L C
2 3 o r 2 8 - P o in t
C P C
P C M
U M M
9 0 -3 0 R a ck
PS
C P C
P C M
U M M
9 0 -7 0 R a ck
9 0 -7 0 R a ck
BIU
PS C P C B
P C M E
U M M M
PS C P C B
P C M E
U M M M
M icro
F ie ld
Pro cesso r
Is o la t e d
Repeater/Converter
A d d i t io n a l
S e rie s 9 0
PLCs
Figure D-13. Example Connections to Micro SNP/SNPX Master
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
D-19
D
Series 90
Micro PLC
Serial Port 2
a45715
R S -422
(Cable A)
Series 90 PLC
Series 90 PLC
CM M
RS-422
(Cable B)
J2
Brick *
J1
Series 90 PLC
SW =ON
Series 90 PLC
* Brick is the nickname for the
Isolated Repeater/Converter.
Figure D-14. Sample Micro SNP/SNPX Multidrop System
D-20
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
D
S ub s titute a pp ro pr ia te up s tr ea m de v ic e
( within d o tted b ox) pe r s ys te m d e s ign.
a4 5 711
P in
SN P/SN PX M aste r
S D (A )
S D (B )
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
RT
RTS (A)
C T S ( A ')
RTS (B)
C T S ( B ')
S er ie s 9 0
M ic r o
PLC
S e ria l P o rt
2
0V
SH LD
15 - pin
m a le
1 5 - p in
fe m a le
R TU Ma ster
w ith out Flo w Con tro l
R S-42 2
sh ielded tw is ted
pairs
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
15
14
8
4
7
1
*
P in
Mak e co nn ectio ns
inside D -c onnectors
*
*
*
0V
SH LD
15 -p in
fe m a le
15 - pin
m a le
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
RT
RTS (A)
C TS ( A ')
RTS (B)
C TS ( B ')
S e rie s 9 0
M ic r o
PLC
S e ria l P o rt
1
0V
SHLD
1 5 - pin
m a le
1 5 - pin
fe m a le
P in
P in
S D (A )
S D (B )
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
RT
RTS (A)
C T S ( A ')
RTS (B)
C T S ( B ')
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
6
15
14
8
4
7
1
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
6
15
14
8
4
7
1
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
RT
RTS (A)
C TS ( A ')
RTS (B)
C TS ( B ')
S erie s 90 -2 0
or
S erie s 90 -3 0
PLC
S e ria l P o rt
2
0V
SHLD
1 5 - pin
m a le
15 - p in
fe m a le
P in
13
25
9
21
10
11
22
23
24
7
1
NO T E
W hen w iring RS-4 22 /4 85 m ultidro p c ables, reflec tions o n
the tran smiss ion line c an be red uced by co nfiguring the
cab le in a daisy chain fashio n a s s how n below.
Master
Slave 3
Slave 1
Sla ve 2
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
RTS (A)
C TS ( A ')
RTS (B)
C TS ( B ')
TE R M
GND
SHLD
Nec es sa ry conne ctions shou ld be m ad e ins ide the ca ble
con nec tor to be m ou nted on the PLC . Do not us e term inal
strips or other types of c onnectors along the le ngth of
the tran smission line.
ter m ina tio n is m ad e o n the S erie s 90 P L C p rod u c ts b y c o nne c ting
a j um p e r b e tw e en p in 9 an d p in 1 0 ins id e th e 1 5 -p in D - s hell w ith
the fo llo w ing e xc ep tion : F or S e rie s 90 -7 0 P L C s , c a ta lo g num b e rs
IC 69 7 C P U 7 31 an d IC 69 7 C P U 77 1 , the ter m ina tio n fo r R D at the
P L C is im ple m e nted by a j um p er b etw e e n pin 9 a nd pin 1 1.
P o rt
1 or 2
* 15 0 O hm s
J2
15
14
16
17
11
13
10
12
19
R D ( A ')
R D ( B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
R T S (A )
C TS (A ')
R T S (B )
C TS (B ')
TERM
18
7
TERM
GND
2 5 - pin
m a le
**
25 - p in
fe m a le
2 5 - pin
m a le
P in
ion re s is ta nc e fo r the R e c e iv e D a ta (R D ) s ig nal ne e d s
* toTe brme inat
c o nnec t e d o nly on u nits a t the e nd o f the line s . This
S er ie s 9 0
CM M
SW
ON
J1
Is o la te d
R e pe ate r /
C o nv e rt er
(B ric k )
(us e d a s a
re p ea ter )
2 5 - pin
fe m a le
** O n th e C M M 31 1 , o nly po r t 2 c a n s up p o rt R S - 42 2 /R S - 48 5 .
Figure D-15. Cable A: Master to Slaves (SNP Master or RTU Master without Flow Control)
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
D-21
D
R T U M a s te r w ith H a rd w a r e F lo w C o n tro l
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
R D ( A' )
R D ( B' )
RT
R TS ( A )
C TS ( A' )
R TS ( B )
C TS ( B' )
R S -4 2 2 T w is te d
S h ie ld e d P a irs
M a ke c o n n e c tio n s
in s id e D -c o n n e c to rs
Pin
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
6
8
14
4
7
1
*
*
0V
SH LD
R D ( A' )
R D ( B ')
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RT
C TS ( A ')
R TS ( A )
C TS ( B' )
R TS ( B )
Series
90 Micro
PLC
S erial
Port 1
0V
S HLD
15- pin
Male
NOTE
W h e n w irin g R S - 4 2 2 /4 8 5 m u lt id ro p c a b le s ,
re fle c tio n s o n th e tra n s m is s io n lin e c a n
b e re d u c e d b y c o n fig u rin g th e c a b le in
a d a is y c h a in fa s h io n , a s s h o w n b e lo w .
M a s te r
S la v e 3
*
S la v e 1
Pin
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
6
8
14
4
7
1
15- pin
Fem ale
R D ( A' )
R D ( B ')
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RT
C TS ( A ')
R TS ( A )
C TS ( B ' )
R TS ( B )
S eries
90 -20
or 90-30
P LC
S erial
P ort 2
0V
S HLD
15- pin
Male
S la v e 2
15- pin
Fem ale
PIN
13
25
9
21
11
12
23
22
24
7
1
N e c e s s a ry c o n n e c tio n s s h o u ld b e m a d e in s id e
th e c a b le c o n n e c t o r to b e m o u n te d o n t h e
P L C . D o n o t u s e te r m in a l s trip s o r o th e r typ e s
o f c o n n e c to r s a lo n g th e le n g th o f t h e
t r a n s m is s io n l in e .
*
T e rm in a tio n r e s is ta n c e fo r t h e R e c e iv e D a ta (R D )
s ig n a l n e e d s t o b e c o n n e c te d o n ly o n u n its a t th e
e n d o f th e lin e s . T h is te rm in a tio n is m a d e o n th e
S e r ie s 9 0 P L C p ro d u c ts b y c o n n e c tin g a ju m p e r
b e tw e e n p in 9 a n d p in 1 0 in s id e t h e 15 -p in
D-s h e ll w ith th e fo llo w in g e x c e p tio n : F o r S e rie s
9 0 -7 0 P L C s , c a t a lo g n u m b e rs IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 3 1 a n d
IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 7 1 , th e te rm in a tio n f o r R D a t th e P L C
is im p le m e n te d b y a ju m p e r b e tw e e n p in 9 a n d
p in 1 1 .
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A)
S D (B)
C TS (A)
R TS (A ')
C TS (B)
R TS (B')
TER M
G ND
S HLD
Series 90
CMM
Port I
or 2
25-pin
Male
Pin
** O n
th e C M M 3 1 1 , o n ly P o rt 2 c a n s u p p o rt
R S - 4 2 2 /4 8 5 .
* 150 ohms
25-pin
F em ale
J2
15
14
16
17
13
11
12
10
19
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A)
S D (B)
C TS (A')
R TS (A)
C TS (B')
R TS (B)
TER M
18
7
TER M
G ND
25-pin
Male
**
SW
ON
J1
Isolated
Repeater/
Converter
(Brick)
25-pin
Fem ale
Figure D-16. Cable A: Master to Slaves (RTU Master with Hardware Flow Control)
D-22
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
D
J2
SW
P in
J1
ON
S hie lded
tw is ted
pa irs
S D (A )
S D (B )
R D ( A ')
R D ( B ')
R T S (A )
C T S ( A ')
RTS (B)
C T S ( B ')
TER M
Is o la t e d
R e p e a te r /
C o nve rte r
(B rick )
16
17
15
14
11
10
12
13
22
*
M ak e c onnec tion s
ins ide D -c onne ctors
P in
13
25
9
21
10
11
22
23
1 50 O hm s
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
R T S (A )
C T S ( A ')
RTS (B)
C T S ( B ')
24 TE RM
TERM 23
GND
2
2 5 - p in
fe m a l e
a4 57 12
S e r ie s 9 0
CMM
P o rt
1
or
2
**
7 GND
1 SH LD
2 5 - p in
2 5 - p in
m a le
m a le
2 5 - p in
f e m a le
NO T E
W hen w iring R S -4 22 /48 5 m ult idr op c ab le s , r eflec t io ns on
th e tr an s m is s ion lin e c a n be re du c e d by c on figu rin g t he
ca ble in a dais y c hain fas hion as s how n below .
S lave 1
B r ic k
P in
*
S lav e 3
S lav e 2
N ec es s ary c onnec tions sh ould be m ade ins ide the c able
c onnec to r to be m ounted on the PLC . D o n ot us e term ina l
s trips or other types of c onn ec tors a long the length o f
the tr ans m is s ion line.
* TOenrmt hine aCt eM cMo,ninn es ct atioll nj u omnp feirrs tot a cnodnlanes ct tdinr otep rsn oa nl ly1 2: 0 o h m
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
6
15
14
8
4
7
1
T o o th e r d e vic e s
( M a xi m u m o f 8 d e vic e s o n a m u lt id r o p )
T e r m ina t e t h e R D ( B ') s ig n a l
o n ly a t e n d o f m u lt id r o p c a b le .
R D ( A ')
R D ( B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
RT
RTS (A)
C T S ( A ')
RTS (B)
C T S ( B ')
0V
SH LD
1 5 - p in
m a le
S e r ie s 9 0
M ic r o
PLC
S e r ia l P o r t
1
1 5 - p in
f e m a le
r e s is to r . O n th e Is o la te d R e p e a t e r /C o n ve rt e r, in s ta ll 1 5 0
o h m r e s is t o r ( s u p p lie d ) .
** O n the C M M 311, only Por t 2 c an s upport R S-422/R S- 485.
Figure D-17. Cable B: Brick to Slaves (without Flow Control)
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
D-23
D
J2
SW
ON
Sh ie lded
twisted
pairs
P in
J1
S D (A )
SD (B)
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
R TS (A )
C TS ( A ')
R TS (B)
C TS ( B ')
TE R M
Is o la ted
rep ea te r/
C o nve rte r
(B ric k )
16
17
15
14
10
11
12
13
22
*
Make co nnec tions
Ins id e D-conne ctors
P in
13
25
9
21
11
10
23
22
*
150 O hms
TE R M 23
GND 2
2 5 - pin
fe m a le
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
SD (A)
SD (B)
C TS (A ')
RTS (A)
C TS (B ')
RTS (B)
24 TERM
S e ries 90
CMM
Port
1
or
2
**
7 GND
1 SH LD
2 5- pin
25 -p in
m a le
m a le
2 5 - pin
fe m a le
P in
NO T E
W hen wiring R S-422 /485 multidro p c ables, reflections on
the trans mis sion line can be reduced by c onfiguring the
ca ble in a da isy chain fashion as s hown belo w.
Brick
Slave 1
Slave 3
*
Sla ve 2
Nec es sary c onnections should be m ade ins ide the cable
connec to r to be m ounted on the PL C. Do not us e terminal
strips or othe r types of connec tors along the length of
the trans mis sion line.
T o o the r d ev ic es
M a xim um o f 8 de vic es on a m ult idro p.
L a s t d e v ic e m us t b e te rm in a te d .
2
3
10
11
12
13
9
15
6
8
14
4
7
1
R D ( A ')
R D ( B ')
S D (A )
S D (B )
RT
C TS (A ')
RTS (A)
C TS (B ')
RTS (B)
0V
SH LD
1 5 - pin
m a le
S erie s 9 0
M ic r o
PLC
S e rial P o r t
1
15 - p in
fe m a le
ination res is ta nc e for the R e c e ive D ata (R D ) s igna l
* Term
need s to be c o nne c te d o nly o n unit s at the en d of the
line s . This t erm inat io n is m ad e on the S e ries 9 0 P LC
pro du c ts b y c o nnec ting a jum pe r b et we en pin 9 and pin
10 ins ide the 1 5- pin D -s he ll w ith the fo llow ing e xc e ption:
Fo r S e rie s 9 0-7 0 P LC s , c a ta log n um b ers IC 69 7 C P U 7 31
and IC 6 97 C P U 7 71 , the ter m ination fo r R D a t the P L C is
im p lem e nted by a jum p e r be tw e en p in 9 a nd pin 1 1.
O n the C M M , ins tall j um pe r to c onne c t in terna l 12 0 ohm
res is to r. O n the Is o late d R e pe at er/C o nve rter, ins tall 15 0
ohm r es is to r (s upp lie d).
** On the CM M 311, only Port 2 can support RS-422/RS-485.
Figure D-18. Cable B: Brick to Slaves (with Hardware Flow Control)
D-24
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
D
A master/slave network can be made up of 23 and 28-point Micro PLCs as shown in Figure D-19.
The Micro PLC firmware does not limit the number of levels in the network. However, the time
required for communications between the top and bottom levels could limit the number of levels
that can be used in your application.
The RS-422 protocol limits the number of slaves per master to eight. More slaves can be added if a
repeater is used. In the example below, each master device acts as a repeater.
To implement a network similar to the one below, Port 2 on each of the master PLCs must be
configured as an SNP Master. For a sample ladder logic program that initiates SNP between a
master and a slave device, refer to “SNP COMMREQ Programming Examples” in Chapter 6 of the
Series 90™ PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual, GFK-0582.
Note
In communications logic using COMM_REQ function blocks you should use the
following parameters:
SYS ID should be 0001 for Rack 0, Slot 1
TASK ID should be 20 (14H) for Micro PLC Port 2
Pro gram m er
(Logic m as ter 90
s oftwa re or H H P )
Por t 1
Port 2
Add itional P LC s
(up to eight per m as ter,
m ore w ith a repeater )
P ort 1
Port 2
Po rt 1
Por t 2
Add itional P LC s
(up to eight per m a ster,
m ore w ith a repe ater)
Po rt 2
Po rt 1
P ort 1
Po rt 2
Additio nal P L C s
(up to eight per m as ter,
m ore with a r epea ter)
P ort 1
23 or 28- point M ic ro P LC s
R el. 3.00 or later
P ort 2
P ort 1
P ort 2
A dditiona l P LC s
(up to eight per m a ster,
m ore w ith a repe ater)
Figure D-19. Sample Micro PLC Network
GFK-1065F
Appendix D Serial Port and Cables
D-25
Appendix Converters
E
This appendix provides detailed descriptions of the following converters:
„
„
„
GFK-1065F
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter........................................................................ E-2
Miniconverter Kit ..................................................................................................... E-9
Isolated Repeater/Converter .................................................................................... E-13
E-1
E
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
This section provides a detailed description of the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
(IC690ACC900) for the Series 90 Programmable Logic Controllers.
Features
•
Provides the Series 90 PLCs with an interface to devices that use the RS-232 interface.
•
Allows connection to a programming computer without a Work Station Interface board.
•
Easy cable connection to a Series 90-70 PLC, Series 90-30 PLC, or Series 90 Micro PLC.
•
No external power needed; operates from +5 volt DC power provided by the Series 90 PLC.
•
Convenient, lightweight self-contained unit.
Functions
The RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter provides an RS-232 serial interface for the Series 90
PLCs, which have a built-in RS-422/RS-485 interface. Specifically, it provides a serial connection
between a Series 90 PLC serial port and the serial port on the programming computer without the
need for a Work Station Interface to be installed in the computer. The programming computer can
be a Workmaster II computer, or IBM PS/2 or compatible computer.
Location in System
The RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter is a free-standing device that requires two cables as the
connections between the PLC and the programmer. Its location is limited only by the length of the
connecting cables as listed in the interface specifications in "Specifications." The cable at the PLC
end that connects to the RS-422/RS-485 connector on the converter can be up to 10 feet in length
(without an external source of +5 VDC) and up to 1000 feet (300m) in length with an external
source of +5 VDC. The cable from the RS-232 connector on the converter to the programming
computer’s serial port can be up to 50 feet (15m) in length.
F RO NT VIEW
REAR VIEW
a44694
GE F a nu c
IC690ACC900A
CABLE ADAPTER
MADE IN USA
Figure E-1. Front and Rear View of Converter
E-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
Installation
Installation of the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter consists of connecting two cables. Select
the proper cables for your installation. Prewired cables (see below) are available from GE Fanuc, or
if cables of different lengths are required by your application, you can build your own cables.
Specifications for building these cables are provided on page E-8.
You do not need to connect an external source of power to the converter for a cable length of 10
feet, or less, since the necessary power connections of +5VDC and signal ground are derived from
the PLC’s backplane bus through the cable that connects to the PLC.
1.
Select one of the three RS-232 compatible cables (10 feet in length) that will connect the
programmer’s (or other serial device) RS-232 serial port to the RS-232 port on the converter.
The catalog numbers of these cables are: IC690CBL701 (use with Workmaster industrial
computer, or IBM PC-XT or compatible personal computer), IC690CBL702 (use with IBM
PC-AT or compatible personal computer), and IC690CBL705 (use with Workmaster II
industrial computer, or IBM PS/2 or compatible personal computer).
2.
A standard 6-foot cable (HHP compatible) is available to connect the RS-422/RS-485 port on
the converter to the RS-485 port on the PLC. The catalog number of this cable is
IC693CBL303.
Installation of these cables should be done with the PLC powered-down.
GFK-1065F
•
Connect the 25-pin male connector on the 10 foot cable to the 25-pin female connector on the
converter.
•
Connect the female connector (9-pin or 25-pin) on the opposite end of this cable to the male
RS-232 connector (serial port) on the selected programming (or other serial) device. If you
build your own cable, use a connector that is compatible with your serial device.
•
Note that both ends of the 6-foot RS-422/RS-485 compatible cable are the same; a 15-pin male
connector is attached at both ends. Connect one end of this cable to the 15-pin female
connector on the RS-422/RS-485 connector on the converter.
•
Connect the other end of this cable to the 15-pin female connector, which interfaces to the RS485 compatible serial port on the Series 90 Micro, Series 90-30, or Series 90-70 PLC. For the
Series 90-30 PLCs, this connector is accessed by opening the hinged door on the power
supply. The serial port connector for the Series 90-70 PLC is on the CPU module and is
accessed by opening the hinged door on the module. On Micro PLCs, the serial port is located
behind a hinged door on the front of the unit. On 23- and 28-point Micro PLCs, which have
two serial ports, be sure to use Port 1 to connect the processor.
Appendix E Converters
E-3
E
Cable Description
The serial connection to the Series 90-70 PLC (Figure E-2) is to the RS-422/RS-485 compatible
serial port connector, located at the bottom of the CPU module behind the hinged door, through an
available 6 foot (2 meter) serial interface cable - IC693CBL303. Wiring information and
recommended cable and connectors are provided for those who want to build a cable having a
different length.
The serial connection to the Series 90-30 PLC is to the RS-485 compatible serial port connector
located behind the hinged door on the right front of the power supply, through the same 6 foot
serial interface cable, IC693CBL303, or equivalent (Figure E-3).
SERIES 90-70
a44695
C
P
U
PROGRAMMER
RS-485
RS-232
CONVERTER
Figure E-2. Typical Configuration with Series 90-70 PLC
a44681
PROGRAMMER
SERIES 90-30
RS-485
RS-232
CONVERTER
Figure E-3. Typical Configuration with Series 90-30 PLC
E-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
Pin Assignments
Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS-232 interface and the RS-422/RS-485 interface
are listed in the following tables.
Table E-1. RS-232 Interface for Converter
Pin
Signal Name
Function
I/O
1
Shield
Cable shield
-
2
SD
Transmitted Data
Out
3
RD
Received Data
In
4
RTS
Request To Send
Out
5
CTS
Clear To Send
In
6
-
No connection
-
7
SG
Signal Ground
-
8
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
In
9 to 19
-
No connection
-
20
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
Out
21 to 25
-
No connection
-
Table E-2. RS-422/RS-485 Interface for Converter
Pin
GFK-1065F
Signal Name
Function
I/O
1
Cable Shield
Cable shield
-
2
DCD(A)
Differential Data Carrier Detect
Out
3
DCD(B)
Differential Data Carrier Detect
Out
4
ATCH/
Attach (used with HHP)
n/a
5
+5 VDC
Logic Power
In
6
RTS(A)
Differential Request To Send
Out
7
SG
Signal Ground, 0V
In
8
CTS(B’)
Differential Clear To Send
In
9
RT
Resistor Terminator
NA
10
RD(A’)
Differential Receive Data
In
11
RD(B’)
Differential Receive Data
In
12
SD(A)
Differential Send Data
Out
13
SD(B)
Differential Send Data
Out
14
RTS(B)
Differential Request To Send
Out
15
CTS(A’)
Differential Clear To Send
In
Appendix E Converters
E-5
E
Logic Diagram
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter.
SH IE LD
a 4 4 5 39
RS-232/RS-485
CONVERTER
(IC690ACC900)
R S -2 32
2 5-P IN
R S -4 85
1 5 -P IN
1
1
9
S H IE LD
TE R M IN A TO R
R ES IS TO R
120
11
SD
2
10
13
RD
R D ( B' )
R D ( A' )
S D (B )
3
12
8
S D (A )
CTS ( B' )
MO DEM
R TS
4
15
14
CTS
3
DCD
8
2
L O G IC
POW ER
SG
RTS ( B )
5
6
DCD
CTS ( A' )
7
5
7
RTS ( A )
DCD ( B )
DCD ( A )
5
SG
NC
DTR
20
AT TA C H
4
A TC H /
Figure E-4. RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram
E-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
Jumper Configuration
There are three jumper locations on the converter board for selection of user options. Each jumper
position has three pins, as shown in the following illustration. These jumper positions, labeled JP2,
JP3, and JP4, are accessed by removing the square plastic cover on the top of the converter.
Configuration can be changed as required by carefully removing one or more of the jumpers with a
pair of needle nose pliers and placing it on the desired pair of pins.
Refer to the description of these selectable jumper positions in Table E-3 and place the jumper on
the selected pair of pins. The pin numbers are 1, 2, and 3. Default jumper locations are indicated by
a rectangle around the pins to be jumpered for each position. The default pin numbers are 1 and 2.
a44680
R S -422/R S 485
R S -232
1
2
3
JP 2
JP 3
JP 4
Figure E-5. Location of Jumpers for User Options
Table E-3. Jumper Configuration for RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
Jumper
Position
JP2
JP3
JP4
Label
DCD
MODEM
ATTACH
Jumper
Position
Description*
1 2 3
Default position 1 and 2 is used when the device
communicating with the PLC does not supply the Carrier
Detect signal. JP2 forces the DCD signal active on the RS-485
port.
1 2 3
Use jumper positions 2 and 3 if the device does supply the
Carrier Detect signal. This allows the programming device to
control DCD.
1 2 3
Default position 1 and 2 is used when an attached Modem does
not require the Clear To Send (CTS) signal. This allows the
programming device to control the RTS signal.
1 2 3
Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used when the attached Modem
does require the CTS signal (most modems require this signal).
Forces RTS to be continually active.
1 2 3
Default position 1 and 2 is used for most applications
communicating with the PLC via a serial programming device.
1 2 3
Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used if the device communicating
with the PLC is intended to emulate the HHP protocol.
*Refer to the documentation provided with your serial device for signal requirements.
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
E-7
E
Specifications
Examples of cable configurations required when using the converter can be found in Appendix D.
Specifications for the converter are listed in the following table.
Table E-4. Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter
Power Requirements
Voltage
5 volts DC, +5%
Current
170 mA, ±5%
RS-422/RS-485 Interface Cables
Maximum cable length
Cable Type: *
6 feet (2m)
30 feet (10m) **
1000 feet(300m)
Cable type: Belden 9508, AWG #24 (0.22 mm2)
Cable type: Belden 9309, AWG #22 (0.36 mm2)
≥30 feet, up to 1000 feet (300m)** Same cable as for 30 feet.
Connector Type
15-pin D-type Male Subminiature (both ends)
RS-232 Interface Cable
Maximum cable length
50 feet (15m)
Connector Type
25-pin D-type Female Subminiature (converter end) 9pin, 15-pin, or 25-pin (depending on type of connector on
your serial device) D-type Female Subminiature
(programming device end)
* Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same electrical
characteristics is acceptable. It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire. Since it is
sometimes difficult to find a cable with the desired number of twisted pairs (the Belden 9309 has
an extra pair), you might end up with a cable with extra pairs.
**For distances over 10 feet, the +5 volt DC logic power source must be provided externally by
connecting an external power supply to the +5V and SG (0V) connections at the converter end
of the cable. The +5V pin at the PLC connector end of the cable must not be connected to the
cable. The +5V and SG connections from the external power supply must be isolated from its
own power line ground connection. Ensure that there is no connection between the external
supply and the PLC except the SG cable connection.
E-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
Miniconverter Kit
This section describes the Miniconverter Kit for use with Series 90 PLCs.
Description of Miniconverter
The Miniconverter Kit (IC690ACC901) consists of an RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232 Miniconverter, a
6-foot (2 meter) serial extension cable, and a 9-pin to 25-pin Converter Plug assembly. The 15-pin
SNP port connector on the Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Series
90-30 power supply, Series 90-70 CPU, Series 90-20 CPU, or Series 90 Micro CPU. The 9-pin RS232 port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS-232 compatible device.
a44985
RS-422
POR T
RS-232
POR T
Figure E-6. Series 90 SNP to RS-232 Miniconverter
When used with an IBM PC-AT, or compatible computer, one end of the extension cable plugs into
the Miniconverter’s 9-pin serial port connector, while the other end plugs into the 9-pin serial port
of the computer. The Converter plug (supplied with kit) is required to convert the 9-pin serial port
connector on the Miniconverter to the 25-pin serial port connector on the GE Fanuc Workmaster II
computer, or an IBM PC-XT or PS/2 Personal Computer.
The GE Fanuc Workmaster computer requires an additional adapter (not supplied with kit - please
contact your local GE Fanuc PLC distributor) for use with the Miniconverter.
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
E-9
E
Pin Assignments
The pinout of the Miniconverter is shown in the following two tables. Table E-5 lists the pinout for
the RS-232 port. The direction of signal flow is with respect to the Miniconverter. The pinouts
were chosen to allow direct connection (using a straight through, or 1-to-1 cable (as provided with
kit)) to the IBM PC-AT. Most IBM compatible computers equipped with an RS-232 port will
provide a pinout compatible with the one shown below.
Table E-5. Miniconverter RS-232 Port
Pin
2
3
5
7
8
Signal Name
SD - Send Data
RD - Receive Data
GND - Ground
CTS - Clear To Send
RTS - Request To Send
Direction
Output
Input
NA
Input
Output
Table E-6 is the pinout for the Miniconverter’s RS-422 serial port. The direction of signal flow is
also with respect to the Miniconverter.
Table E-6. Miniconverter RS-422 Port
Pin
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
E-10
Signal Name
SHLD - Shield
+5VDC - Power
CTS(A’) - Clear To Send
GND - Ground
RTS(B) - Request To Send
RT - Receive Termination
SD(A) - Send Data
SD(B) - Send Data
RD(A’) - Receive Data
RD(B’) - Receive Data
CTS(B’) Clear To Send
RTS(A) - Request To Send
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
Direction
NA
Input
Input
NA
Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
Input
Input
Output
GFK-1065F
E
System Configurations
The Miniconverter can be used in a point-to-point configuration as described above, or in a
multidrop configuration with the host device configured as the master and one or more PLCs
configured as slaves.
The multidrop configuration requires a straight through (1-to-1) cable from the Miniconverter’s
RS-422 port to the first slave PLC’s SNP port. Other slaves will require a daisy chain connection
between slaves. A maximum of eight devices can be connected in an RS-422 multidrop
configuration. All of the devices must have a common ground. If ground isolation is required, you
can use the GE Fanuc Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) in place of the Miniconverter.
When using the Miniconverter with a modem connection, it may be necessary to jumper RTS to
CTS (consult the user’s manual for your modem).
Cable Diagrams (Point-To-Point)
When connecting the Miniconverter to IBM PC and compatible computers with hardware
handshaking, the following cable connections should be used.
TXD
RXD
CTS
RTS
GND
P IN
P IN
2
3
7
8
5
2
3
7
8
5
1
6
4
M INICO NVE RTER
RS-232 PO RT
9-PIN
CO NNECT O R
a44982
RXD
TXD
RTS
CTS
GND
DCD
DSR
DTR
IBM PC-AT
9-PIN
C ON NECT O R
Figure E-7. Miniconverter to PC-AT
TXD
RXD
CTS
RTS
GND
Pin
Pin
2
3
7
8
5
3
2
4
5
7
8
6
20
Miniconverter
RS-232 Port
9-pin
Connector
a44983
RXD
TXD
RTS
CTS
GND
DC D
DSR
DTR
W orkmaster II,
IBM PC-XT, PS/2
25-pin
Connector
Figure E-8. Miniconverter to Workmaster II, PC-XT, PS/2
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
E-11
E
a44984
P in
P in
2
3
7
8
5
3
2
4
5
7
TXD
R XD
CTS
RTS
GND
M iniconverter
R S -232 P ort
9-pin
Connector
R XD
TXD
R TS
C TS
GND
W orkm aster
9-pin
Connector
Figure E-9. Miniconverter to 9-Pin Workmaster or PC-XT Computer (Additional Adapter Required)
Table E-7. Miniconverter Specifications
Mechanical
RS-422
15-pin D-shell male for direct mounting to Series 90 serial port.
RS-232
9-pin D-shell male for connection to RS-232 serial port of a Workmaster
II computer or Personal Computer.
Electrical and General
E-12
Voltage Supply
+5VDC (supplied by PLC power supply)
Typical Current
Version A (IC690ACC901A) - 150mA
Version B (IC690ACC901B) - 100mA
Operating Temperature
0 to 70° C (32 to 158° F)
Baud Rate
38.4K Baud maximum
Conformance
EIA-422 (Balanced Line) or EIA-423 (Unbalanced Line)
Ground Isolation
Not provided
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
Isolated Repeater/Converter
This section describes how to use the Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) with Series 90
PLCs. The following topics are covered in this section:
•
Description of the Isolated Repeater/Converter
•
System Configurations
•
Cable Diagrams
This unit can be purchased from GE Fanuc Automation. Please contact any GE Fanuc Automation
sales office or PLC distributor.
Note
The catalog number for the Isolated Repeater/Converter was previously
IC630CCM390.
Description of the Isolated Repeater/Converter
The Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) can be used for the following purposes:
•
To provide ground isolation where a common ground cannot be established between
components.
•
To boost RS-422 signals for greater distance and more drops.
•
To convert signals from RS-232 to RS-422 or RS-422 to RS-232.
The locations of key features on the unit are shown in Figure E-10.
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
E-13
E
(TO P V IEW )
RS422
RS422
POW ER
CORD
a42418
H
115VAC
N
230VAC
N
G E F anu c
FU S E
RS232C
G
ISOLATED RS232
ADAPTOR UNIT
POW ER
J1
J2
S W ITC H
POW ER
CORD
FU S E
(BACK VIE W )
FUSE-1AMP
(SIDE V IEW )
Figure E-10. Isolated/Repeater Converter
The Isolated Repeater/Converter has the following features:
E-14
•
Two 25-pin female D-type connectors. (Two 25-pin male, D-type connectors (solder pot), are
included for user cabling.)
•
115/230 VAC power connection (internal) 4-position terminal block.
•
Fused 1-Amp power protection.
•
Power ON (green) indicator LED.
•
Three-position toggle switch, recessed in the back of the unit, is set according to the system
configurations described on page E-18.
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater/Converter
The figure below provides a functional overview of the unit. Note the three-position switch for
controlling the J1 port transmitters. This switch is discussed in “System Configurations” on page E19
a44782
RS-422/RS-232C
J2
OPTICAL
ISOLAT ION
RS-422
J1
2
22
22
14
14
15
15
23
23
R D ( B' )
SD (R S-232C )
SD (B )
R D ( A' )
SD (A )
4
8
R TS (R S -232C )
C TS ( B' )
10
10
RE SISTO R
150
11
11
C TS ( A' )
R TS (B )
R TS (A )
19
9
R D ( B' )
17
25
SD ( B )
16
17
R D ( A' )
18
16
SD ( A )
3
24
R D (R S -232C )
8
CTS ( B' )
R TS (B )
R TS (A )
12
12
13
13
CTS ( A ')
9
5
( C TS)
C TS (R S-232C )
(O N )
115
V AC
ISO LA TED
P O W ER
SU PPLIES
(SE )
25
SE (R S-232C )
Figure E-11. RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
E-15
E
Note
All inputs are biased to the inactive state. Inputs left unconnected will produce a
binary 1 (OFF) state on the corresponding output.
Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater/Converter
Table E-8. Isolated Repeater/Converter Pin Assignments
J1 RS-422 Port (25-pin female connector)
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
0V
CTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
CTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
RTS(B)
RTS(A)
RD(B’)
RD(A’)
SD(A)
SD(B)
NC
NC
NC
NC
RD(B’)
RD(A’)
SD(A)
Description
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
Ground Connection
Clear to Send (Optional Termination)
Clear to Send (Optional Termination)
Clear to Send
Clear to Send
Request to Send
Request to Send
Receive Data
Receive Data
Send Data
Send Data
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
Receive Data
Receive Data
Send Data
J2 RS-422/RS-232 Port (25-pin female connector)
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
NC
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
NC
0V
CTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
RTS(B)
RTS(A)
CTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
SD(B)
SD(A)
RD(A’)
RD(B’)
RD(A’)
RD(B’)
NC
NC
SD(B)
SD(A)
NC
Description
No connection
Send Data (RS-232)
Receive Data (RS-232)
Request to Send (RS-232)
Clear to Send (RS-232)
No connection
Ground Connection
Clear to Send Optional Termination)
Clear to Send (Optional Termination)
Request to Send
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Clear to Send
Send Data
Send Data
Receive Data
Receive Data
Receive Data (Optional Termination)
Receive Data (Optional Termination)
No connection
No connection
Send Data (Optional Termination)
Send Data (Optional Termination)
No connection
SD (Send Data) and RD (Receive Data) are the same as TXD and RXD (used in the Series Six PLC).
(A) and (B) are the same as - and + A and B and denote outputs. A’ and B’ denote inputs.
E-16
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
7
3
2
5
4
GND
RD
SD
CTS
RTS
115V AC
2 5 - P IN
M ALE
P IN
2 5 - P IN
FEMALE
R S -2 32 /
R S -4 2 2
PORT
J2
**
2 5 - P IN
FEMALE
R S -4 2 2
PORT
J1
)
)
)
)
CTS ( A'
CTS ( B'
RTS ( A
RTS ( B
7
11
10
13
12
22
23
15
14
16
17
PIN
150
* * S W IT C H I N C E N T E R P O S IT I O N
2 5 - P IN
MALE
0V
)
)
)
)
RD ( A'
RD ( B'
SD ( A
SD ( B
RD ( B' )
RD ( A' )
Pin 7 of the J1 port is connected to the metal
shell of the J1 connector. Pin 7 of the J2 port
is connected to the metal shell of the J2
connector. These two signal ground
connections are isolated from each other
and from the power system ground (green
wire on the terminal block). To maintain
proper isolation, these signal grounds
cannot be tied together.
RS -422
T W I S T E D S H IE L D E D
PAIR S
*
7
1
2
3
12
13
10
11
9
6
14
15
8
P IN
(
(
(
(
1 5 - P IN
MALE
A )
B )
A' )
B' )
A )
B )
A' )
B' )
0V
SHLD
SD (
SD (
RD (
RD (
RT
R TS
R TS
C TS
C TS
The signal ground connections (pin 7 on
each connector) must be made between the
Isolated Repeater/Converter and the PLC
for J1, and the Isolated Repeater/Converter
and the host computer for J2.
GND
PIN
R S - 4 2 2 IS O L A T E D R E P E A T E R
RS-2 32 C O NVE R TER
(IC 6 55 C C M 5 90 )
Caution
1 5 - P IN
FEMALE
R S -4 2 2
PORT
S E R IE S
90 P LC
a44783
C A T A L O G N U M B E R S IC 6 9 7 C P U 7 3 1 A N D I C 6 9 7 C P U 7 7 1 , T H E T E R M IN A T IO N F O R R D A T T H E P L C I S IM P L E M E N T E D B Y A J U M P E R B E T W E E N P I N 9 A N D P IN 1 1 .
* TS EE RR MIEISN A9 TI0 OP LNCRPERSOISDTUACNTCSE BFYO CR OTNHNEERC ET CI NEGIVAE JDUAMTPAE(RR DB )E ST WIG ENEANL NP INE E 9D SA NTDO PBINE C1 O0 NI NNSEI DC ET ETDH EO N1 5L -YP OI NN DU- SN HI TSE L LA TWTITHHE TEHNED FOOFL LTOH WE ILNING EESX. CTEHPIST ITOENR. MFINOART SI OENR IEIS SM9A0D- 7E0 OPNL CTsH, E
HOST
CO MPUTER
TD
RD
R TS
C TS
DCD
DTR
R S -2 3 2
S H IE L D E D
P AIRS
E
Figure E-12. Example RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Connection
E-17
E
System Configurations
The following figures show various ways you can connect the Isolated Repeater/Converter to
convert signals, expand the number of drops, and obtain greater distance. Any system configuration
can be reduced to a minimum number of cables, each covering a part of the overall system
configuration. The following examples of system configurations refer to these cables as Cables A
through E, which are described in “Cable Diagrams” on page E-20.
Downstream and Upstream Contention. In this section, simple multidrop configurations are
those where a single Isolated Repeater/Converter is used. Complex multidrop configurations
contain one or more multidrop sections where an Isolated Repeater/Converter is included as one of
the drops. In both simple and complex multidrop configurations, the transmitters directed
downstream from the master can be on at all times. There will be no contention for the
communication line because only one device (the master) transmits downstream.
In simple multidrop configurations, there will be no contention when transmitting upstream as long
as devices tri-state their drivers when idle and turn them on only when they have something to
transmit. This is the case for the Series 90-70 and Series 90-30 CMMs.
In complex multidrop configurations, however, special steps must be taken to switch the upstream
transmitters of the Isolated Repeater/Converter.
Switching Upstream Transmitters. For the RS-422 drivers to be active at the J2 port of the
Isolated Repeater/Converter, the RTS input at J1 must be true. The state of the RS-422 drivers at
the J1 port depends on the position of the switch on the unit. When the switch is in the center
position, the J1 transmitters will always be turned on. When the switch is in the CTS position
(toward the power cable), then either the RS-232 or RS-422 CTS signal must be true to turn on the
J1 drivers.
Note
Note the position of the switch on the Isolated/Repeater Converter in the
following system configurations.
Simple Multidrop Configuration
This configuration shows how to connect a single Isolated Repeater/Converter for signal
conversion or for greater distance.
a44927
Series 90 PLC
or
Host
RS-232
(Cable A)
RS-422
(Cable B)
J2
* Brick
SW
RS-422
(Cable D)
J1
Series 90 PLC
ON
Series 90 PLC
*
Brick is the nicknam e for the
isolated repeater/converter
Figure E-13. Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter
E-18
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
Complex Multidrop Configuration
This configuration shows how to connect multiple Isolated Repeater/Converters for signal
conversion, greater distance, and more drops.
R S-422
(C ABLE C )
a44928
SER IES 90 PLC
SER IES 90 PLC
OR
HO ST
SER IES 90 PLC
J2
RS-232
(C ABLE A)
*
R S-422
(CABLE D )
BRICK
SW
J1
J2
*
RS-422
(C ABLE D)
BR IC K
SW
ON
J1
SERIES 90 PLC
ON
SERIES 90 PLC
RS-422
(C ABLE B)
J2
* BRICK
SW
R S-422
(CABLE D )
J1
ON
J2
* BR IC K
SW
RS-422
(C ABLE D)
J1
SERIES 90 PLC
ON
SERIES 90 PLC
IS TH E N IC KNAM E FO R THE ISOLATED
* BRICK
REPEATER /C ON VER TER
J1
*BR IC K
R S-232
(CABLE E)
J2
SER IES 90 PLC
SW C TS
Figure E-14. Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter
Rules for Using Repeater/Converters in Complex Networks
When designing a complex multidrop network including PLCs and RS-422 repeater/converters
(bricks), the following rules apply:
Rule 1: When using a brick as a repeater, port J2 should always be directed toward the host
device, and Port J1 should always be directed away from the host device. The switch located on the
side of the brick should always be in the center position (ON). The only case in which Port J1 is
directed toward the host is when the brick is used as a converter (RS-232) at the slave. The switch
is in the right position (CTS).
Rule 2: If a Series 90 CMM slave device is located downstream of a brick, set the configuration of
the CMM serial port to NONE flow control with a 10ms Modem Turnaround Delay (applies to
CCM, SNP, and SNP-X protocols only).
Rule 3: Do not place more than three bricks in a single communication path between the host and
the slave devices.
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
E-19
E
Cable Diagrams
The cable diagrams below are referred to as Cables A-E from the system configurations in the
previous figures. These diagrams show the principles for constructing your own cables and can be
modified to fit your specific application.
a44929
Series 90
C MM
PIN
PIN
J2
TD
RD
R TS
C TS
DC D
DTR
2
3
4
5
8
20
3
2
4
5
RD
SD
R TS
C TS
GN D
SHLD
7
1
7
G ND
SW
25- pin
Male
J1
Isolated
Repeater/
Converter
(Brick)
Port
1 or 2
25- pin
Fem ale
ON
25- pin
Fem ale
25- pin
Male
Figure E-15. Cable A: RS-232 CMM To Converter
a44930
Series 90
C MM
Port
1 or 2
25-pin
Fem ale
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A ')
RD (B ')
TER M
TER M
R TS (A)
C TS (A')
R TS (B)
C TS (B')
G ND
SH LD
PIN
PIN
9
21
13
25
12
24
10
11
22
23
7
1
16
17
15
14
19
18
10
12
11
13
7
*
*
25-pin
Male
J2
SW
ON
RD (A')
RD (B')
SD (A)
SD (B)
TE RM
TE RM
RTS (B)
CTS (B')
RTS (A)
CTS (A')
GN D
Isolated
R epeater/
C onverter
(Brick)
25-pin
Male
25-pin
Fem ale
J1
inate connection: On the C MM, Install jum per to connect internal 120 ohm resistor.
* Term
O n the isolated repeater/converter, install 150 ohm resistor (supplied).
Figure E-16. Cable B: RS-422 CMM To Converter
E-20
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
a44931
SU BSTITU TE APP RO PRIATE UP STREAM DEVIC E
(W ITH IN DO TTE D B OX) PER SYSTEM DIAG RAM S.
SHIELDED
TW ISTE D
PAIRS
P IN
SD (A )
SD (B )
R D (A')
R D (B')
TE R M
TE R M
R TS (A )
C TS (A')
R TS (B )
C TS (B')
GND
S H LD
SE R IE S 90
CMM
PORT
1 OR 2
P IN
13
25
9
21
12
24
10
11
22
23
7
1
*
*
25- P IN
M AL E
25- P IN
F EM A LE
J2
9
21
13
25
12
24
10
11
22
23
7
1
M AKE CO N NECTIO NS
INS ID E D -CO NN ECTO RS
SW
ON
IS O LATE D
R EP E A TE R /
C O N V E R TER
(B R IC K)
S ER IE S 90
CMM
PORT
I
OR
2
**
25- P IN
M A LE
J1
PIN
P IN
S D (A )
S D (B )
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
R TS (B)
C TS (B ')
R TS (A)
C TS (A ')
TER M
16
17
15
14
12
10
13
11
22
15
14
16
17
22
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
SD (A )
SD (B )
TE R M
23
TE R M
TER M
GND
23
7
7
GND
* 150 OH M S
25- P IN
F E M ALE
J1
SW
C TS
J2
ISO LA TED
R E P EA TE R /
C O N VE R TE R
(B R IC K )
(U S ED A S A
C O N VE R TE R )
*150 O HM S
25- PIN
M A LE
25- PIN
F EM A LE
25- P IN
FE M A LE
25- PIN
M A LE
NO TE
W HEN W IRING RS-422 /485 M ULTID RO PCABLES,
R EFLECTIO NS O N TH E TR ANSM ISSIO N LIN E C AN BE
R EDUC ED BY CO NFIG URIN G THE CABLE IN A DA IS Y
C HAIN FASHIO N AS SHO W N B ELO W .
M ASTER
CM M SLAVE 1
P IN
*
C M M SLAVE 3
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
SD (A )
SD (B )
TE R M
TE R M
R TS (A)
C TS (A')
R TS (B)
C TS (B')
0V
SH L D
J2
16
17
15
14
19
R D (A ')
R D (B ')
SD (A )
SD (B )
TE R M
18
TE R M
150 O HM S
CM M SLAVE 2
SW
ON
J1
ISO LA TE D
R E PE A TE R /
C O N VE R TE R
(B R IC K )
(U S ED A S A
R E P E ATE R )
7
ALSO IT IS REC O M M ENDE D TO M AKE A NY NECE SSARY
C ON NEC TIO NS INSID E TH E C ABLE CO NN ECTO R TO BE
M O UN TE D ON THE CM M . IT IS NO T R ECO M M EN DED TO
U SE TER M INAL STRIPS O R OTH ER TYP ES O F
C ON NEC TO RS ALON G THE LEN G TH O F TH E
TRAN SM ISSIO N LINE.
GND
25- P IN
M AL E
25- P IN
FE M A LE
TO O TH E R D EV IC E S
(M A XIM U M O F 8 D E V IC E S O N A M U L TID R O P)
TE R M IN ATE TH E R D (B ') S IG N A L
O N LY A T E N D O F M U LTID R O P C A B LE
M INATE CO NNE CTION O N FIRST AND LA ST DR O PS O NLY: O N THE CM M , INS TALL JUM PER TO C O NNEC T INTER NAL 120 O HM
* TER
R ESISTOR . O N TH E IS OLATED REPEATER /C ON VERTER , INSTALL 150 O H M R ESISTOR (SU PPLIED )
** O N THE CM M 311, O NLY PO RT 2 CAN SU PPO RT R S-422/RS-485.
Figure E-17. Cable C: RS-422 Twisted Pair
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
E-21
E
J2
SW
ON
ISOLATED
REPEATER/
CONVERTER
(BRICK)
25- PIN
FEMALE
J1
SHIELDED
TW ISTED
PAIRS
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A')
RD (B')
CTS (A')
CTS (B')
16
17
15
14
11
10
TERM
22
TERM
GND
23
7
MAKE CONNECTIONS
INSIDE D-CONNECTORS
a44932
PIN
13
25
9
21
10
22
* 150 OHMS
CMM SLAVE 3
SERIES 90
CMM
PORT
I
OR
2
*24
**
TERM
7 GND
1 SHLD
25- PIN
MALE
25-PIN
MALE
NOTE
W HEN W IRING RS-422 /485 MULTIDROPCABLES,
REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE
REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY
CHAIN FASHION ASSHOW N BELOW .
MASTER
RD (A')
RD (B')
SD (A)
SD (B)
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
PIN
CMM SLAVE 1
25-PIN
FEMALE
J1
15
14
16
17
13
12
RD (A')
RD (B')
SD (A)
SD (B)
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
22
TERM
23
7
TERM
GND
PIN
25-PIN
FEMALE
CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY:
* TERMINATE
ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL
120 OHM RESISTOR. ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER,
INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED)
* * ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS-422/RS-485.
* 150 OHMS
J2
16
17
15
14
11
10
RD (A')
RD (B')
SD (A)
SD (B)
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
19
TERM
18
7
TERM
GND
25-PIN
MALE
J2
(USED AS A
CONVERTER)
25-PIN
MALE
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY
CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE
MOUNTED ON THE CMM. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO
USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE
TRANSMISSION LINE.
CTS
ISOLATED
REPEATER/
CONVERTER
(BRICK)
CMM SLAVE 2
* 150 OHMS
SW
SW
ON
J1
ISOLATED
REPEATER/
CONVERTER
(BRICK)
(USED AS A
REPEATER)
25-PIN
FEMALE
TO OTHER DEVICES
(MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP)
TERMINATE THE RD (B') SIGNAL ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE
Figure E-18. Cable D: RS-422 Twisted Pair
E-22
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
E
J1
SW
C TS
ISO LATED
R EP EATER /
C O N VE R TE R
(BR IC K )
J2
PIN
SD
2
3
RD
C TS
GN D
5
7
a45239
PIN
3
2
5
4
7
RD
SD
C TS
R TS
GND
8 DCD
20 D TR
SE R IES 90
CMM
PO R T
1
OR
2
1 SH LD
25- PIN
F EM ALE
25- P IN
M ALE
25- PIN
M ALE
25- PIN
F EMA LE
Figure E-19. Cable E: RS-232 Converter to CMM
GFK-1065F
Appendix E Converters
E-23
Appendix Cable Data Sheets
F
Cables used with Series 90 Micro PLCs are described in this and other documents. This appendix
provides a data sheet describing each of the Series 90 Micro PLC cable types so that all cable
information can be found in one convenient location. Each data sheet contains the following
information:
•
Cable name and function
•
Applicable catalog numbers
•
Hardware description of cable: connector types, cable type, other relevant hardware
•
Wiring diagram of cable
Information on the following cables is included in this appendix:
GFK-1065F
IC693CBL303
Hand-Held Programmer cable......................................................... F-2
IC690CBL701
PCM to Workmaster (IBM PC-XT) ................................................ F-4
IC690CBL702
PCM to IBM PC-AT ...................................................................... F-5
IC647CBL704
Workstation Interface board to Series 90 CPU................................. F-6
IC690CBL705
PCM to Workmaster II (IBM PS/2)................................................. F-7
Micro PLCs
2-Wire Cable Diagrams .................................................................. F-8
F-1
F
IC693CBL303: Hand-Hand Programmer Cable
The Hand-Held Programmer (HHP) cable provides the connections that allow the HHP and the
PLC to communicate. It can also be used to connect the RS-485 serial port on the PLC to the RS422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter (IC690ACC900).
The prewired cable (IC693CBL303) is 6 feet (2 meters) long. This is the cable used with the HHP.
If a different length cable is required for connection to the converter, refer to the information below
for specifications and wiring information.
This information is essential if you intend to build your own cable. The recommended cable types
for custom cables are listed below and depend on the length of the cable.
Table F-1. Specifications for IC693CBL303 Prewired Cable
Item
Description
Connectors
Same connector is on both ends
15-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Canon DA15S (solder pot)
Hood
AMP 207470-1 connector shell
Hardware Kit
AMP 207871-1, Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips
Cable Type
Belden 9508: AWG #24 (.22 mm2)
Cable Length
6 feet (2 meters)
Table F-2. Wire Types for Custom Cables
Cable Length
30 feet (10m)
>30 (10m) feet
to 980 feet
(300m)
1.
2.
Wire Size
22 (.36 mm2)
22 (.36 mm2)
Catalog Number
Belden 9309
Same as for 30 feet. In addition, the+5VDC logic power source for the
converter cannot be supplied by the PLC. It must be provided by an
external power supply connected to the +5V and SG pins at the converter
end of the connector. The +5V pin at the PLC connector must not be
connected to the cable. The +5V and SG connections from the power
supply must be isolated from their own power line ground connection. Be
sure that there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC
except the SG cable connection.
Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is
acceptable. It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire. Since it is sometimes hard to find a
cable with the desired number of twisted pairs (the Belden 9309 has an extra pair), you might end up with
a cable with extra pairs.
A greater cable length between the PLC and the converter increases the possibility of noise coupling into
the data and converter logic power circuits within the cable. The cable should be as short as possible in
noisy environments. In extreme cases, additional noise protection measures, such as double-shielded
cables, could be required.
The following wiring diagram is for the IC693CBL303 cable and for cables that may be built for
connection to the IC690ACC900 converter.
F-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
F
R S -232/R S -485
C onverter
(IC 690A C C900)
25-pin
F em ale
R S -232
P ort
15-pin
F em ale
R S -485
P ort
R S -422
Twisted S hielded
P airs
S H LD
A TTC H
DCD ( A )
DCD ( B )
RT
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
P IN
1
4
2
3
9
10
11
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
5V
a44750
P IN
1
4
2
3
S H LD
A TTC H
D CD ( A )
D CD ( B )
12
13
12
13
9
10
11
SD ( A )
SD ( B )
RT
RD ( A' )
RD ( B' )
5
5
0V
7
R TS ( A )
6
R TS ( B ) 14
C TS ( A ' ) 15
8
C TS ( B ' )
15-pin
M ale
7
15
8
6
14
S eries
90 P LC
R S -422
P ort
5V
0V
C TS ( A ' )
C TS ( B ' )
R TS ( A )
R TS (B )
15-pin
M ale
15-pin
Fem ale
Note: P Ins 9 and 10 are jum pered at both ends of cable to connect term inating
resistors for the R D signal which is inside the P LC power s upply.
Figure F-1. Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303
GFK-1065F
Appendix F Cable Data Sheets
F-3
F
IC690CBL701: Workmaster (PC-XT) to RS-485/RS-232 Converter
Cable
This cable provides RS-232 signal connections between the RS-485/RS-232 converter
(IC690ACC901) and a serial port on a Workmaster computer or IBM-XT or equivalent PC.
Table F-3. Cable Specifications, IC690CBL701
Cable Length
10 feet (3 meters)
Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMM Side
Programmer Side
25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1 or equivalent
9-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205203-1 or equivalent
Cable Clamps
25-pin
9-pin
AMP 207908-7 or equivalent
AMP 207908-1 or equivalent
Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2), Belden 9536
or equivalent
Cable Type
W O RK MAS TER
OR
IB M P C-XT
9-PIN
FE MA LE
PIN
PIN
2
3
4
5
8
9
7
3
2
5
20
8
1
7
TD
RD
R TS
C TS
DCD
D TR
GND
9-PIN
MA LE
a42831
RD
TD
C TS
D TR
D CD
S HLD
G ND
25-PIN
MALE
P CM
25-PIN
FEM ALE
Figure F-2. Converter to Workmaster or PC-XT Serial Cable
F-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
F
IC690CBL702: PC-AT to RS-485/RS-232 Converter Cable
This cable provides RTS-232 signal connections between the RS-485/RS-232 converter
(IC690ACC901) and a serial port on an IBM PC-AT or equivalent PC.
Table F-4. Cable Specifications, IC690CBL702
Cable Length
10 feet (3 meters)
Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMM Side
Programmer Side
25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1 or equivalent
9-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205203-1 or equivalent
Cable Clamps
25-pin
9-pin
AMP 207908-7 or equivalent
AMP 207908-1 or equivalent
Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2), Belden 9536
or equivalent
Cable Type
PIN
P IN
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
1
2
3
8
5
20
7
P C-A T
DCD
RD
TD
D TR
R TS
C TS
G ND
9-PIN
MA LE
9-P IN
FEMA LE
a42832
S HLD
TD
RD
DC D
CTS
DTR
GND
25-P IN
MA LE
P CM
25-P IN
FE MALE
Figure F-3. Converter to Workmaster or PC-AT Serial Cable
GFK-1065F
Appendix F Cable Data Sheets
F-5
F
IC647CBL704: Workstation Interface to SNP Port Cable
The serial Workmaster Interface cable has a 15-pin D connector on one end and a 37-pin D
connector on the other end. This cable connects the CPU's serial port to the Workstation Interface
board installed in the programming computer through an isolated shielded, twisted pair.
Table F-5. Cable Specifications, IC647CBL704
Cable Length
Connectors
CPU Side
Programmer Side
10 feet (3 meters)
15-pin male, D-subminiature type with M3 screws and AMP hood 207908-4, or
equivalent
37-pin male, D-subminiature type with 4-40 screws and AMP hood 1-207908-0, or
equivalent
Hardware Kit
AMP 207871-1. Kit includes two metric screws and two screw clips.
Cable Type
24 AWG (.21 mm2), 30V computer grade. Extra flexible construction
recommended for short lengths.
P IN
W O R K S T A T IO N
IN T E R F A C E
(W S 9A 1 )
3 7 - P IN
FEMALE
D -TYPE
C ON N E C TOR
0V
S D (B )
S D (A )
1
26
27
CTS (A)
CTS (B)
R TS (B)
R TS (A)
RT
R D (B)
R D (A)
SH LD
30
31
32
33
36
34
35
37
3 7 - P IN
MALE
D -T Y P E
CON NEC TOR
a43114
P IN
4000 FE ET
(1 2 0 0 M E T E R S )
M A X IM U M
7
11
10
9
14
6
8
15
0V
R D ( B ')
R D ( A ')
RT
R TS (B )
R TS (A )
C T S ( B ')
C T S ( A ')
13
12
1
S D (B )
S D (A )
S H LD
1 5 - P IN
MALE
D -TYP E
CONNECTOR
S E R IE S
90-70
(C P U )
S E R IE S
90-30
(P S )
1 5 - P IN
FEMALE
D -T Y P E
C O N N E C TO R
Figure F-4. Series 90 PLC to Workmaster II Serial Cable
F-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
F
IC690CBL705: Workmaster II (PS/2) to RS-485/RS-232 Converter
Cable
This cable provides RTS-232 signal connections between the RS-485/RS-232 converter
(IC690ACC901) and a serial port on a Workmaster II or an IBM Personal System 2 (PS/2) or
equivalent PC.
Table F-6. Cable Specifications, IC690CBL705
Cable Length
10 feet (3 meters)
Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMM Side
Programmer Side
25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1 or equivalent
25-pin female, D-subminiature type, AMP 205207-1 or equivalent
Cable Clamps
25-pin
AMP 207908-7 or equivalent
Cable Type
Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2), Belden 9536
or equivalent
PIN
W O RK MAS TE R II
A ND
IB M P S/2
25-PIN
MALE
TD 2
RD 3
RTS 4
CTS 5
D CD 8
DTR 20
G ND 7
25-P IN
FE MA LE
a44033
PIN
3
2
5
20
8
1
7
RD
TD
CTS
DTR
DC D
S HLD
GND
25-PIN
M ALE
PC M
25-PIN
FEM ALE
Figure F-5. Converter to Workmaster II or PS/2 Serial Cable
GFK-1065F
Appendix F Cable Data Sheets
F-7
F
2-Wire Cable Diagrams
PIN
SERIES 90
CMM
PORT
1
OR
2 **
25- PIN
FEMALE
a50001
PIN
9
SD (A)
SD (B) 21
RD (A') 13
RD (B') 25
10
11
12
13
RD (A')
RD (B')
SD (A)
SD (B)
24
10
22
11
23
7
1
9
6
14
15
8
7
1
TERM *
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
CTS (A')
CTS (B')
0V
SHLD
* TERM
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
CTS (A')
CTS (B')
0V
SHLD
25- PIN
MALE
SERIES 90
MICRO
PORT
1
OR
2
15- PIN
FEMALE
25- PIN
MALE
* TERMINATE CONNECTION: ON THE
MICRO PLC,
JUMPER INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR
**ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN
SUPPORT RS-422/RS-485
Figure F-6. CMM to Micro with Flow Control=None (2-Wire RS-422/RS-485)
SHIELDED
TWISTED
PAIRS
PIN
SERIES 90
CMM
PORT
1 OR 2
25- PIN
FEMALE
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A')
RD (B')
9
21
13
25
TERM
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
CTS (A')
CTS (B')
0V
SHLD
24
10
22
11
23
7
1
MAKE
CONNECTIONS
INSIDE
D-CONNECTORS
*
a500002
PIN
10
11
12
13
RD (A')
RD (B')
SD (A)
SD (B)
9
5
14
15
8
7
1
TERM
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
CTS (A')
CTS (B')
0V
SHLD
SERIES 90
MICRO
PORT
I OR 2
15- PIN
MALE
15- PIN
FEMALE
10
11
12
13
RD (A')
RD (B')
SD (A)
SD (B)
SERIES 90
MICRO
9
6
14
15
8
7
1
TERM
RTS (A)
RTS (B)
CTS (A')
CTS (B')
0V
SHLD
25- PIN
MALE
PIN
UP TO A
MAXIMUM OF
4000 FEET
(1200 METERS)
15- PIN
MALE
TO OTHER MICROs
(MAXIMUM OF 8 CMMs ON A MULTIDROP)
TERMINATE THE RD (B') SIGNAL
ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE
PORT
I OR 2
15- PIN
FEMALE
* TERMINATE CONNECTION AT FIRST AND LAST DROPS. FOR THE CMM,
INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHMS RESISTOR.
** ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS-422/RS-485.
Figure F-7. CMM to Multi-Drop Setup (2-Wire RS-422/RS-485)
F-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
Appendix Sample Application or PWM and Pulse Outputs
G
Series 90 Micro PLC Analog I/O Through CALEX Signal Conditioners
Analog I/O is useful in a broad range of applications for such things as pressure and level sensing,
positioning, and temperature control. The Series 90 Micro PLC can be used with CALEX signal
conditioning units to provide a cost-effective solution. Analog channels can be added on a per
channel basis, which allows customers to tailor their system at an incremental cost. CALEX signal
conditioning units require only one discrete input (for Analog inputs) or one discrete output (for
Analog outputs), with setup for use only required in the configuration of the PLC. Currently
available solutions are 11-bit resolution equivalent. Installation is made easy through DIN rail
mounting and Phoenix European-style wiring terminals. CALEX signal conditioners are available
in Current In, Current Out, Voltage In, Voltage Out, and J-type Thermocouple units. The unit has
space requirements of approximately 1.65 inches (42mm) high, 1.06 inches (27mm) wide, and 3.78
inches (96mm) long. The signal conditioning unit weighs only 3 ounces (85 grams).
Application
A user wants to use one analog input channel and one analog output channel to control flow rate.
The analog input channel is used to determine fluid level and the analog output channel to control a
positioning valve that varies flow rate into a tank. The user would also like to scale the output so
that a one-to-one relationship exists between the value entered and the frequency sent out to the
Frequency-to-Analog converter.
The Series 90 Micro PWM and pulse train (PT) frequencies are varied by entering values into the
AQ2 and AQ123 registers respectively. The frequency that is output has an inverse relationship to
the value entered in the register. That is, the lower the value placed in the AQ2 register, the higher
the frequency sent out. For example, the PWM output will be set to the maximum frequency of
2khz for a decimal value of 614 written into the AQ2 register and 20hz for a decimal value of
61439. (For sample calculations of PWM and PT frequencies, see “Configuring Q1 for PWM or
Pulse Output” in Chapter 5.)
Note
Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers. They can be entered as
hex or as two’s complement values. In Logicmaster 90, when entering hexadecimal
numbers in a reference table, a leading A through F must be preceded by a zero (for
example, 0FFFF). To enter a two’s complement number, enter it as a negative integer
(int). For additional information, see “Reference Tables” in the Logicmaster™ Series 9030/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466.
GFK-1065F
G-1
G-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
2 4 VDC
A na log
Inp ut
C on dition er
Inp ut
L
~
24VD C
or
100/ 240
VA C
L
N
N
2 4 VDC
Power
S upply
V
GN D
GN D
I1
Q1
I2
C OM1
I3
VC
I4
3K
P ulldo wn
24 VD C
L
O
A
D
Q2
C OM1
L
O
A
D
Q3
I5
L
O
A
D
Q4
I6
L
O
A
D
Q5
I7
AC or D C
Pow er
S ou rce
C OM2
I8
L
O
A
D
Q6
CO M2
A C or D C
Power
S ourc e
C OM3
I9
L
O
A
D
Q7
I10
AC o r D C
Pow er
S ource
CO M4
I1 1
L
O
A
D
Q8
I12
AC or D C
P ow er
S ou rce
COM5
C OM3
L
O
A
D
Q9
C OM6
I13
A C or D C
Power
S ourc e
CO M3
L
O
A
D
Q10
I1 4
L
O
A
D
Q 11
I15
CO M7
C OM4
A C or D C
P ower
S ource
L
O
A
D
Q12
I16
CO M7
CO M4
An alo g S ign al
C onditio ne r
O utput
24 V D C
Analo g
O utpu t
a45654
G
Figure G-1. Sample Wiring Diagram for PWM/Pulse Train Application
GFK-1065F
G
Solution
The proposed solution requires the following:
•
Logicmaster Series 90 Micro or Series 90-30/20/Micro Logicmaster software (Release 6.0
or later)
•
Double Integer division and multiplication math functions in application code
•
Series 90 Micro PLC with DC output
•
CALEX signal conditioning input unit
•
CALEX signal conditioning output unit
Example 1
The CALEX 8507 input signal conditioner produces a 0 to 5khz wave for a 0 to 10 volt input. The
frequency varies proportionally to the voltage applied from the field side of the unit. A frequency
of 1.25khz seen by the Series 90 Micro would correspond to a sensor voltage input of 2.5 VDC.
To set up the CALEX signal conditioning input units, run the Logicmaster 90 configuration
package and select the I/O option. The signal conditioning input unit sends out a frequency that is
proportional to the voltage or current applied from the field side. The frequency is fed into one of
the Type A HSC inputs on the Micro PLC.
To configure the Micro PLC, set the HSC type to A, enable counts, and set time base to the number
of counts desired (example: a 1000ms timebase will display 2000 count for a 2Khz wave sent out
by the signal conditioner). To speed up the effective throughput of the CALEX input unit, decrease
the counts per timebase and scale according to user needs in the ladder logic (example: A 500ms
timebase will display 1000 counts for a 2Khz wave, which can be scaled to 2000 counts through a
multiplication function in the ladder logic). The corresponding frequency can be viewed in the
counts per timebase register (for the above example, the HSC 2 counts per timebase register is
AI03). It should be noted that the TYPE A counter setup requires two inputs for each counter. If the
second input required for a TYPE A counter is not used for strobing the counter, it is still available
as an input. This means that the signal conditioning input only requires one input per analog
channel in. Additionally, due to hardware constraints, when the high-speed output function is used
(PWM or PT), channel one cannot be used as a high-speed counter input. This makes the maximum
number of AI set to three when PWM or PT is required in TYPE A counter mode.
GFK-1065F
Appendix G Sample Application or PWM and Pulse Outputs
G-3
G
Example 2
The CALEX 8510 output signal conditioner produces a 0 to 5VDC output for a 0 to 2Khz input
from the Micro PLC. The voltage output varies proportionally to the applied frequency. A
frequency of 1Khz will result in an output voltage of 2.5VDC. It should be noted that the Micro
PLC does not allow frequencies of less than 19hz to be produced because the largest supported
value for the AQ2 register is hex FFFF. In addition, the frequency that can be output is in
increments of 3hz (best case) but varies between 3 and 4hz due to the rounding effects of the
equation.
The setup for the signal conditioning output is similar to that for the input, except that values must
be written to AQ2 and AQ3 registers to set up frequency and duty cycle respectively. From the
Logicmaster 90 configuration package:
•
Select the I/O configuration.
•
Select TYPE A counter option.
•
Disable High Speed Counter 1.
•
Enable PWM output.
From the Logicmaster 90 programmer package:
•
Set the value of the AQ3 register to 200 decimal (this value produces the proper duty
cycle over the full frequency range).
•
Set the AQ2 register to the required value to produce the desired frequency according to
the equation
Frequency =
9.84 MHz
8∗( AQ2 + 1)
The frequency output equation is rewritten in terms of AQ2 as follows:
AQ2 =
9.84 MHz
8∗ Frequency − 1
which represents the value that needs to be written into the AQ2 register to produce the desired
frequency. The application code provided on pages G-5 through G-6 solves the above equation and
writes the value into the AQ2 register. Due to firmware constraints, the lowest frequency that can
be obtained is 19hz. Values less than 19 exceed the maximum value allowed for the AQ2 register.
The application code will set the frequency to 100% duty cycle (constantly on “1”) for a value of
less than 19 written into the AQ2 register.
Benefits
G-4
•
Analog available on a per-channel basis
•
Cost-effective solution
•
Ease of ramping output through application code with a one-to-one relationship for scaling
•
Readability of desired output frequency without doing conversion prior to entering into AQ2
register
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
G
Sample Ladder Logic Diagram
REFERENCE NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
%S0007
ALW_ON
%R0015
CONST
9.84 MHz / 8
%R0017
OUT_HZ PWM or PT desired output
%R0021
ROUND1 Round up by adding 0.5
%R0023
ROUND2 Divide by 10 to finish round up
%R0019
SCALE1 9.84MHz/8*Frequency
|[ START OF LD
PROGRAM CALEX1
]
|
|[
VARIABLE DECLARATIONS
]
|
|[
BLOCK DECLARATIONS
]
|
|[
START OF PROGRAM LOGIC
]
|
| << RUNG 4 STEP #0001 >>
|
|ALW_ON
|%S0007
+—————+
+——] [———————+ DIV_+—
|
| DINT|
|
|
|
|CONST
|
| SCALE1
|%R0015
—+I1 Q+—%R0019
|+0012300000 |
| +0000098400
|
OUT_HZ |
|
|
%R0017 —+I2
|
| +0000000125+—————+
|
| << RUNG 5 STEP #0003 >>
|
|ALW_ON
|%S0007
+—————+
+—————+
+——] [———————+ ADD_+——————————————————————————————————————+DIV_+|
|
| DINT|
| DINT|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SCALE1 |
| ROUND1
ROUND1 |
| ROUND2
|
%R0019—+I1 Q+—%R0021
%R0021 —+I1 Q+—%R0023
|+0000098400 |
| +0000098405
+0000098405 |
|+0000009840
|
CONST —+I2
|
CONST —+I2
|
| +0000000005+—————+
+0000000010 +—————+
|
| << RUNG 6 STEP #0006 >>
|
|ALW_ON
|%S0007
+—————+
+——] [———————+ SUB_+—
|
| DINT|
|
|
|
|
ROUND2 |
| SUB1
|
%R0023 —+I1 Q+—%R0025
| +0000009840|
| +0000009839
|
CONST —+I2
|
| +0000000001+—————+
GFK-1065F
Appendix G Sample Application or PWM and Pulse Outputs
G-5
G
|
| << RUNG 7 STEP #0008 >>
|
|ALW_ON
|%S0007
+—————+
+——] [——————————————————+ LE_ |
|
| DINT|
|
|
|
|
SUB1
|
|
+—————+
|
%R0025——+I1 Q+—————————+MOVE_+—
|
+0000009839
|
|
| INT |
|
|
|
|
|
|
MAX_ALW |
| SUB1
|
| PWM_PT
|
%R0027——+I2
| %R0025——+IN Q+—%AQ002
|
+0000065535 +—————+ +09839 | LEN | +09839
|
|00001|
|
|
|
|
+—————+
|
| << RUNG 8 STEP #0011 >>
|ALW_ON
|%S0007
+—————+
+——] [—————————————————+ GT_ |
|
| DINT|
|
|
|
|
SUB1 |
|
+——————+
|
%R0025 +I1 Q+—————————+MOVE_ +—
|
+0000009839 |
|
| INT |
|
|
|
|
|
|
MAX_ALW |
|
|
| PWM_PT
|
%R0027 —+I2
| CONST —+IN
Q+—%AQ002
|
+0000065535 +—————+
+00000| LEN | +09839
|
| 0000 |
|
|
|
|
+——————+
|
|[
END OF PROGRAM LOGIC
]
G-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
Appendix Case Histories
H
This appendix contains brief descriptions of applications that use the Series 90 Micro PLC. The
Series 90 Micro PLC is an ideal way to replace relays and automate small processes. Its all-in-one
construction saves panel space and its powerful features bring productivity and cost savings to
almost any control application. It is a perfect solution for such applications as packaging, industrial
machinery, material handling, and printing. The Series 90 Micro PLC offers the high standards of
reliability and quality you have come to expect from GE Fanuc at a cost lower than traditional
control devices.
Sample applications for the following industries are described:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
GFK-1065F
Automotive...............................................................................................................H-2
Bakery......................................................................................................................H-3
Chemical ..................................................................................................................H-4
Commercial Agriculture ...........................................................................................H-5
Commercial Laundry................................................................................................H-6
Construction Equipment ...........................................................................................H-7
Entertainment ...........................................................................................................H-8
General Purpose Machinery......................................................................................H-9
Lumber...................................................................................................................H-10
Material Handling...................................................................................................H-11
Paper......................................................................................................................H-12
Petroleum ...............................................................................................................H-12
Packaging...............................................................................................................H-13
Plastics...................................................................................................................H-15
Public Emergency Services .....................................................................................H-17
Sports Equipment ...................................................................................................H-18
Tubing Manufacturing ............................................................................................H-19
Water and Wastewater ............................................................................................H-20
Wire Manufacturing ...............................................................................................H-24
Woodworking.........................................................................................................H-25
H-1
H
Automotive Industry
Fluid Pumping Control
The Need
A cost-effective PLC was needed to replace an expensive, custom-made PC control board that
controlled an automated fluid pumping station. The system controls four vacuum pumps, alternates
their start-up sequence, delays their run time when alarms are cleared, and controls the clean out
filters for the multiple conditions.
It was also important to the customer that a stocking distributor and technical support be available
for the PLC.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC was used to satisfy the needs of this system. The PLC’s ease of
programming, cost effectiveness, and capabilities made it the logical solution.
Filter System
Motor 1
Motor 2
Motor 3
Motor 4
Vacuum Pump System
Series 90 Micro
The Benefits
Tremendous cost savings are gained by eliminating the custom-made PC board control system. The
customer also benefits from the extensive local and national product support. Also, the Series 90
Micro PLC is more versatile than the custom-made board, making the system easy to modify or
expand in the future.
H-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Bakery Industry
Pastry Line Conveyor Control
The Need
The system includes several conveyors for a toaster pastry line, in which on-the-spot decisions on
when to transfer pastries to the packaging machine conveyor are made. Decisions are based on the
count of pastries, which occurs at high speed, and the downstream packaging machinery loading.
The Solution
GE Fanuc supplied ten Series 90 Micro PLCs and a Series 90-70 PLC. The Micro PLCs are
distributed along the conveyor belt at each packaging point. The high-speed counting ability of the
Series 90 Micro and its local logic allow it to make the necessary on-the-fly decisions for conveyor
control.
System parameters are transmitted using SNP to the Series 90-70 PLC at the heart of the system.
The Series 90-70 PLC monitors the overall performance of the system.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC affords the customer the advantage of a cost-effective compact package
that provides high-speed counting and local logic.
Series 90 Micro PLCs control individual sections of the
conveyor as the Series 90-70 PLC controls the overall system.
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
H-3
H
Chemical Industry
Chemical Pumping Station
The Need
A PLC was needed to replace mechanical timers, counters, and relays that controlled pumping
stations delivering chemicals to the cleaning station. The mechanical system was hard-wired and
difficult to modify.
The Solution
A 14-point Series 90 Micro PLC was used with a compatible Operator Interface Terminal (OIT).
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC offered flexibility through programming, reduced need for panel space,
and ease of wiring.
Tank 1
Tank 2
Pump 2
Tank 3
Pump 3
X
Cleaning Station
X
Pump 1
X
Operator Interface Terminal
H-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Commercial Agriculture Industry
Grain Processing
The Need
A control system was needed to replace an existing filter timer board and tie in hardwired relay
controls. The filter board was replaced with PLCs to standardize the process control.
The Solution
A 14-point Series 90 Micro PLC was installed because it satisfied the system requirements and
because the customer was very satisfied with previously owned GE Fanuc equipment.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC added flexibility to the system and was a perfect fit for standardization.
The Series 90 Micro PLC uses the same programming hardware and software as the Series 90-30
PLC, which was already being used. This saved the cost of purchasing and learning new
programming equipment.
The Series 90 Micro PLC continuously
cycles outputs that actuate solenoids
which allow compressed air to clean
the filter socks.
Compressed
Air Tank
Filter
X
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
H-5
H
Commercial Laundry Industry
Garment Storage Rail Control
The Need
A control system was needed to replace a custom-built PC board that was costly to maintain. The
control system must be able to accurately drive the advancement of two garment storage rails and
track the number of garments on each rail. The storage systems include 30 to 40 rails, each with
400 to 500 garments.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC was used because it features built-in 5KHz high-speed counters.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC uses the same programming hardware and software as the
Series 90-30 PLC, which was already being used. This saved the cost of learning and purchasing
new programming equipment. Also, eliminating the high support costs associated with the
custom-built board provided significant cost savings.
Sensor
Garment Storage Rail
Hangers
Each Series 90 Micro PLC controls
two garment storage rails which
contain 400 - 500 garments each.
Each system contains 30 - 40 rails.
H-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Construction Equipment Industry
Pipe Measuring System
The Need
A control system that accurately measures pieces of 4-foot to 28-foot long pipe in feet and fractions
of an inch was needed. It is important to display the data in the same units instead of decimals to
make the system easy to use for operators. The information is received from an encoder and then
displayed on the operator interface unit (OIU). Operators use the OIU to specify pipe length and the
control system measures the pipe and cuts it to the specified length.
The Solution
A 14-point Series 90 Micro PLC and a compatible OIU were installed because they effectively
satisfied the cost criteria. Also, the four high-speed counters allowed the Series 90 Micro PLC to
interface with a quadrature encoder.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC produced more reliable machine operation and improved machine
performance. By interfacing with the OIU, the operator is easily able to set parameters in the PLC
which reduce order setup time and allows for faster processing of products.
The Series 90 Micro PLC
This provided the best value for small applications. Features include:
•
•
Economical starter pack
PID functionality
•
•
Built-in potentiometers to set timer/counter presets
Compatibility with Series 90-30 PLC programming
•
•
•
28-point model has two communication ports
Pulse width modulation on DC output models
Pulse catch outputs on DC output models
Operator Interface Unit
Cutting Wheel
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
Pushbutton Station
Encoder
The Series 90 Micro PLC measures
the length of the pipe using input from
the encoder and displays the length
on the operator interface unit.
H-7
H
Entertainment Industry
Nightclub Entertainment
The Need
A pushbutton control system that allows a disc jockey to vary the sequence of blinking lights for a
disco display was needed. The display consists of ten blinking lights in an adjustable timed
sequence.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC and a pushbutton assembly were used. The PLC was used because of its
size, ease of installation, and programmability. The analog potentiometers on the Series 90 Micro
PLC allow the time base to be easily adjusted.
The Benefits
Considerable cost savings were gained due to reduced labor because the Series 90 Micro PLC was
easily installed.
H-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
General Purpose Machinery
Automated Picture Frame Stapler
The Need
A compact, robust control system was needed for a new machine, to simplify the stapling process
in the construction of picture frames.
The Solution
A 28-point Series 90 Micro PLC was used because of the high level of support that GE Fanuc
offers and the cost effectiveness of the product.
The Benefits
The reliability and ease of programming of the Series 90 Micro PLC have greatly benefited the
customer. Production was doubled with less operator fatigue and the customer realized hundreds of
dollars of savings per year.
Air Operated Stapler
Guide and Clamp
Foot Pedal
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
H-9
H
Lumber Industry
Pallet Rebuilding
The Need
A smaller control system was needed to measure the length of each board and position a hydraulic
press to flatten protruding nails. The existing system consisted of a large PLC.
The Solution
A 14-point Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen because it offers compact size and high speed.
The Benefits
The analog potentiometers on the Series 90 Micro PLC allow the operator to fine tune the system
to compensate for conveyor speed changes. The customer realized hundreds of dollars in savings
per machine by replacing the larger PLC.
The Series 90 Micro PLC receives input from photo
sensors on the conveyor to control the cylinders that
position the boards.
H-10
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Material Handling Industry
Automated Guided Vehicles
The Need
The Automated Guided Vehicles (AGVs) are powered by a 24VDC battery power supply which
also operates the control system. The manufacturer of these systems needed to replace the existing
PLC that used an excessive amount of the AGVs’ battery power.
The Solution
Two GE Fanuc Series 90 Micro PLCs per AGV were installed for peripheral driving control of the
vehicles and to communicate with the base station via SNP and radio modems.
The Benefits
The system now requires less power and less panel space because the Series 90 Micro PLC
replaced the larger PLC. Overall, hundreds of dollars in savings per system were realized.
It was also advantageous to install Series 90 Micro PLCs because the customer was already using
GE Fanuc Series 90-30 PLCs. As part of the Series 90 family, Series 90 Micro PLCs use the same
programming equipment and software as the Series 90-30 PLC.
X
The Series 90 Micro PLCs provide peripheral
driving control of the Automated Guided
Vehicles and convey information to the
base station via RF modems.
X
X
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
H-11
H
Paper Industry
Gear Pumping Machinery
The Need
Pumps are used to separate chemicals from rinsing water for proper disposal. A cost-effective
system was needed to control the logic for sequencing the operation of turning the solenoids and
pumps on and off. In addition, the operator must be able to monitor and change each of the 12
timing sequences externally. The process was controlled by timers and relays, which were costly to
maintain.
The Solution
A Series 90 Micro PLC and an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) were used to replace the
mechanical system.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen for cost and time effectiveness. It offered added benefits and
features, such as flexibility, over the mechanical system without increased cost. It also provides
system monitoring capability and allows error messages to be displayed.
Petroleum Industry
Lease Acquisition Control Transfer
The Need
A control system was needed to replace an old and obsolete PLC-relay combination system. The
replaced system had constant problems with the relays and replacement parts could not be found
for the obsolete PLC. The system is used for lease acquisition control transfer, the selling of oil
through pipelines.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC was used because the 28-point model fit the application perfectly and the
customer did not have to learn or purchase new programming software. The customer already used
a Series 90-30 PLC in other systems, and both PLCs use the same programming hardware and
software.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC allows the flexibility of upgrading the system to a Series 90-30 PLC
without changing the programming language.
H-12
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Packaging Industry
Shrink Wrapping Machine
The Need
A system was needed to control the operation of a shrink wrapping machine. The system receives
inputs from sensors to determine the position of the product and then wraps the product. The
system must allow parameters to be easily changed for different products.
The Solution
The 28-point Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it is cost effective and is a member of the
Series 90 family. The Series 90 Micro PLC uses the same programming hardware and software as
the Series 90-30 PLC. This allows the customer to buy only one software package to program
applications for the shrink machine and other larger machines.
The Benefits
The flexibility of the Series 90 Micro PLC allows the parameters to be changed at a control panel
without any programming modifications.
Shrink Wrapper
The Series 90 Micro PLC uses input from various sensors to determine
the position of product and parameters from the control panel to sequence
the wrapping of the products.
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
H-13
H
Videocassette Packaging
The Need
An inexpensive control system was needed to replace relays and hardwired counters. The system
must be able to read an encoder and sequence the machine’s operation based on input counts. The
system must control the conveyor, stacker/unstacker, shrink wrap station, and interfaces to the label
applicator control using digital I/O.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it offers built-in high-speed counters, a built-in
24VDC power supply, and cost effectiveness.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC proved to be easy to use, cost effective, and easy to install with less
wiring. Hundreds of dollars in wiring and device savings were realized per machine.
Videocassette Unstacker
Videocassette Stacker
Shrink
Wrap
Station
H-14
Label
Appl.
Station
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
Encoder
GFK-1065F
H
Plastics Industry
Injection Molding
The Need
A control system was needed to automate the application of plastic handles to milk and juice jugs.
The system needs inputs for counting and sequencing of two jugs that will be joined with one
plastic handle (for retail customer convenience).
Jugs are queued up before being fed through the handle applicator. The system needs to be flexible
for continual or random feeding, and to operate with jugs ranging in size from one quart to a gallon.
Handles are heated for easy application but without melting or deforming. The handle magazine
level must be monitored with low and out alarms. Other indicators include: in feed and out feed jam
detection, feed rate, shift, and totaled count.
The Solution
The 14-point Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it offers compact size, functionality, cost
effectiveness, and the customer’s experience with local support. Programming compatibility with
the Series 90-30 PLC was also a key factor because the system may grow beyond the capability of
the Series 90 Micro PLC.
The Benefits
By using the Series 90 Micro PLC the customer has the ability to easily modify the program to
match the machine operation in the customers’ environment. Also, modifications for unforeseen
glitches that are involved with each new installation can be made quickly. The Series 90 Micro
PLC is part of a product family that allows the system to grow as needs change without retraining,
and the customer is fully supported both locally and nationally.
Handle Magazine
Heater
Photoelectric Sensors
Stop Gate
The Series 90 Micro PLC uses
inputs from various sensors to control
the handle applicator system.
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
H-15
H
Plastic Parts Manufacturing
The Need
The customer needed the ability to standardize on one PLC product line to control various bowl
feeders. The PLC interfaces with sensors throughout the cycle of the bowls to control the output of
parts to an assembly machine.
The Solution
The 14-point Series 90 Micro PLC was used because it is part of the Series 90 family.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen because of its programming hardware and software
compatibility with the Series 90-30 PLC, which was already being used. Additionally, its cost
effectiveness allowed the customer to replace other controls, including other brands of Micro PLCs
used by OEM bowl suppliers.
Assembly Machine
Bowl Z
Assembly Machine
Bowl X
Assembly Machine
Series 90 Micro PLCs control
various bowl feeders allowing
standardization on one PLC.
H-16
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
Bowl Y
GFK-1065F
H
Public Emergency Services Industry
Storm Warning Systems
The Need
A small PLC control system with enough power and analog capabilities was needed to replace a
large modular PLC and relays. The system will receive input from air flow and temperature sensors
to determine when to sound the air raid sirens to alert the public of tornadoes and other severe
weather.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC was used with an analog adapter because of its compact yet robust
features.
The Benefits
The compact size of the Series 90 Micro PLC allows it to use existing or smaller enclosures,
lowering the overall cost for the PLC and associated equipment. Also, its reliability is essential to
sound sirens for the public’s safety.
Air Flow and
Temperature
Sensors
Calex Analog I/O
The Series 90 Micro performs logic on input from the sensors
to alert the town of pending tornadoes and other forms
of severe weather.
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
H-17
H
Sports Equipment Industry
Boxing Partner
The Need
A compact control system, with large application ability, was needed for a boxing simulation
machine designed for amusement and training. The machine allows a person to train for boxing or
to try their talents at the sport. The simulator is designed for gyms and amusement areas.
Due to the simulator’s movement patterns, a high-speed counter was necessary as well as
low-voltage DC inputs.
The Solution
A 14-point Series 90 Micro PLC and a GE Variable Frequency Drive were chosen. The Series 90
Micro PLC was chosen because it offers compact size, built-in high-speed counters, and cost
effectiveness. Also, it utilizes the same instruction set as the Series 90-30 PLC, which will allow
easy expansion for added features.
The Series 90 Micro PLC uses sensor inputs to control a GE Variable Frequency Drive which has
seven pre-selected speeds. Together they provide a variety of motions that simulate those of a
boxing opponent.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro completed the tasks while saving both space and cost.
The Series 90 Micro PLC uses input from
sensors on the bag to control the GE Variable
Frequency Drive that determines the bag’s motion.
Series 90 Micro PLC
H-18
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Tubing Manufacturing Industry
Tube Bending
The Need
A control system was needed to automate a tube bending process, which was being performed
manually by sight with control relays. The objective is to bend the tube to a specific angle which
changes by order.
The Solution
A 28-point Series 90 Micro PLC was used with an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) and three
encoders. The Series 90 Micro PLC uses pulse width modulation to control the encoders for
positioning and communicates with the operator via the OIT. The operator uses the OIT to adjust
the process speed.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC is much more accurate than the manual method and therefore material
waste was significantly reduced. Also, set-up time between orders was reduced.
The Series 90 Micro PLC
This provided the best value for small applications. Features include:
GFK-1065F
•
Economical starter pack
•
PID functionality
•
Built-in potentiometers to set timer/counter presets
•
Compatibility with Series 90-30 PLC programming
•
28-point model has two communication ports
•
Pulse width modulation on DC output models
•
Pulse catch outputs on DC output models
Appendix H Case Histories
H-19
H
Water and Wastewater Industry
Flood Control Monitoring
The Need
A reliable and cost-effective control system was needed to monitor and control the number of start
and stop cycles, elapsed time, on/off status, and fault condition of flood control pumping stations.
The previous system used hardwired pilot lights, which conveyed only basic information to the
operator and were difficult to maintain.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC was used with a compatible Operator Interface Unit (OIU) because of its
proven reliability.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC’s reliability and cost effectiveness are the most important benefits to this
system. All of the 80 to 90 pumping stations are unmanned, so the high reliability of the Series 90
Micro PLC is a key benefit to the system. Also, through an operator interface unit, the Series 90
Micro PLC is able to convey information much more effectively than the previous pilot lights. This
metering information can be used to help the maintenance team identify possible problem areas in
the sewer line. The Series 90 Micro PLC provides valuable information about the capabilities of the
existing sewer system to handle large amounts of water during heavy storms.
Manholes in the Road
Float
Switch
Sewer System
Unmanned Pumping Station
Series 90 Micro PLCs use float switches to monitor the level of water in the sewer system. During
storms it cycles relief pumps on and off to prevent the backup of water into houses and businesses.
H-20
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Sewage/Wastewater Lift Stations
The Need
A reliable control system was needed to replace a large cabinet containing 6 timers and 140 relays.
Lift stations located throughout a town were constantly failing and requiring emergency call-outs
of electricians at all hours.
The control system is used to control the water level in a wet well. It operates two pumps
alternately, each for a specified amount of time, to reduce the wear and tear on the pumps. It also
monitors the valve check arms to verify that the switches are complete and that water is flowing
properly. It must also monitor the operating temperature of the motors and shut down the motors if
a thermal overload occurs.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen because it offers programming hardware and software
compatibility with the Series 90-30 PLC, which was already being used.
In addition, the Series 90 Micro PLC’s high capacity for amperage allows the PLC to be directly
wired to the coil of the motor starters. Competing brands of micro PLCs did not offer this
capability.
The Benefits
Using the Series 90 Micro PLC eliminated the need for emergency maintenance call-outs. The
decrease in overtime and downtime costs paid for the Series 90 Micro PLC in less than a month.
The Series 90 Micro PLC controls two
alternating pumps as they pump water
from the 90 ft deep basin.
Ground Level
Outgoing Flow
90 Feet
Water Level
Incoming Flow
Wet Well
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
Bottom of the Shaft
H-21
H
Wastewater Treatment
The Need
The customer needed to replace an electromechanical control as part of the redesign of wastewater
treatment equipment. The system automatically adjusts treatment parameters in response to
changes sensed in the influent. It also permanently records all operational functions, to provide
information on every function of each cycle for whatever time reference desired. This information
is used to indicate if service or maintenance is needed so the operator can use preventive measures
to stop failures.
The Solution
Series 90 Micro PLCs were installed with a Series 90-30 PLC and CIMPLICITY InTouch
software. The Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it provides software compatibility with
the Series 90-30 PLC.
The Benefits
The compact size and reliability of the Series 90 Micro PLC improved equipment performance and
cost efficiency.
Series 90-30 PLC
CIMPLICITY InTouch
RS422 LAN
Tank 4
Tank 3
Tank 2
Tank 1
Each Series 90 Micro PLC controls a tank and is also
connected to the master Series 90-30 PLC for override control.
H-22
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Water Flow Control
The Need
A control system that includes analog and discrete I/O was needed to monitor and control water
flow through a treatment facility. Remote well sites are required to operate independently as well as
receive override control from a master PLC site via RF modem or short haul modem.
The Solution
The Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen to be used with the Series 90-30 PLC and
CIMPLICITY InTouch and HMI software because of its compatibility and small footprint. The
system was able to use Data-Linc Group modems and it was easy to program the logic.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC and other GE Fanuc products are proven to be very reliable and interface
well with each other.
Water Management Office
The master Series 90-30 PLC collects
data from the remote Series 90 Micro PLCs
and sends it to the CIMPLICITY system,
which has overriding control of the system.
Modem
Remote Pumping Station
Remote Pumping Station
Modem
Modem
Remote Pumping Station
Modem
The Series 90 Micro PLCs control the water flow at the remote sites and
transfer process data to the master Series 90-30 PLC.
GFK-1065F
Appendix H Case Histories
H-23
H
Wire Manufacturing Industry
Quality Control
The Need
A control system was needed to replace a strip chart that plotted the number of quality defects per
100 feet of wire produced. The data is used to correlate the quality of the wire to the process
variables, temperature, and speed. The correlation will be used to achieve a level of Six Sigma
Quality.
The Solution
A system consisting of two Series 90 Micro PLCs and CIMPLICITY software was installed to
interface with the existing Series 90-30 PLC. The Series 90 Micro PLCs collect quality data, the
Series 90-30 PLC collects process variable data, and the CIMPLICITY software correlates, trends,
and analyzes the data. The Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because of its cost effectiveness.
The Benefits
The Series 90 Micro PLC automated the data transfer process so that the manual data retrieval and
analysis associated with the strip chart was eliminated. The compact size of the Series 90 Micro
PLC was also a benefit to the system.
CIMPLICITY HMI with Minitab
software correlates the quality data
to the Process Variable Changes
Series 90 Micro PLCs collect
the Quality Data
Series 90-30 PLC collects
the temperature and speed data.
H-24
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual – June 1998
GFK-1065F
H
Woodworking Industry
Conveyor Chain Lubricator
The Need
A control system was needed to automatically lubricate the chains of a conveyor system to decrease
wear on the chains.
The Solution
A 14-point Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it is cost-effective and easily adjusted. The
analog potentiometers of the Series 90 Micro PLC allow the operator to vary the time delay
between lubrications and the amount of oil applied to the chain without programming equipment.
The Benefits
Material replacement costs were reduced because using the Series 90 Micro PLC system doubled
the chain life. Also, the operation is much quieter.
The Series 90 Micro PLC
This provided the best value for small applications. Features include:
GFK-1065F
•
Cost effective
•
Economical starter pack
•
PID functionality
•
Built-in potentiometers to set timer/counter presets
•
Compatibility with Series 90-30 PLC programming
•
28-point model has two communication ports
•
Pulse width modulation on DC output models
•
Pulse catch outputs on DC output models
Appendix H Case Histories
H-25
Index
2
24 VDC inputs
specifications, 4-7
24 VDC power requirement
IC693UDR002, 2-19
A
AC inputs
described, 2-7
specifications, 4-17
AC outputs
described, 2-8
specifications, 4-18
B
Battery
estimated lifetime, 2-16, 2-17
Baud rate settings, 5-2
Bias resistor, 5-39
for PWM and Pulse train outputs, 4-12, 5-35
Bits
fault, 8-7
system, 8-7
transition, 8-7
BLKMV function
HSC example, 6-34
Serial Port 2 example, 5-15
Bulletin board, 9-9
C
Accumulator
offset adjustment value, 6-3
type A operation, 6-8
type B operation, 6-15
Addressing data, B-1
Agency approvals, 3-20
Alarm Processor software, 9-3
Analog I/O
calibration, 7-9
configuration, 7-5
described, 2-8
overview, 7-2
specifications
input, 4-15, 7-4
output, 4-16, 7-4
Analog potentiometer
input filtering, 8-17
overview, 2-7
Appendices
cable data sheets, F-1
case histories, H-1
converters, E-1
fixed I/O map locations, B-3
instruction timing, A-1
PLC/software cross reference, C-1
reference types, B-1
sample application for PWM and Pulse outputs,
G-1
serial port and cables, D-1
Approvals, standards, and general
specifications, 3-20
A-Quad-B counting, 6-14
ASCII output
configuration, 5-21
overview, 2-7
Autobaud, 5-12
Averaging filter, 8-17
Cable and connector specifications
for serial port, D-2
Cable connections
Hand-Held Programmer, 3-8
serial communications, multidrop, 3-12
work station interface, 3-10
Cable diagrams
for isolated repeater/converter, E-20
multidrop connections, D-12
PLC-to PLC multidrop, D-18
point-to-point connection, D-11
programmer-to PLC multidrop, D-12
serial connection, D-7
Cables
connecting programming devices, 3-9
expansion port pinouts, 3-19
Hand-Held Programmer cable, F-2
PC-AT to RS-485/RS-232 converter, F-5
PC-XT to RS-485/RS-232 converter, F-4
Workmaster II to RS-485/RS-232 converter, F-7
Workmaster interface to SNP port, F-6, F-8
Workmaster to RS-485/RS-232 converter, F-4
Calibration
Analog I/O, 7-9
Catalog numbers
Micro PLC, 1-1
Catalog numbers, cables
IC647CBL704, 3-10, F-6, F-8
IC690CBL701, E-3, F-4
IC690CBL702, E-3, F-5
IC690CBL705, E-3, F-7
IC693CBL303, E-4, F-2
Catalog numbers, converters
IC655CCM590, E-13
IC690ACC900, E-2
IC690ACC901, 3-10, E-9
Catalog numbers, fuse kit
IC693ACC001, 3-15
Catalog numbers, HHP
GFK-1065F
Index-1
Index
IC693PRG300, 2-3, 2-15, 3-8
memory card
IC693ACC303, 2-15, 5-4
Catalog numbers, software
IC641SWP301L, 304J, 306F, 307F, 2-3
Catalog numbers, Software, cable kit & manuals
IC640HWP300, 2-15
Catalog numbers, terminal strips
IC693ACC002, 2-12, 2-15
IC693ACC003, 2-12, 2-15
Catalog numbers, WSI board
IC647WMI920, 3-10
CE Mark installation requirements, 3-22
Cfg From
configuration parameter, 5-2
Clearing memory, 5-8
Clocks
elapsed time, 8-11
time of day, 8-11
setting, 5-9
Clocks and timers, 8-11
COMM_REQ function block
command block
for Port 2 configuration, 5-15
custom protocol (ASCII), 5-17
data, sending, 5-15
format, 5-18, 6-38
High Speed Counters, 6-34
RTU, 5-17
SNP, 5-16
Communications link
broken, 8-14
Compatibility
and Series 90-20 PLCs, C-1
communication protocols, 2-9
expansion unit, 2-11
Logicmaster 90 software, 2-3
other PLCs, 2-3
Configuration
Analog I/O, 7-5
ASCII output, 5-21
averaging filter for potentiometers, 8-17
DC output, 5-35
discrete input filtering, 8-16
expansion units, 5-26
HSC using HHP, 6-27
HSC using Logicmaster 90 software, 6-24
serial ports, 5-12
using Hand-Held Programmer, 5-4
using Logicmaster 90 software, 5-10
Configuration and programming
overview, 2-14
Configuration and register data
storing to flash memory, 5-8, 8-18
Configuration, HSC
Logicmaster 90 screens, 6-25
Index-2
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
type A counter, 6-25, 6-28
type B counter, 6-26, 6-31
Connecting a programming device, 3-8
Connections, wiring
I/O, 4-20
input power supply, 4-20
Constant sweep time mode, 8-5
Constant Sweep Timers, 8-11
Converters
IC655CCM590, E-13
IC690ACC900, D-6, E-2
IC690ACC901, E-9
Count direction, 6-10
B counter, 6-31
configuring for A counters, 6-28
Count edge
B counter, 6-32
configuring for A counters, 6-29
type A counters, 6-10
Count limits
A-type, 6-11
type B counter, 6-17
Count mode, 6-10
B counter, 6-31
configuring for A counters, 6-28
type B counter, 6-16
Count output enable
A counters, 6-28
configuring for B counter, 6-31
Counter
timebase, 6-3
type A counter, 6-10
Counter enable
configuring for A counters, 6-28
configuring for B counter, 6-31
Counter strobe/preload
configuring for A counters, 6-28
configuring for B counter, 6-31
Counter Time Base
type B counter, 6-17
Counter type
HHP screen, 6-27
CPU serial ports, 2-9
Customer support, 9-9
D
Data commands
Type A counter, 6-35
Type B counter, 6-37
Data structure, 8-6
DC inputs
described, 2-7
specifications, 4-7
DC output
GFK-1065F
Index
configuring
using HHP, 5-6
using Logicmaster software, 5-35
described, 2-6
setting parameters, 5-35
specifications, 4-12
DC output circuit
described, 2-8
DC output for IC693UDD104
specifications, 4-12
Default conditions, output modules, 8-15
Defaults
for HSC, 6-20
Delta delay, 5-37
Derating curve
for AC output, 4-19
Examples, applications
High Speed Counter
input capture, 6-41
RPM indicator, 6-40
Micro PLCs, H-1
PWM and Pulse outputs, G-1
Examples, COMM_REQ
command block for Autodial, 5-22
command block for Put String, 5-23
configuring Serial Port 2, 5-18
configuring the HSCs, 6-38
Expansion units
configuring, 5-26
different types in same installation, 3-18
installation, 3-16
release information, 2-11
Diagnostic data
F
fault references, 9-7
general, 8-18
Diagnostics
disabled, 3-7
normal powerup sequence, 3-6
powerup, 9-2
DIN rail mounting, 3-4
Discrete inputs
filtering, 8-16
Discrete memory reference definitions, 8-6
Duty cycle, 2-6, 5-36
configuring, 5-36
E
Elapsed Time Clock, 8-11
E-mail address, 9-9
Enable output bits
HSC, 6-6
Environmental requirements, 2-20
Error blink codes
defined, 9-2
Error detection and correction
powerup self-test, 3-7
Errors
counter limit error code, 6-11, 6-18
Logic Not Equal message, 9-9
ESD protection
CE Mark requirements, 3-22
Examples
calculation for Pulse Output, 5-38
calculation for PWM output, 5-37
command strings for Hayes-compatible
modems, 5-21
HSC application, G-3
PWM application, G-4
simple programming, 1-6
SVCREQ, 7-12
GFK-1065F
Index
Failure mode, HSC
configuring with HHP, 6-27
configuring with Logicmaster 90, 6-24
described, 6-7
Fast powerup
effects, 3-7, 5-2
effects of, 9-2
powerup times, 3-7
Fault bits, 8-7
Fault handling, 9-3
Fault reporting
overview, 2-14
Faults
classes of, 9-3
fault actions, table of, 9-4
fault summary references
example, 9-6
Flash Memory Alarm fault, 9-8
non-configurable, 9-8
PLC CPU software failure, 9-8
PLC sequence store failure, 9-8
reference definitions, 9-6
summary, 9-5
system response to, 9-4
Watchdog Timer Application fault, 9-8
FCC notice, iii
FCC requirements
for expansion unit, 3-18
Field wiring, 4-20
Filter time
Discrete Input Filtering, 8-16
impact on sweep time, 8-3
Filtering
analog, 8-17
discrete, 8-16
Flash memory
capacity, 2-4
Index-3
Index
Cfg From
configuring, 5-8
described, 5-2
operation, 8-18
function, 2-14
storing configuration and register data, 5-8
storing the user program, 5-7
Flash Memory Alarm, 9-8
Formulas, 5-41
PWM duty cycle, 5-36
PWM frequency, 5-36
Frequency
pulse train output, 5-38
PWM
configuring, 5-36
Frequently asked questions, 1-4
FTB protection
CE Mark requirements, 3-22
Function codes
RTU, 2-10
Functional description, 2-4
Fuses, 4-13
for output circuit protection, 4-11
replacing
(AC In/AC Out models only), 3-13
sizes, 3-15
G
Hazardous location note, v
Hex numbers
in reference tables, 5-37
High limit, HSC
configuring for A counters, 6-29
configuring for B counter, 6-32
High speed counters
%Q data from CPU, 6-6
analog input data, %AI, 6-4
COMM_REQ description, 6-38
CPU interface, 6-3
data automatically sent by, 6-4
data automatically sent to, 6-6
output bits, %Q, 6-6
overview, 2-6
sample application, 6-40, G-3
status bits, %I, 6-5
status codes
%AI, 6-5
type A
operation, 6-8
type B
operation, 6-14
High speed counters, inputs
described, 2-7
logic connections, 4-9
terminal assignments, 6-2
High speed counters, outputs
described, 2-8
terminal assignments, 6-2
Gains and Offsets
High-speed DC output
default, 7-9
configuring, 5-35
described, 2-6
GE Fanuc bulletin board, 9-9
General wiring procedures
field wiring, 4-21
Generic expansion unit
configuration, 5-29
Generic output. See ASCII output
Getting started, 1-2
Gradual power down, 8-8
Grounding, 3-5
H
Hand-Held Programmer
analog I/O configuration, 7-7
configuration screens, 5-4
high speed counter configuration, 6-27
memory card, 5-4
useful functions, 5-8
Hand-Held Programmer abbreviations
B1–3/A4 counter configuration, 6-23
complete listing, C-2
Type A counter, 6-21
Hardware requirements
Housekeeping, 8-3
I
I/O circuits
wiring to, 3-5, 4-20
I/O Link IEU
configuration, 5-30
I/O Link Interface, 5-30
I/O system, 8-15
IBM-AT serial port, D-6
IEC definitions
logic, 4-1
Indicators
definitions, 2-13
powerup sequence, 3-6
Inductive loads
suppression circuits, 4-11
Input capture, 6-41
Input circuits
described, 2-7
specifications, 4-7
for installation, 3-1
Index-4
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
GFK-1065F
Index
Input filtering, 8-16
Input scan, 8-3
Inrush currents, 4-13
Installation, 3-2
grounding procedures, 3-5
Instructions
supported by Micro and Series 90-20 PLCs, C-2
timing, A-1
Interface specifications, 4-3
Isolated repeater/converter
cable diagrams, E-20
complex multidrop configuration, E-19
description of, E-13
logic diagram, E-15
pin assignments, E-16
rules for using, E-19
simple multidrop configuration, E-18
system configurations, E-18
Isolation Voltage, 4-13
J
Jumpers
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter, E-7
termination, D-4
L
LED indicators
blink codes, 9-2
normal operation, definitions, 2-13
Levels
privilege
change requests, 8-14
defined, 8-13
Limits
count
type A counter, 6-11
type B counter, 6-17
Lithium battery
estimated lifetime, 2-16, 2-17
Load suppression
on output circuits, 4-11
Logic Not Equal message, 9-9
Logic program
storing to flash memory
detailed explanation, 8-18
how to, 5-7
Logic solution
overview, 8-4
Logicmaster 90 software
analog I/O configuration, 7-6
high speed counter configuration, 6-24
Micro PLC configuration, 5-10
PLC compatibility, 2-3, C-2
GFK-1065F
Index
Low limit
configuring for A counters, 6-29
configuring for B counter, 6-32
M
Manual revisions, vii
Master/slave networks
Micro PLCs, D-25
various devices, D-18
Maximum Inrush Current, 4-13
Maximum Load, 4-13
Memory
clearing, 5-8
Memory allocation, 2-20
Memory size, B-2
Micro PLC
functional description, 2-4
specifications
general, 2-15
Miniconverter kit
cable diagrams, E-11
description, E-9
RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232, E-9
system configurations, E-11
Minimum hardware requirements, 3-1
Modem
Hayes-compatible, 5-21
Multidrop installations
general, 3-12
PLC-PLC, D-18
programmer-to-PLC, D-12
with isolated repeater/converter, E-18
N
Negative logic
input points, 4-1
output points, 4-2
Noise suppression
AC output, 4-18
O
OEM protection, 8-14
Off preset
configuring for A counter, 6-30
configuring for B counter, 6-32
type A counters, 6-11
type B counter, 6-18
OFF state leakage, 4-13
On preset
configuring for A counters, 6-29
configuring for B counter, 6-32
type A counters, 6-11
Index-5
Index
type B counter, 6-18
Operating parameters
type A counter, 6-9
type B counter, 6-16
Optical isolation, 3-12
Ordering information
fuse kits, 3-15
Output circuit protection, 4-11
Output circuits
described, 2-8
specifications, 4-10, 4-12
Output preset points
type A counters, 6-11
type B counter, 6-18
Output scan, 8-4
Output Voltage Drop, 4-13
Outputs, DC
configuring PWM and Pulse Train, 5-35
selecting with HHP, 6-30
P
Pager enunciation. See ASCII output
Parameter definitions
Analog I/O, 7-5
expansion units, 5-26
for Micro PLC, 5-2
Port 2, 5-13
Passwords
changing, 8-14
overview, 8-13
Phone numbers
GE Fanuc Automation, 9-9
Asia Pacific Operations, 3-15
Pinouts
expansion port, 3-19
IBM-AT/XT serial port, D-6
isolated repeater/converter, E-16
Micro PLC serial port, D-4
Miniconverter, E-10
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter, E-5
Workmaster RS-232 port, D-5
PLC sweep
software structure, 8-6
summary, 8-1
when in STOP mode, 8-5
Point-to-point connections
RS-232, D-7
RS-422, D-11
Port 2
task id, 5-18
Ports
RS-422
described, 2-9
pinouts, D-4
Index-6
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
PLC configuration, D-3
Positive logic
input points, 4-1
output points, 4-2
Potentiometers
input settings, 8-17
overview, 2-7
Power cycle
effect on PLC operation, 8-9
Power requirements
AC
IC693UAA003, 4-4
IC693UAA007, 4-6
IC693UDR001, 2-18, 4-3
IC693UDR005, 4-5
IC693UEX011, 4-3
DC
IC693UDD104, 4-4
IC693UDR002, 4-4
IC693UDR010, 4-6
Power supply
24 VDC output
specifications, 4-14
input
wiring to, 4-20
Power supply board
overview, 2-13
Power-down conditions, 8-8
Powerup defaults
for HSC, 6-20
Powerup self-test
LED blink error codes defined, 9-2
normal powerup sequence, 3-6
Powerup sequence, 8-8
Powerup times
with diagnostics disabled, 3-7
Preload value
configuring for A counter, 6-30
configuring for B counter, 6-33
effect on Preload flag, 6-3
type A counters, 6-13
type B counters, 6-19
Privilege levels
change requests, 8-14
defined, 8-13
for Serial Port 2, 2-11
Program structure, 8-6
Program sweep
deviations, 8-5
summary, 8-1
sweep time contribution, 8-3
Programmer attach feature, 5-20
Programmer grounding, 3-5
Programmer service
portion of CPU sweep, 8-4
GFK-1065F
Index
Programming examples, 1-6
Programming the Micro PLC
Hand-Held Programmer, 5-4
Logicmaster 90 software, 5-10
Protocols, communication, 2-3
release information, 2-9
Pulse catch inputs, 6-41
Pulse output
configuring, 5-38–5-43
described, 2-7
selecting with HHP, 5-7, 6-30
Pulse Output (UDD104), 5-43
Pulse width modulation. See PWM
PWM output
configuring, 5-36
configuring a UDD104 model, 5-40
described, 2-6
sample application, G-4
sample calculation, 5-37
selecting with HHP, 5-6, 6-30
Q
Quick start, 1-1
R
Rack slot mapping, 5-5
RAM memory
battery backup for, 8-7
Range
count limits, 6-11, 6-18
Reference tables
entering hexadecimal and two’s complement, 537
Reference types
discrete memory, 8-6
retentive, 8-7
References
fault reporting, 9-7
I/O
reserved, B-3
user
rules for using, E-19
simple multidrop configuration, E-18
system configurations, E-18
Replacing fuses
AC outputs
(AC In/AC Out models only), 3-13
Reset preload bits
HSC, 6-6
Reset strobe bits
HSC, 6-6
Resistor
bias, 4-12, 5-35
Response, 4-13
Revisions to this manual, vii
RFI standards, iii
RPM indicator
sample HSC application, 6-40
RS-232
pin assignments, E-5
point-to-point connections, D-7
RS-422
interface, D-1
point-to-point connections, D-11
serial ports, Micro PLC
described, 2-9
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter
cable description, E-4
features, E-2
functions, E-2
installation procedures, E-3
jumper configuration, user options, E-7
location in system, E-2
logic diagram, E-6
RS-232 interface pin assignments, E-5
RS-422/RS-485 interface pin assignments, E-5
specifications, E-8
RS-485/RS-422 to RS-232 converter
overview, D-6
RTU
configuring, 5-12
defined, 2-9
function codes, 2-10
Run mode
transition to, 5-35
defined, B-1
range and size, B-2, C-7
Relay outputs
described, 2-8
specifications, 4-10
Removable terminal strips, 2-12
Repeater/converter, isolated
cable diagrams, E-20
complex multidrop configuration, E-19
description of, E-13
logic diagram, E-15
pin assignments, E-16
GFK-1065F
Index
S
Sample applications
high speed counter, 6-40, G-3
Micro PLC, H-1
PWM output, G-4
Scan
input, 8-3
output, 8-4
Scan sequence
I/O, 8-15
Index-7
Index
Security
OEM protection, 8-14
system, 8-13
Self-test
LED blink error codes defined, 9-2
normal powerup sequence, 3-6
Serial Port 2
CE Mark requirements for connections, 3-22
COMM_REQ function block format, 5-18
Serial port and cables
cable and connector specifications, D-2
IBM-AT serial port, D-6
multidrop connections, D-12
RS-232 point-to-point connections, D-7
RS-232/RS-485 converter, D-6
RS-422 interface, D-1
RS-422 point-to-point connection, D-11
serial cable diagrams, D-7
Series 90 serial port, D-3
Workmaster serial port, D-5
Serial ports
configuring, 5-12
IBM-AT, D-6
protocols supported, 2-9
Series 90 PLC
high speed counter, 6-5
Stepper motors, 5-40
Stop mode
transition from STOP to RUN, 5-35
Storing the user program
how to, 5-7
Strobe edge
configuring for A counters, 6-29
configuring for B counter, 6-32
type A counters, 6-10
type B counter, 6-17
Strobe register, 6-4
Super Cap backup for RAM memory, 2-4
Suppression circuits, 4-11
Surge protection, 3-22
SVCREQ function block
analog I/O calibration, 7-12
to read elapsed time clock, 8-11
Sweep
PLC, 8-1
Sweep time contribution, 8-3
Symbol, %, B-1
System discrete references, 8-7
definitions, 9-7
connector configuration, D-3
described, 2-9
pinout, D-4
Workmaster, D-5
Series 90-20 PLC
functional cross-reference, C-1
Series 90-30 PLC
compatibility with, 5-4, 5-6
HSC functions compatibility with, 6-27
Slot assignments
Micro PLC functions, 5-5
Micro PLC’s high speed counter functions, 6-27
SNP ID, 2-11, 5-12
Software packages, 3-10
Specifications
5 VDC power supply, 2-16, 2-17
AC inputs, 4-17
AC outputs, 4-18
Analog input, 4-15, 7-4
Analog output, 4-16, 7-4
DC output circuit, 4-12
environmental, 2-20
interface, 4-3
Micro PLC, 2-15
physical and functional, 2-16
relay output circuits, 4-10
serial port cables, D-2
Specifications, power requirements
AC, 2-18
DC, 2-19
Status codes
Index-8
Series 90™ Micro PLC User's Manual–June 1998
T
Technical help, 9-9
Terminal strips, 2-12
Time base value
configuring for A counters, 6-10, 6-29
configuring for B counter, 6-32
Time of Day clock, 8-11
setting, 5-9
Timers
constant sweep, 8-11
timed contacts, 8-12
timer function blocks, 8-12
watchdog, 8-11
Timing
for type B counter, 6-14
Micro PLC instructions, A-1
Transferring
90-20 PLC program to a Micro PLC, C-1
Micro PLC program to a 90-30 PLC, 5-5
Transistor Outputs, 4-13
Transistor outputs for IC693UDD104, 4-12
Transition bits, 8-7
Troubleshooting
accessing the Fault Table display, 9-8
fault handling, 9-3
Flash Memory Alarm fault, 9-8
Logic Not Equal message, 9-9
PLC CPU software failure, 9-8
PLC sequence store failure, 9-8
GFK-1065F
Index
technical help, 9-9
Watchdog Timer fault, 9-8
Two’s complement
in reference tables, 5-37
Type A counter
configuration, 6-25
described, 2-6
operating parameters, 6-9
operation, 6-8
parameters
summary, 6-21
Type B counter
configuration, 6-26
described, 2-6
operating parameters, 6-16
operation, 6-14
parameters
summary, 6-23
U
UL hazardous location note, v
Unpacking, 3-1
User program
examples, 1-6
storing to flash memory, 8-18
User references, B-1
supported by Micro and Series 90-20 PLCs, C-7
W
Watchdog Timer
application fault, 9-8
described, 8-11
What you will need, 1-1
Wire connection information, 4-20
Wiring
field connections, 4-20
requirements for CE Mark installation, 3-22
Workmaster serial port, D-5
GFK-1065F
Index
Index-9
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement